2019 - Automotive SUBARU - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL 2019 SUBARU

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner's Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owner's Manual, such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This Owner's Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information found herein.

"SUBARU" and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.

© Copyright 2018 SUBARU CORPORATION

Vehicle types

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

Line drawing of a modern SUV front view (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a car rear view showing front and side panels (no text or symbols)

001512

Warranties

■ Warranties for U.S.A.

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru America, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come with the following warranties

• SUBARU Limited Warranties
● Federal Emission Control Systems Warranties
- California Emissions Control Systems Warranties

All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet." Read these warranties carefully.

■ Warranties for Canada

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the following warranties:

• SUBARU Limited Warranty
- Emission Control System Warranty

All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Service Booklet." Read these warranties carefully.

■ Warranties except for U.S.A and Canada

All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet." Read these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owner's Manual

■ Using your Owner's Manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious injury and damage to your vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seatbelt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indicators and how to use the instruments and other switches.

Chapter 4: Climate control

This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you about your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start an operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive SUBARU in various conditions and explains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if have a problem, such as a flat tire or engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service This chapter informs you when you need to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimensions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Uniform tire quality grading standards and Reporting safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that's this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

For EyeSight system:

For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

yo■ Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGS, CAUTIONs and NOTES in this manual. These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or suggestions about how to make better use of your vehicle.

■ Safety symbol

000013

You will find a circle with a slash through in this manual. This symbol means "Do not", "Do not do this", or "Do not let this happen", depending upon the context.

■ Abbreviation list

You may find several abbreviations in t manual. The meanings of the abbreviations are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation	Meaning
ABS Anti-lock	brake system
A/C Air conditioner
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
ALR/ELR	Automatic locking retractor/Emergency locking retractor
AVH Auto Vehicle Hold

hAWD All-wheel drive
s BSD/RCTA	Blind Spot Detection/Rear Cross Traffic Alert
CVT	Continuously variable trans-mission
DRL Daytime	running light
EBD	Electronic brake force distrib- bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW	Gross axle weight
GAWR	Gross axle weight rating
GPS	Global positioning system
GVW	Gross vehicle weight
GVWR	Gross vehicle weight rating
INT Intermittent

Abbreviation	Meaning
SLATCH	Lower anchors and tethers for children
LED Light emitting diode
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT	Methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
OBD	On-board diagnostics
RAB	Reverse Automatic Braking
RON	Research octane number
SRH	Steering Responsive Headlight
SRS	Supplemental restraint system
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS	Tire pressure monitoring system

Vehicle symbols

These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to "Warning and indicator lights" P24.

Mark Name

	WARNING
	CAUTION
	Read these instructions carefully
	Wear eye protection
	Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid
	Keep children away
	Keep flames away
	Prevent explosions

Safety precautions when driving

■ Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

- All persons in the vehicle must fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

- To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbag does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.

- The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of the proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections.

- For the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" P53.

- For the SRS airbag system, refer to "SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)" P81.

■ Child safety

WARNING

- Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in collision, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.

- While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should always be seated in the REAR seat in a infant or child restraint system which is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

- Place children in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from

a deployment is greater.

- NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

an Always turn the child safety locks to the "LOCK" position when children sit in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out. Refer to "Child safety locks" P144.

- Always lock the passenger's windows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window. Refer to "Windows" P145.

- Never leave unattended children, adults or animals in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.

• When leaving the vehicle, close all windows and lock all doors.
• In models with power rear gate, when it operates, the rear gate moves with remarkable force. It is possible to be injured if anyone is caught in or hit by the rear gate is be sure to obey the following cautions.
• Check that there are no children around the rear gate before operating the power rear gate.
• Do not allow children to operate the power rear gate.

For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections.

- For the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" P53.

- For the child restraint system, refer to "Child restraint systems" P65.

- For the SRS airbag system, refer to "SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)" P81.

■ Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

• Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
• Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
• Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
• Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
• Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.
• If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully ope

- Keep the rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

■ Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reaction time and impairs your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking – even if you drink a little – it will increase the risk being involved in a serious or fatal accident, injuring or killing yourself your passengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol may increase the severity of that injury.

Please don't drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. However if, you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before getting behind the wheel.

■ Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may increase your, your passengers' and other persons' risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read the literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs.

■ Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction time will be delayed and your perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers' and other persons' chances of being involved in a serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but inste find a safe place to rest if you are tired sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to refresh yourself before continuing on your journey. When possible, you should share the driving wi others.

■ Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified other than with genuine SUBARU parts and accessories. Other types of modifications could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under warranties.

■ Use of cell phones/texting and driving

CAUTION

Do not talk on a cell phone or te while driving; it may distract your attention from driving and lead to accident. If you use a cell phone talk or text, first pull off the road park in a safe place. In some Stat Provinces, it may be lawful to talk a phone while driving, but only if phone is hands-free.

■ Driving vehicles equipped with navigation system

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract your attention from driving. Also, do not operate the controls of the navigation system while driving. The loss of attention to driving could lead to an accident. If you wish to operate the controls of the navigation system, first take the vehicle off the road and stop it in a safe location.

■ Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your attention from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your passengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-ain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be secured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a seatbelt through the carrier's handle.

- CONTINUED -

Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passenger's seat. For further information, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection society or pet shop.

■ Tire pressures

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires a cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. For detailed information, refer to "Tires and wheels" P447.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

■ On-road and off-road driving This vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance and higher center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over than ordinary passenger cars. It also handles and maneuvers differently from other passenger cars. For this reason, please read carefully the following section and follow the instructions and precautions in order to prevent serious injury or death due to loss of control, rollover and other accidents. Refer to "On-road and off-road driving" -P376.

■ Attaching accessories

WARNING

- Do not attach any accessories, labels or stickers (other than properly placed inspection stickers) to the windshield. Such items may obstruct your view.

- If it is necessary to attach an accessory (such as an electronic toll collection (ETC) device or security pass) to the windshield, consult your SUBARU dealer for details on the proper location.

General information

■ California Perchlorate Advisory

Certain vehicle components, such as air-bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless entry transmitter batteries, may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

■ Noise from under the vehicle NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours after the ignition switch is turned to "LOCK"/"OFF" position. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. This noise is caused by the operation of fuel evaporation leakage checking system and the operation is normal. The noise will stop after approximately 15 minutes.

■ Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event d recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition that will assist in understanding how a to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is such as law enforcement, that have the designed to record data related to vehiclespecial equipment, can read the informa-dynamics and safety systems for a short tion if they have access to the vehicle or period of time, typically 30 seconds or less the EDR.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

- How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

- Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

the How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

f EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; who data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the

-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags	1
Keys and doors	2
Instruments and controls	3
Climate control	4
Audio	5
Interior equipment	6
Starting and operating	7
Driving tips	8
In case of emergency	9
Appearance care	10
Maintenance and service	11
Specifications	12
Consumer information and reporting safety defects	13
Index	14

Illustrated index

■ Exterior

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 001513

1) Engine hood (page 435)
2) Front wipers (page 235)
3) Headlights (page 224)
4) Replacing bulbs (page 463)
5) Moonroof (page 156)
6) Roof rails (page 384)
7) Outside mirror (page 258)
8) Door locks (page 138)
9) Tire pressure (page 450)
10) Flat tires (page 406)
11) Snow tires (page 380)
12) Fog lights (page 231)
13) Towing hook (page 414)
14) Tie-down hooks (page 414)

1 2 9 8 7 6 5 4 3

001514

1) Rear window defogger (page 259)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 308)
3) Child safety locks (page 144)
4) Tie-down hole (page 414)
5) Replacing bulbs (page 465)
6) Trailer hitch (page 388)
7) Rear gate (page 148)
8) Towing hook (page 414)
9) Rear window wiper (page 237)

Interior

▼ Passenger compartment area

▽ Second-row captain seat models

1 2 1 1 1 5 2 4 3 001515

1) Seatbelt (page 53)
2) Lower anchorages for child restraint system (page 75)
3) Front seat (page 32)
4) Second-row seat (page 40)
5) Third-row seat (page 44)

▽ Second-row bench seat models

Diagram of car interior compartments with numbered labels pointing to different seat positions

1) Seatbelt (page 53)
2) Lower anchorages for child restraint system (page 75)
3) Front seat (page 32)
4) Second-row seat (page 40)
5) Third-row seat (page 44)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 001516

1) Power windows (page 145)
2) Door locks (page 139)
3) Outside mirror switch (page 258)
4) Select lever (page 325)
5) Front power supply socket (page 290)
6) USB power supply (page 292)
7) Glove box (page 288)
8) Cup holder (page 288)
9) Center console (page 288)

Diagram of car interior with numbered component labels and control buttons, likely for automotive or diagnostic reference.

1) Moonroof switch (page 157)
2) Sunshade switch (page 157)
3) Button for SUBARU STARLINK
4) X-MODE switch (page 339)
5) Auto Vehicle Hold switch (page 345)
6) Electronic parking brake switch (page 343)
7) Power outlet (page 292)
8) Rear climate control (page 266)
9) USB power supply (page 292)
10) Cup holder (models with second-row captain seat) (page 288)

NOTE

For U.S.-spec. models with SUBARU STARLINK: Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security.

■ Instrument panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 9 8 11 12 13 14 001518

1) Power rear gate switch (page 149)
2) Memory switch (page 149)
3) Illumination brightness control dial (page 171)
4) Combination meter (page 168)
5) ENTER button for type A multi-function display (black and white) (page 199)/Multi-function display control switches for type B multi-function display (color LCD) (page 203)
6) Type A multi-function display (black and white) (page 199)/Type B multi-function display (color LCD) (page 203)
7) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 168)
8) Audio and navigation system*
9) Climate control (page 265)
10) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 260)
11) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 351)
12) Fuse box (page 461)
13) Hood lock release knob (page 435)
14) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch (page 337)

*: For details about how to use the audio and navigation system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

NOTE

For models with the EyeSight system: Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

1 2 3 4 4 9 8 7 6 5 001335

1) Audio control switches*1
2) Talk switch for voice command system*
3) Cruise control* 2
4) Shift paddle (page 328)
5) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page 261)
6) SRS airbag (page 81)
7) Horn (page 262)
8) Combination meter display control switches (page 192)
9) Hands-free phone switches*1
*1: For details about how to use the switches, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
*2: For details about how to use the switches, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

■ Light control and wiper control levers/switches

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 000761

1) Windshield wiper (page 232)
2) Mist (page 235)
3) Windshield washer (page 236)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch (page 237)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch (page 236)/Sensor sensitivity control (page 235)
6) Windshield wiper and washer switches (page 235)
7) Light control switch (page 223)
8) Fog light switch (page 231)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 224)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change (page 226)
11) Turn signal lever (page 232)

■ Combination meter

▼ U.S.-spec. models

1 2 3 4 5 (1) AT OIL TEMP AMD OFF OFF* CHECK ENGINE 7 6 AVH OFF ABS MPG AVG 22.0 MPG mi 1327.0 1337mi EDGE PARK BRAKE 001520

1) Tachometer (page 168)
2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page 190)
3) Combination meter display (page 192)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 169)
5) Speedometer (page 168)
6) Fuel gauge (page 170)
7) Engine coolant temperature gauge (page 170)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

▼ Except U.S.-spec. models

1 2 3 4 5 AT OIL TEMP AND OFF OFF* CHECK ENGINE 7 1327.0 1337km V/100km AVG 22.0 100km km EDGE 4 ! (P) (I) AVH OFF (O) 001521

1) Tachometer (page 168)
2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page 190)
3) Combination meter display (page 192)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 169)
5) Speedometer (page 168)
6) Fuel gauge (page 170)
7) Engine coolant temperature gauge (page 170)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

■ Warning and indicator lights

Mark Name Page
	Seatbelt warning light	173
	Front passenger's seatbelt warning light	173
	SRS airbag system warning light	174
	Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator	174
	Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator	174
CHECK ENGINE	CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light	175
	Charge warning light	176
	Oil pressure warning light	176
	Engine oil level warning light	176

Mark Name Page
AT OIL TEMP	AT OIL TEMP warning light	177
R.DIFF TEMP	Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if equipped)	177
ABS / (ABS)	ABS warning light 179
BRAKE / (!)	Brake system warning light	179
PARK / (P)	Electronic parking brake indicator light	180
	Door open warning light	182
AWD	AWD warning light 182
	Power steering warning light	182
AVH	Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light	181
	Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light	181

Mark Name Page
	Vehicle DynamicsControl warning light/Vehicle DynamicsControl operation indicator light	183
	Vehicle DynamicsControl OFF indicator light	184
	Turn signal indicator lights	190
	LED headlight warning light (if equipped)	190
	High beam indicator light	190
	High beam assist indicator light (if equipped)	190
	Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (if equipped)	190
SRH OFF	Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light (if equipped)	190
	Front fog light indicator light (if equipped)	191
	Access key warning indicator (if equipped)	184
	Security indicator light	189
EDOE	Headlight indicator light	191
	X-MODE indicator 191
	Hill descent control indicator	191
	Low fuel warning light	181
----	Low tire pressure warning light(U.S.-spec. models)	177
----	Windshield washer fluid warning light	176
	BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)	191
	BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped)	191
	RAB warning indicator (if equipped)	191

Mark Name Page
RAB OFF	RAB OFF indicator (if equipped)	191
	Icy road surface warning indicator (if equipped)	191

Function settings

■ Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display

Setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed within the combination meter display to meet your personal requirements.

NOTE

For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.

*: You can also set this while driving.

Item			Available settings Factory default setting	Factory default setting	Page reference for the vehicle system operation
1st menu/vehicle system	2nd menu/adjustable vehicle system setting	3rd menu/selectable vehicle system setting
Screen Settings	Welcome Screen — On/Off On 193
	Good-bye Screen — On/Off On 193
	Gauge Initial Movement — On/Off On 171
	Units —		km, km/h, Liter/mile, MPH, Gallon	U.S.-spec models: mile, MPH, GallonOther models: km, km/h, Liter	199 and 203
	Tire Pressure Units (U.S.-spec. models)	— kPa/PSi	PSi	195
	Languages		English/Espanol/Français	U.S.-spec models: EnglishOther models: Français	203
Item			Available settings Factory default setting	Page reference for the vehicle system operation
1st menu/vehicle system	2nd menu/adjustable vehicle system setting	3rd menu/selectable vehicle system setting
Warning Volume* — —	Max/Mid/Min Mid			356 and 368 For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
EyeSight	Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound	— On/Off On		Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
	Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function	— On/Off On
	Cruise Control Acceleration Characteristics*	—	Lv.4 (Dynamic)/Lv.3 (Standard)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.1 (ECO)	Lv.3 (Standard)
	EyeSight Assist monitor	EyeSight Assist Monitor Red Indicator	On/Off On
		EyeSight Assist Monitor Yellow Indicator	On/Off On
		EyeSight Assist Monitor Green Indicator	On/Off On
RAB (if equipped) Sonar			Audible Alarm — On/Off On 368
SRH (if equipped) — —			On/Off On 230
Item			Available settings Factory default setting	Factory default setting	Page reference for the vehicle system operation
1st menu/vehicle system	2nd menu/adjustable vehicle system setting	3rd menu/selectable vehicle system setting
Vehicle Setting	Keyless Entry System	Audible Signal On/Off On 130
		Hazard Warning Flasher	On/Off On 122
		Driver Door Unlock Driver's Door Only/All Driver's Door Only 125
		Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock	Rear Gate/Trunk Only/All	Rear Gate/Trunk Only	125
	Defogger	—	15 minutes/Continuous	15 minutes	259
	Interior Light	—	10 seconds/20 seconds/30 seconds/Off	30 seconds	285
	Auto Door Lock and Unlock	Auto Door Lock	Vehicle Speed/Shift Into or Out of PARK/Off	Vehicle Speed	140
		Auto Door Unlock	Shift Into or Out of PARK/Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/Off	Driver Door Open	140
	Auto Light Sensor	—	Max/Mid/Low/Min	Mid	224
	Welcome Lighting	Approaching Time Set	30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/Off	30 seconds	225
		Leaving Time Set	30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/Off	30 seconds	225
	One-touch lane changer	—	On/Off On 232
	Ambient Lighting	—	On/Off On 197
Default Settings	—	—	No/Yes	—	197

■ Individual settings and adjustments excluding combination meter display NOTE

For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 143
Remote keyless entry system	Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation			136

■ Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer

A SUBARU dealer can change the setting adjustments of the following items to meet your personal requirements. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

Item Function	Available settings	Factory default setting
Alarm system	Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors)	0 seconds/30 seconds	30 seconds
	Reading lights, cargo area light, and map lights illumination	ON/OFF	OFF
Keyless Access (if equipped)	Audible signal volume	Level 1 to 7	Level 5
Remote keyless entry system	Hazard warning flasher	Operation/Non-operation	Operation
	Audible signal volume	Level 1 to 7	Level 5
Key lock-in prevention	Key lock-in prevention	Operation/Non-operation	Operation
Battery drainage prevention func-tion	Battery drainage prevention func-tion	Operation/Non-operation	Operation
Seatbelt warning	Sounds a chime while driving	Operation/Non-operation	Operation
Auto on/off headlights	Auto-on/off wiper-linked	Operation/Non-operation	Operation
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper	Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper	Operation/Non-operation	U.S.-spec. models: Non-operationOther models: Operation
Auto dimmer cancel	Sensitivity of the operation of the auto dimmer cancel	OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max	Mid

- CONTINUED -

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting
High beam assist function (if equipped)	High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Remote trunk open/Power rear gate open function	Activation of trunk opening/Power rear gate opening by remote control key/access key	Operation/Non-operation	Operation

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-1. Seats.... 32

Safety tips 32

Manual seat (if equipped)....35

Power seat (if equipped) 36

Second-row seats 40

Third-row seat 44

Head restraints 47

1-2. Seat heater (if equipped).... 50

Front seat heater 51

Second-row seat heater ....51

1-3. Seat ventilation (if equipped).... 52

1-4. Seatbelts.... 53

Seatbelt safety tips ....53

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) 55

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) 55

Seatbelt warning light and chime 55

Fastening the seatbelt 55

Seatbelt maintenance....61

1-5. Seatbelt pretensioners 62

Front seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt pretensioners 62

Second-row (window-side) seatbelts with shoulder belt pretensioner 63

System monitors 63

System servicing 64

Precautions against vehicle modification .....64

1-6. Child restraint systems.... 6 1

Safety tips for installing child restraint systems

Where to place a child restraint system .....66

Choosing a child restraint system ....69

Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt....70

Installing a booster seat 74

Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and top tether anchorages (LATCH) .....75

Top tether anchorages ....79

1-7. SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 81

General precautions regarding SRS airbag system....82

General precautions regarding SRS airbag system for accessories and any objects ....84

General precautions regarding SRS airbag system and children....86

Components 89

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system .....91

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag 102

SRS airbag system monitors 109

SRS airbag system servicing.... 111

Precautions against vehicle modification.... 112

How to contact the vehicle manufacturer concerning modifications for persons with disabilities that may affect the advanced airbag system 113

1-1. Seats

■ Safety tips

▼ Safety tips for seat

WARNING

• Never adjust the seat while driving, as it may cause loss of vehicle control or personal injury.
• Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of rear seat passengers and cargo are clear of the adjusting mechanism.
• After adjusting the seat, move it back and forth to make sure it is securely locked. If the seat is not securely locked, it may move or the seatbelt may not operate properly.
• Do not put objects under the front seats. They may interfere with front seat locking and cause an accident.
• Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

- The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of the proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

Illustration of two children sitting in a car seat, one wearing a seatbelt and the other with a belt (no text or symbols)

100082

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

for the child's age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seat) in the REAR seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child restraint systems, refer to "Child restraint systems" P65.

Illustration of a person seated in a chair using a seatbelt device, with no visible text or symbols.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

Diagram showing a hand holding a circular object with a diagonal line, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front seatback and seat cushion. Doing so may lead to defective operation of the following systems and could result in serious injury.

Occupant detection system ing SRS side airbag
- Seat heater (if equipped)
• Power seat (if equipped)
- Seat ventilation (if equipped)

Seats

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat with a hand placed on the seat, no text or symbols present.

WARNING

Do not press your feet onto the instrument panel. Doing so may prevent the occupant detection function of the SRS airbag system from functioning correctly, and may result in serious injury or death in the event of an accident.

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat with a belt buckle (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. Do put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

Simple line drawing of a person sitting on the floor next to stacked boxes, with a no-allowed symbol in the background (no text or symbols present)

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

▼ Safety tips for head restraint

WARNING

• Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear. Also, never install the head restraints the opposite way round. Doing so will prevent the head restraints from functioning as intended. Therefore, when you remove the head restraints, you must reinstall all head restraints correctly to protect vehicle occupants.
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle for or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

■ Manual seat (if equipped)

▼ Forward and backward adjustment

102102

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat the desired position. Then release the lever and try to move the seat back and forth to make sure that it is securely lost into place.

▼ Reclining the seatback

Diagram of a car seat assembly with a close-up inset showing the seat being adjusted for motion (no text or symbols present)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired position. Then to release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place. The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward with force when the lever is pulled. While operating the lever to return the seatback, hold the seatback lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.

▼ Seat height adjustment (driver's seat)

1 2 102104

1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat is lowered.
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat rises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted by moving the seat adjustment lever up and down.

■ Power seat (if equipped)
▼ Driver's seat

5 4 3 2 1 102269

1) Seat position forward/backward control switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward adjustment of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat cushion angle or seat cushion height.

2) Seat cushion angle control switch To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up or push down the front end of the control switch.
3) Seat height control switch To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch.
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control switch To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.
5) Lumbar support control switch (if equipped)

To adjust the lumbar support, push the front side or rear side control switch.

▼ Front passenger's seat

102270

1) Seat position forward/backward control switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or backward.
2) Seatback angle (reclining) control switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.

▼ Thigh extension (driver's seat – equipped)

CAUTION

When the thigh extension is pulled out to its fullest, do not put weight the top of it. Doing so could break the part.

1 ve 102281

The seat front length can be adjusted. Pull up the lever "1" to adjust the length and release the lever to lock it.

▼ Memory function (driver's seat - if equipped)

WARNING

- To avoid loss of vehicle control or onpersonal injury, never perform the following operations while driving.

- Adjusting the seat - Retrieving the seat position

- Before adjusting the seat or retrieving a registered seat position, make sure that cargo or the hands and feet of rear seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.

- Perform the seat position retrieval before driving. Be sure to confirm that the select lever is in the "P" position, and the parking brake is applied, when adjusting the seat position. Do not drive until the retrieval of the seat position is complete.

- When any unusual conditions or malfunctions occur during the retrieval of the seat position, stop the retrieval of the seat position by performing any of the following procedures.

• Operate any of the power seat switches
• Press the "SET" button
• Press button "1" or "2"

Some of your desired seat positions can be registered. Register the seat position with button "1" or "2" or each of the key and retrieve the seat position.

The following seat positions can be registered.

• Forward/backward position of the seat
• Angle of seatback
• Angle of seat cushion
• Height of seat

▽ Registration of seat position with button "1" or "2"

1. Adjust the seat position under the following conditions.

2. The parking brake is applied.

3. The select lever is in the "P" position.

fobs SET L1 L2 102271

1. While pressing the "SET" button, pre- and hold the desired button "1" or "2".

A chirp sounds once, and the seat pos is registered.

▽ Registration of seat position w each key fob

1. Adjust the seat position under the following conditions.

● The parking brake is applied.
- The ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.
- The select lever is in the "P" position

SET 102272

1. While holding the access key fob and pressing the "SET" button, press the button of the access key fob.

A chirp sounds once, and the seat position is registered.

▽ Retrieval of seat position registered with button "1" or "2"

WARNING

Be sure to press the correct button to retrieve your registered seat position. If the seat position is not optimum for you, it may adversely affect your driving and may reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt. That could result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

SET L1 L2 102273

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
2. While the select lever is in the "P" position and the parking brake is applied, press button "1" or "2".

A chirp sounds and the seat moves to registered position.

"OFF" position.

- When "1" or "2" is pressed, a ch sounds twice if the seat position is same as the registered position.

▽ Retrieval of the seat position registered with access key fob

1. Hold the registered access key fob.

, he 101952

1. Unlock the driver's door by pressing the "a" button or gripping the door hand.
2. Open the driver's door.
   A chirp sounds and the seat moves to registered position.

NOTE

- If the registered seat position can be retrieved after performing the previous procedures, try the following or

procedures.

rp (1) Press the "SET" button on the thedriver's door.

(2) Press the "a" button on the access key fob or touch the door lock sensor to lock the doors. (3) Perform the prior procedures again.

- If the keyless access function is disabled, the seat position cannot be retrieved by gripping the driver's door handle. However, the seat position can still be retrieved by pressing the "air" button on the access key fob. For information about how to enable/disable the keyless access function, refer to "Disabling keyless access function" -P128.

• If a new position is registered for the same access key fob, the previously registered seat position is deleted.
• When the driver's door is opened, a chirp sounds twice if the seat position is the same as the registered position.

he ▽ Clearing the registered seat positions with access key fob

1. Close the driver's door.
2. While holding the access key fob and pressing the "SET" button, press the "🔒" button on the access key fob.

A chirp will sound, and the registered seat position will be cleared.

■ Second-row seats

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seatbelt, no text or symbols present

WARNING

• Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
• Never adjust the seat while driving. Doing so is dangerous as the
  the

seat could move rapidly and you could be injured.

• Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of the third-row seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.
• After adjusting the seat, move it back and forth to make sure it securely locked. If the seat is not securely locked, it may move or the seatbelt may not operate properly.
• Do not put objects under the second-row seats. They may interfere with the seat locking and cause an accident.

Simple line drawing of a person sitting on the floor next to stacked boxes, with a no-smoking symbol in the background (no text or symbols present)

100094

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

Forward and backward adjustment

Line drawing of two car seats with seat covers and a directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Captain seat

Diagram of a car seat assembly with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Bench seat

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat the desired position.

▼ Reclining the seatback

Illustration of a person seated in a chair using a vertical device, with no visible text or symbols.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seat back. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap h sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death. to

CAUTION

• Never allow the third-row seat passengers to adjust the seat-back of the second row. Doing is dangerous as the seatback will tilt rapidly and could injure the passengers.
• If the cargo area cover is equipped, be careful not to pinch your hand between the headrest and the cargo area cover when you recline the seatback.

of ing belt 102258

Captain seat

Diagram showing car seatbelting instructions with directional arrows and a magnified view of the seatbelt switch.

Bench seat

Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired position.

Then release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place.

- CONTINUED -

▼ Folding down the seatback

WARNING

• Never allow passengers to ride on the folded seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.
• Secure skis and other long items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden stop, a sudden steering maneuver or a rapid acceleration.
• If passengers are sitting on the third-row seat, never drive while folding the second-row seat. It can be a serious interference at the time of braking and impact.
• If passengers are sitting on the third-row seat, never drive while the center seatback of the second-row seat is folded. Doing so may result in serious injury in the event of hard braking or an impact.
• When you return the seatback to its original position, shake the seatback slightly to confirm that it is securely fixed in place. If

seatback is not securely fixed in place, the seatback may suddenly fold down in the event of sudden braking, or objects may move out from the cargo area, which could cause serious injury or death.

- After returning the seatback to its original position, be sure to place all of the seatbelts and the tab attached to the seat cushion above the seat cushion. Also, make certain that the shoulder belts are fully visible.

1. Store the armrest.
2. Store the seatbelt buckle.

1 102261

the ^1) Holder

1. Store the window-side seatbelt in the holder.
2. Lower the headrest to the storage position.
   Refer to "Head restraints" P47.

e 102310

1. Pull the lever and tilt the seatback forward.

Diagram showing car seatbelt mechanism with directional arrows and a labeled component (102311)

1. Pull the lever to unlock the seatback The seatback will be folded down.
2. Slide the folded second seats backward until they lock.
3. To return the seatback to its original position, raise the seatback until it locks into place. Make sure it is securely lock

Armrest

WARNING

Do not hook the seatbelt onto the armrest when the seatbelt is fastened. The seatbelt may be unable fulfill its intended function in the event of an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury.

▼ Captain seat

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a black arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Lower the armrest to use it. To lower the armrest position: First lift it all the way to the top position then lower it to the bottom position.

To raise the armrest position: Lift the armrest from the bottom position the desired height.

to

Bench seat

Line drawing of a car seat with a highlighted panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest's top edge.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury, passengers must never be allowed to sit on the center armrest while the vehicle is in motion.

■ Third-row seat

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seatbelt, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

100094 WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward an injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

▼ Third-row seat

Diagram of a car seat assembly with two seats and a belt buckle, showing no text or symbols

Pull the strap up and adjust the seatback to the desired position.

Then release the strap and make sure the deatback is securely locked into place.

a▼ Access to the third-row seat

There are levers on both window sides of the second-row seat. Each lever is used to facilitate access to the third-row seat.

WARNING

In its slid-forward position with the seatback tipped forward, the second-row seat is not locked and is free to move. Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this state or allow anyone to sit on the seat unless it is completely locked. Doing

so may result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

When getting into or out of the third row seat, make sure the second-row seat is in the completely slid-forward position and be sure to watch your step.

rd- 102263

Bench seat

▼ To get out from the third-row seat

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a close-up inset showing the seatbelt switch (no text or symbols)

Captain seat
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

▼ To access the third-row seat

Interior view of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Captain seat

Fold the seatback forward and slide the seat toward the front.

Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/ aft position of the second-row seat, raise the seatback, and make sure the seatback is securely locked in position.

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion into a vehicle's side panel, with an inset highlighting the component.

Bench seat

Raise the lever from the third-row seat. The seatback of the second-row seat will tip forward and the seat will slide forward.

- CONTINUED -

Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/ aft position of the second-row seat, raise the seatback, and make sure the seatback is securely locked in position.

▼ Folding down the seatback

WARNING

• Never allow passengers to ride on the folded seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.
• Secure skis and other long items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden stop, a sudden steering maneuver or a rapid acceleration.
• When you return the seatback to its original position, shake the seatback slightly to confirm that it is securely fixed in place. If the seatback is not securely fixed in place, the seatback may suddenly fold down in the event of sudden braking, or objects may move out from the cargo area, which could cause serious injury or death.
  • After returning the seatback to its

original position, be sure to place all of the seatbelts and the tab attached to the seat cushion above the seat cushion. Also, make certain that the shoulder belts are fully visible.

1. Store the seatbelt buckle.

1 102268

1) Holder

the Store the window-side seatbelt in the holder.

1. Lower the headrest to the storage position.

Refer to "Head restraints" -P47.

Diagram of a car seat with two seats and a belt buckle, showing a close-up of the seat (no text or symbols present)

1. While pulling the straps, fold down the seatbacks.
   

Line drawing of a car seat with two arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

From inside

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a hand valve and seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

From outside

1. When returning the seatbacks to their original positions, either press up on the seatbacks from inside the vehicle, or from outside the vehicle pull up on the strap located on the back of the seatback. Lift the seat up securely until it locks in place

■ Head restraints

WARNING

Do not change the head restraint to the head restraint from a different seat. The head restraints were each designed specifically for the front seat, second-row seat, and third-row seat.

NOTE

It is possible to adjust the angle of front seat head restraints only. When installing the front seat head restraint make sure that the angle of the head restraints can be adjusted.

▼ Front seats

Both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat are equipped with head restraints. Both head restraints are adjustable in the following ways.

▽ Height adjustment

1 2 102169

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Rush the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback.

do remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

Side profile illustration of a human head and neck with a shaded anatomical region, no text or symbols present

Each head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupant's ears.

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be

- CONTINUED -

pulled out or installed due to insuffi-To return:

cient clearance between the head re straint and the roof, tilt the seat an then perform the installation and re- moval tasks.

▽ Angle adjustment

Diagram of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating rotation, no text or symbols present

The angle of the head restraint can be adjusted in several steps. While maintaining a suitable driving posture, adjust the head restraint to a position where the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.

To tilt:

Tilt the head restraint by hand to the preferred position. A click will be audible when the head restraint is locked.

Tilt the head restraint once as far forwa das it can go. The head restraint will automatically return to the fully upright position. Then, adjust the head restraint again to the preferred angle.

▼ Second-row seats

Head restraints are installed in all secon row seats, and can be adjusted as follo ing.

▽ Window side seating position

ck 1 2 101587

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the reheatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

Side profile illustration of a human head and neck with a shaded anatomical region, no text or symbols present

Each head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupant's ears.

After installing the head restraint, make sure it is securely locked.

▽ Applicable only for Eight seaters

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to be used at the retracted position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the extended position.

1 2 101588

1) Incorrect (retracted position)
2) Correct (extended position)

1 2 102300

1) Head restraint
2) Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

When the second-row center seating position is occupied, raise the head restraint to the extended position. When the second-row center seating position is not occupied, lower the head restraint to improve rearward visibility.

▼ Third-row seats

Head restraints are installed in all third-flow seats, and can be adjusted as described below.

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to be used at the retracted position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the extended position.

1 2 102301

1) Incorrect (retracted position)
2) Correct (extended position)

1 2 102302

1) Head restraint
2) Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while presing the release button on the upper of the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull of the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes are located on the top of the seatback the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

When the third-row seating position is occupied, raise the head restraint to the extended position. When the third-row seating position is not occupied, lower the head restraint to improve rearward visibility.

1-2. Seat heater (if equipped)

The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

CAUTION

• Do not put hard or heavy objects or ones with protrusions on the seat, and do not stab the seat with sharp objects, such as pins or needles.
• People with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low temperatures if they use the seat heater for a long period of time. When using the heater, always be sure to warn the persons concerned.
• Do not put anything on the seat which insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
• When the seat is warmed enough or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the seat heater.

NOTE

- Use of the seat heater for a long period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge. - When using for a long period of we recommend setting the air ventilation to the MID or LOW position. U HIGH position for only quick heating the start of the function usage.

graph TD
    A["HIGH"] --> B["MID"]
    B --> C["LOW"]
    C --> D["OFF"]
    D --> E["time, a- se the"]

■ Front seat heater

2 1 4 3 102276

Front seat heater switch
1) Front passenger's side
2) Indicator light
3) Driver's side (models with Seat ventilation)
4) Driver's side (models without Seat ventilation)

Press the front seat heater switch. Each time you press the switch, the mode will change as follows.

When HIGH mode is selected, all 3 indicators illuminate. When MID mode is selected, 2 indicators illuminate. When LOW mode is selected, 1 indicator illuminates. When in LOW mode, pressing the switch again turns all indicators OFF.

Selecting "HIGH" mode will cause the seat to heat up quicker.

Pressing and holding, then releasing the seat heater switch turns OFF the seat heater in any mode.

NOTE

The front seat heater function cannot be used simultaneously with the seat ventilation (if equipped).

■ Second-row seat heater

CAUTION

Do not open and close the center console lid while operating the second-row seat heater switch. There the risk of fingers being caught in the lid.

2 3 1 102292

Second-row seat heater switch
1) Front passenger's side
2) Indicator light
3) Driver's side

Press the second-row seat heater switch. Each time you press the switch, the mode will change as follows.

2 indicator lights are illuminated in HIGH mode, and 1 indicator light is illuminated in LOW mode. All indicator lights turn off when the heater is switched OFF.

^s NOTE

Only the front seat heater switches retain the previous switch position

- CONTINUED -

even if the vehicle has restarted. second-row seat switch will reset.

The1-3. Seat ventilation (if equipped)

The seat ventilation is equipped in the seats.

The seat ventilation operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

CAUTION

• Do not put hard or heavy objects or ones with protrusions on the seat, and do not stab the seat with sharp objects, such as pins or needles.
• When cleaning the seat, do not use organic solvents, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
• If water or liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it off with a dry cloth immediately.

NOTE

• Use of the seat ventilation for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.
  The seat ventilation function cannot be used simultaneously with the front seat heater.
• When using for a long period of time, we recommend setting the seat ventilation to the MID or LOW position. Use the HIGH position for only quick cooling at the start of the function usage.

2 3 1 102275

Seat ventilation switch
1) Front passenger's side
2) Indicator light
3) Driver's side

Press the seat ventilation switch. Each time you press the switch, the mode will change as follows.

When HIGH mode is selected, all 3 indicators illuminate. When MID mode is selected, 2 indicators illuminate. When LOW mode is selected, 1 indicator illuminates. When in LOW mode, pressing the switch again turns all indicators OFF.

Pressing and holding, then releasing the seat ventilation switch turns OFF the seat ventilation in any mode.

1-4. Seatbelts

■ Seatbelt safety tips

WARNING

• All persons in the vehicle must fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
• All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury.
• Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never use single belt for two or more persons – even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
• Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in a serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
• Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.

• Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.
• Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not
  a used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
• Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

- CONTINUED -

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat using a steering wheel (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle that been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do touch such hot parts until they co

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which record the use of the seatbelt by the passenger when any of the SRS frontal side and curtain airbags deploy.

▼ Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your vehicle. Refer to "Child restraint systems" P65.

▼ Children

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child's height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint will devices (including forward facing frontchild seats) in the REAR seats at

times.

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, refer to "Child restraint systems" P65.

If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, move the child closer to the belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the child's waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint system should be used. Never place the shoulder belt under the child's

arm or behind the child's back.

▼ Expectant mothers

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat with an arm and headband (no text or symbols)

Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap be should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

The driver's seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop impact or if you pull the belt very quick out of the retractor.

■ Automatic Locking Retractor Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)

Each passenger's seatbelt has an Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR ELR has an additional locking mode "Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode" intended to secure a child restraint system. When the seatbelt is once draw out completely and is then retracted even slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seatbelt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt retracted fully, the ALR mode is released

When securing a child restraint system the rear seats by the use of the seatbe the seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the seatbelt retracts fully and the retractor returned to Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode.

For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the ALR mode and restore the ELR mode, refer to "Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt" P70.

■ Seatbelt warning light and chime

Refer to "Seatbelt warning light and chime" -P173.

■ Fastening the seatbelt

t▼ Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position according to the following procedure.

Driver's seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger's seat: Adjust the seat-back to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possible.

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

- If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it he out more slowly.

- If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

to

Illustration of a person's seatbelt being adjusted for a cable, showing mechanical assembly (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
   

Illustration of a person using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component, with no visible text or symbols.

1. To make the lap part tight, pull up of the shoulder belt.
2. Place the lap belt as low as possible your hips, not on your waist.

Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height

Diagram showing two mechanical clamping setups with arrows indicating motion, no text or symbols present

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for the driver/front passenger. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.

To raise:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor up.

To lower:

Pull the release knob and slide the and down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure it is locked in place.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.

Unfastening the seatbelt

Illustration of a hand holding a tool with a small arrow, no text or symbols present

1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted. that Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

▼ Second-row and third-row seatbelts (except third-row center seatbelt)

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

3. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and put out more slowly.

4. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again

Illustration of a person adjusting a seatbelt with a belt, no text or symbols present

1. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

it let a in. 100103

1. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt.
2. Place the lap belt as low as possible your hips, not on your waist.

∇ Unfastening the seatbelt

Illustration of a person adjusting a seatbelt, showing hands and a close-up of the seat (no text or symbols present)

1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.
   Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

▼ Third-row center seatbelt

on 1 2 3 4 102293

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Connector (tongue)
3) Connector (buckle)
4) Center seatbelt buckle

WARNING 101735

Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted can increase the risk severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, especially when inserting the connector's tongue plate into the mating buckle (on right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twisted.

100109 WARNING

• Be sure to fasten both tongue or plates to the respective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as shoulder belt (with the connector's tongue plate not fastened the connector's buckle on the right-hand side), it cannot properly restrain the wearer in position in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
• The head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the extended position. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death could result.

Diagram of a mechanical component inside a housing, showing internal components and a numbered label (102294) at the bottom right corner.

Center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of the ceiling. 1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate from the slot located at the front of the recess by pulling the connector (tongue) plate rearward.

Line drawing of a hand holding a mechanical component, no text or symbols present

1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the overhead retractor.
   

Illustration of hands using a device to adjust a component, showing a downward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

1. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, insert the connector (tongue) attached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right-hand side until a click

is heard.

• If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly.
• If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

Line drawing of a person wearing a seatbelt, seated with hands near the seat (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate into the center seatbelt buckle marked "CENTER" on the left-hand side until it clicks.

it et in. 100115

1. To make the lap part tight, pull up the shoulder belt.
2. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.

▽ Seat belt comfort guide

In order to adjust the position of the shoulder belt, use the seat belt comfort guide.

Simple line drawing of two identical mechanical components with a central knob and an arrow pointing to one (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the comfort guide from the shoulder pocket.
   

Mechanical diagram showing a belt buckle adjustment with a black arrow indicating the direction (no text or symbols present)

1. Slide the seat belt through the slot of the guide. The elastic cord must be place behind the seat belt.

Line drawing of a car interior showing seatbelt and rear seats with no text or symbols

1. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle and position the seatbelt comfortably.

Unfastening the seatbelt 100116

1. Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to

unfasten the seatbelt.

NOTE

When the seatback is folded down for greater cargo area, it is necessary to disconnect the connector.

Line drawing of hands using a tool to adjust or install a component, with no visible text or symbols

1. Insert a tongue plate or other hard pointed object into the slot in the connector (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it in. The connector (tongue) plate will then disconnect from the buckle.

Diagram of a car interior showing a hand connecting a cable to a vehicle, with no visible text or symbols.

1. With the belt held by hand, allow the retractor to roll up the belt slowly. You should hold the webbing end and guide back into the retractor while it is rolling. Neatly store the tongue plate in the receipt on the ceiling and then insert the tongue plate and connector (tongue) plate into the slot as shown in the following illustration

Diagram of a car interior with a hand holding the steering wheel, showing no text or symbols.

CAUTION

Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seatbelt too quickly. Otherwise, the metal tongue plates may hit against the trim, resulting in damaged trim.
- Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the tongue plates are neatly stored. A hanging tongue plate can swing and hit against the trim during driving, causing damage to the trim.

■ Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re place the seatbelts even if only minor damage is found.

CAUTION

• Keep the belts free of polishes oils, chemicals and particularly battery acid.
• Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will prevent the seatbelt from operating properly.

1-5. Seatbelt pretensioners

The following seatbelts have a seatbelt pretensioner.

• Driver's seatbelt
• Front passenger's seatbelt
• Second-row seatbelts (window-side)

The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be activated in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal and side collision and rollover accident.

NOTE

• Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor impacts in rear impacts.
• Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a pretensioner is activated, the driver's, front passenger's and second-row (window-side) seatbelt retractor assemblies should be replaced only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU parts.
• If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

• If the seatbelt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
• When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to inform the buyer that the veh is equipped with seatbelt pretensioners. Also, notify the buyer of the contents in this section.
  ■ Front seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt preten-sioners

or , d er. 1 2 100666

1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder belt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter) 2) Lap belt pretensioner

WARNING

• To obtain maximum protection, the occupants should sit in an upright position with their seat-belts properly fastened. Refer to aicle"Seatbelts" P53.
• Do not modify, remove or strike the seatbelt retractor assemblies equipped with seatbelt pretensioners or surrounding area. This could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in serious injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt pretensioners, consult your SUBARU dealer.
• When discarding seatbelt retractor assemblies equipped with seatbelt pretensioners or scrapping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult your SUBARU dealer.

When the seatbelt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise will sound and small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt pretensioner remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

▼ Shoulder belt pretensioner

The shoulder belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls the belt to eliminate slack in certain level of force is detected during frontal, side or rollover accidents. As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat occupant more effectively.

The front shoulder belt pretensioner includes a tension reducing device which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in the event of collision.

The adaptive force limiter will reduce the load to suit the body size of the occupa as detected by the occupant detection sensor.

▼ Lap belt pretensioner

The shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemented by a lap belt pretensioner, which located at the base of the center pillar. -lap belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of frontal collision force is detected. As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat occupant more effectively.

■ Second-row (window-side) seatbelts with shoulder belt pretensioner

a 101784

The pretensioner sensor also serves as follows.

Front impact sensor
- Side impact sensor
- Rollover sensor

If the sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during frontal or side collisions or rollover accidents, any seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner

is quickly drawn back in by the retractor to evoke up the slack so that the belt more aeffectively restrains the seat occupant.

The second-row seatbelt (window-side) pretensioners include a tension reducing device which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a collision.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

■ System monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner with the ignition switch in the "ON" position. The seatbelt pretensioners share the control module with the SRS airbag system. Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. For details, refer to "SRS airbag is

- CONTINUED -

system monitors" P109.

■ System servicing

WARNING

• When discarding a seatbelt retractor assembly or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
• Tampering with or disconnecting the system's wiring could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems. For required servicing of the seatbelt pretensioner, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.

CAUTION

For the locations of the sensors control modules, refer to "Components" P89.

If you need service or repair in the areas or near the front seatbelt retractors, have the work performed by your authorized SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If the front or side part of the vehicle a damaged in an accident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

■ Precautions against vehicle modification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts to your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pretensioners.

• Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.
• Modification of the suspension

ose system or front end structure.

- Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owner's Manual.

1-6. Child restraint systems

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat, no text or symbols present

Infants and small children should always be seated in an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while riding in vehicle.

You should use an infant or child restra system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible with your vehicle and is appropriate for the child's age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those described in "Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and top tether anchorages (LATCH)" P75).

Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint system, carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car unattended. High interior temperatures may cause heat stroke and dehydration that result in serious injury or death.

Illustration of a person sitting on a car seat with another child, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child or his or her lap or in his or her arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.

Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

Illustration of two children interacting near a vehicle, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Children should be properly restrained at all times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on seat. Unrestrained children will be thrown forward during sudden stop or in an accident and can be injus seriously.

Additionally, children standing up of kneeling on or in front of the front seat are exposed another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured even killed.

■ Safety tips for installing ch restraint systems

WARNING

• Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sun weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.

red

red

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturer's instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.

■ Where to place a child re- cle straint system

The following are SUBARU's recommendations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.

Medical illustration showing a patient inside a car seat with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat, with a directional arrow indicating left side (no text or symbols present)

WARNING

• Several types of child restraint systems may conceal the buckle of the neighboring seat. If the occupant of the neighboring seat cannot correctly fasten the seatbelt, that person must move to a different seat. If the seatbelt cannot be correctly fastened, there is the risk of serious injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
• If the child restraint system cannot be correctly installed because it contacts the driver's seat, move the child restraint system to a different seat. If it

cannot be installed in a different seat (other than the driver's seat), adjust the front seat so that contact does not occur.

A: Front passenger's seat

You should not install a child restraint system (including a booster seat) due to the hazard to children posed by the passenger's airbag.

B: Second-row seat window-side seating position, third-row seat left-side seating position

Recommended positions for all types of child restraint systems.

In these positions, the following equipment is provided for installing a child restraint system.

● Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-belts
- Lower anchorages (bars)

- CONTINUED -

- Top tether anchorages

Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to project of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.

When a child restraint system is installed using the third-row seat lower anchorage do not sit in the third-row center seat.

C: Applicable only for Eight seaters In this position, the following equipment provided for installing a child restraint system.

• ALR/ELR seatbelts
• Lower anchorages (bars)
  • Top tether anchorages

Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to project of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.

The second-row center seat includes lower anchorages, and the lower anchorage on the center side of the second-row le seat can be used to install a child rest he system.

When a child restraint system is installed the second-row center seat using the lower anchorages, do not sit in the second-row left seat.

If a child restraint system is not correct, fixed in place (for example, if a child restraint system can be moved more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), the

^1 Prestraint system should be moved to a window-side seat position of the second row seat or to a left side seat of the t grow seat.

D: Third-row center and right seat positions

In this position, the following equipment provided for installing a child restraint system.

- ALR/ELR seatbelts

be Top tether anchorages

Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the -contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.

If the child restraint system is not correctly affected in place (for example, if a child restraint system can be moved more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), the child restraint system should be moved to a window-side seat position of the second-row seat or to a left side seat of the third-row seat.

WARNING

child

Even with advanced airbags, children can be seriously injured by the airbag. Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. You should choose a restraint device which is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight. According to accident statistics, children are safer

when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

• Do not use lower anchorages (bars) for a seat in the center seating position unless a child restraint system manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced as far apart as those in this vehicle.
• Do not connect two or more lower hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).

Medical illustration of a patient undergoing car seatbelt insertion, showing no text or symbols

WARNING

- SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN-

GER'S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SAFETY SEAT THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

• Do not allow children to lean their heads or any other parts of their bodies against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails. The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags deploy even if children are seated in the child restraint system. It will be dangerous if SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags inflate. The impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
• To secure the child restraint system, be sure to comply with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

Not doing so could result in death or serious injury to children in sudden stop or accident.

■ Choosing a child restraint IN system

Line drawings of three car seats and seat designs, no text or symbols present

Choose a child restraint system that is appropriate for the child's age and size (weight and height) in order to provide the child with proper protection. The child restraint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for the United States or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for Canada. It can be identified by looking for the label on the child restraint system or the manufacturer's statement of compliance in the document attached to the asystem.

Also it is important for you to make sure that the child restraint system is compatible with the vehicle in which it will be used.

- CONTINUED -

■ Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt

CAUTION

When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seating position, set both seatbacks to the original position. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained, which may result in death or serious injuries in the event of sudden stop, sudden steering maneuver or an accident.

▼ Installing a rearward facing child restraint

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

1. Fold the seatback forward, then raise it to the first lock position (position closest to vertical).

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Second-row seat

Slide the seat as far back as it will go. - In the lock position, shake the seat- back and check that it is securely locked.

A B 102304

Third-row seat

Raise the seatback and recline it to the position (B) where it is 9 notches from the first lock position (A).

- In the lock position, shake the seat-back and check that it is securely locked.

NOTE

If the child restraint system cannot be installed because it contacts the head restraint, remove the head restraint. For details, refer to "Head restraints" P47.

100503

1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

Illustration of a person using a belt drive a car seatbelt, showing the angle of motion (no text or symbols)

1. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

2. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode recommended by the manufacturer's instructions supplied with the child restraint system, perform the following procedure.

(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

Illustration of a person using a belt drive a car seatbelt, showing force direction arrows (no text or symbols)

1. Push and pull the child restraint syst forward and from side to side to check is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion a then tightening the seatbelt.

2. If the seatbelt has been set to the mode in step 6, pull at the shoulder of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being lifted, with a magnified inset showing the insertion step (no text or symbols)

To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

▼ Installing forward facing child restraint

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

1. Fold the seatback forward, then raise to the first lock position (position closest vertical).

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Second-row seat

Slide the seat as far back as it will go. - In the lock position, shake the seat-back and check that it is securely locked.

A B 102304

Third-row seat

Raise the seatback and recline it to the position (B) where it is 9 notches from the first lock position (A).

- In the lock position, shake the seat-back and check that it is securely locked.

1. Either fasten the head restraint in the top position or else remove it and store the cargo area. If your child restraint system contacts the head restraint, be sure to remove the head restraint and store it in the cargo area.

2. Place the child restraint system in the second-row or third-row seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child restraint system on the rear center seating position, if the child restraint system does not fit snugly against the contours of the rear center seat cushion, install the child restraint system on the window-side seating position to be safe. For details, refer to "Where to place a child restraint system" P66.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

- When a child restraint system is installed on the third-row center seat-

ing position, pass the third-row center seatbelt through the comfort guide properly. For details, refer to "Third-row center seatbelt" P57.

1. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

Diagram of a car seatbelting mechanism with a hand adjusting the seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

1. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
2. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with hands adjusting the seatbelt, showing motion arrows (no text or symbols)

1. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, try to move it back an forth and right and left to check if it is secured. Sometimes a child restraint system can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion a then tightening the seatbelt.
2. Pull at the shoulder portion of the be to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (to properly functioning).

into

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with a gear and base, showing a pivot point and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)

1. Latch the top tether hook onto the top and tether anchorage that is located behind the fixed-end-row and third-row seat and tighten the top tether firmly. For additional instructions, refer to "Top tether anchorages" and P79.

- If the child restraint system is elt installed with the head restraint left in ALR place, pass the top tether hook be- tween the head restraint stays.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with an inset showing the cable being inserted (no text or symbols present)

1. To remove the child restraint system press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is longer in use, remove it and restore ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

■ Installing a booster seat

Illustration of a child sitting in a car seatbelt with an inset showing the seatbelt buckle (no text or symbols present)

1. Place the booster seat in the rear seating position and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on the booster seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Take care not to the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on the child's hips.

Illustration of a child wearing a seatbelt, with an inset showing the same seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

1. To remove the booster seat, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

• Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child.
  twist Never place the shoulder belt under the child's arm or behind the child's back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child.
• The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as

effective in preventing or reducing injury.

• Place the lap belt as low as possible on the child's hips. A high-positioned lap belt will increase the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
• Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's shoulder. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.

■ Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and top tether anchorages (LATCH)
▼ Lower and top tether anchorages

d 101831

Anchor. Tether. LATCH The next generation of child safety.

101210

▼ Lower anchorages

Some types of child restraint systems can be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the designated anchorages provided on the seat. The lower and top tether anchorages are sometimes referred to as the LATCH system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).

Line drawing of two car seats with seatbelt covers, one showing a sleeping person inside (no text or symbols)

Second-row seat (captain seat)

Line drawing of a car seat with passenger seatbelt and passenger airplane icon (no text or symbols)

Second-row seat (bench seat)

Line drawing of a car seat with two seats and a circular icon showing a sleeping person (no text or symbols)

Third-row seat

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a child restraint system and are located in the second-row and third-row left side seats.

There are 2 lower anchorages at each of the second-row captain seat. There are a total of 5 lower anchorages at the second-row bench seat. The second lower anchorage from the left side is used for both the left side seat and center seat. There are 2 lower anchorages at the third-row left side seat.

Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.

▽ Top tether anchorages

Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing rear seats and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Second-row seat (captain seat)

Diagram of a car interior layout with labeled compartments and directional arrows indicating movement or flow.

Second-row seat (bench seat)

Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing three compartments with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

Third-row seat

The top tether anchorages are provided at the locations shown in the above illustration. Use the tether anchorage of each seat. For details, refer to "Top tether

anchorages" P79.

To install a child restraint system using lower and top tether anchorages

To install a child restraint system using lower and top tether anchorages, perform the following procedure.

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

1. Fold the seatback forward, then raise it to the first lock position (position closest to vertical).

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Second-row seat slide the seat as far back as it will go. - In the lock position, shake the seat- back and check that it is securely locked.

A B 102304

Third-row seat

Raise the seatback and recline it to the position (B) where it is 9 notches from the first lock position (A).

- In the lock position, shake the seat-back and check that it is securely locked.

Line drawing of two car seats with seatbelt covers, one featuring a circular icon with a baby symbol (no text or labels)

Second-row seat (captain seat)

Line drawing of a car seat with passenger seatbelt and passenger airplane icon (no text or symbols)

Second-row seat (bench seat)

Line drawing of a car seat with two seats and a circular inset showing a sleeping person (no text or symbols)

Third-row seat

2.

Second-row seat

You will find marks at the second-row seat cushion. These marks indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars) Each lower anchorage is located behind the cover of seatback bottom.

Diagram showing car seatbelt usage with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting a specific seatbelt component.

Third-row seat

You will find marks ^® at the bottom of the third-row seat seatbacks. These marks indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars).

1. For second-row seat, peel off the anchorage cover completely from the selected side of the second-row seatback to expose the anchorages (bars) to be used for installation of the child restraint system.

If it is hard to install the child restraint system because the anchorage cover returns to the original position, press the anchorage cover to the seat cushion unit is flat.

1. Either fasten the head restraint in the top position or else remove it and store it in the cargo area.

If your child restraint system contacts the head restraint, be sure to remove the head restraint and store it in the cargo area.

For details, refer to "Head restraints" P47.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a magnified inset showing the seatbelt detail (no text or symbols)

1. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer, connect the lower hooks onto the lower anchorages located a ^28 marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle with a hand insertion instruction (no text or symbols)

1. If your child restraint system is a flexible attachment type (which uses teth belts to connect the child restraint syste properly to the lower anchorages).

While pushing the child restraint into the 9. To remove the child restraint system, seat cushion, pull both left and right low follow the reverse procedures of installatether belts up to secure the child restraint.

system firmly by taking up the slack in the belt. 7. Latch the top tether hook onto the top tether anchorage that is located behind the SUBARU dealer. If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint system, ask your

tether anchorage that is located behind the rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.

For additional instructions, refer to "Top tether anchorages" P79.

Line drawing of a car seat with hand placement and motion arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Before seating a child in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to verify that it is securely in position.

2. To remove the child restraint system, follow the reverse procedures of installation.

If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint system, ask your SUBARU dealer.

■ Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with five or six top tether anchorages so that a child restraint system having a top tether can be installed in the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system using top tether, proceeds as follows, while observing the instructions by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional stability by offering another connection between a child restraint system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use a top tether whenever one is required or available.

held

▼ Anchorage location

1 2 102297

Second-row seat (captain seat)
1) For left seat
2) For right seat

1 2 3 102282

Second-row seat (bench seat)
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat

1 2 3 102283

Third-row seat
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat

Three top tether anchorages are installed on the back side of the rear seatback.

▼ To hook the top tether

CAUTION

Raise the head restraint to the extended position when mounting a child restraint system. Otherwise it will be impossible to use the seatbelt guide that is attached to the head restraint correctly.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with a foot and guide mechanism, no visible text or symbols

1. Attach the top tether hook to the appropriate top tether anchorage.
2. Tighten the top tether securely.

Please contact your SUBARU dealer if you have any question regarding the installation of a child restraint system.

WARNING

• Do not use a seat belt extender. a seat belt extender is used with installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system. Use of a seat belt extender could cause death or serious injury to children or other passengers in sudden braking, swerving, or accidents.
• Attach the child restraint system to the anchors properly. When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors. Also, the seat belts should not be caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached. Otherwise it may cause death or serious injury to children or other passengers in sudden braking, swerving, or accidents.

1-7. \*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used because the airbag system supplements the vehicle's seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition to a gap/shoulder belt at each front seating position and each rear window-side seating positions. The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of seven airbags.

The configurations are as follows.

• Driver's and front passenger's frontal airbags
• Driver's and front passenger's side airbags
• Curtain airbags (for driver, front passenger, and window-side rear passengers)
• Knee airbag for driver

These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls seatbelt pretensioners. For operation instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt pre-

- CONTINUED -

tensioner, refer to "Seatbelt pretensioners" P62.

■ General precautions regarding SRS airbag system

WARNING

- To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS airbag is designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" P53.

- The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seat-

belt. They do not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is not seated in a proper upright position.

Line drawing of a person seated in a car with a steering wheel and seatbelt, no text or symbols present

100155

WARNING

- The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as

practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

Illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt and holding a long neck, inside an airplane (no text or symbols)

WARNING

- Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to either front door. The SRS side airbags are stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and they provide protection by deploying rapidly (faster than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact collision. However, the force of SRS side airbag deployment may cause injuries if your head or other

parts of the body are too close the SRS side airbag.

• Since your vehicle is equipped with SRS curtain airbags, do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the front or rear door on either side. Also, do not put your head, arms or hands out of the window. The SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the cabin are stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass), and they provide protection by deploying rapidly (faster than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact, roll-over or an offset frontal collision. However, the force of its deployment may cause injuries if your head is too close to it.
• Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed (faster than the blink of an eye) and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS

to airbag contacts an occupant not in proper position, such as one thrown forward during pre-accident braking.

Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag deployment force.

in

Illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt and visor, seated in a car (no text or symbols)

WARNING

- Do not rest your arm on either front door or its internal trim. could be injured in the event SRS side airbag deployment.

- Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, these objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

CAUTION

- When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly. - A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

- When you sell your vehicle, we urge You to inform the buyer that the vehicle is equipped with SRS airbags. Also, notify the buyer of the applicable section in this Owner's Manual.

- CONTINUED -

• If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel supply will be cut off to reduce the of fire caused by leaking fuel. For details about restarting of the engine, refer to "If your vehicle is involved in accident" P420.
  ■ General precautions regarding SRS airbag system for accessories and any objects

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

risk an 102218

WARNING

- Do not put any objects (including straps or cords) over the steering wheel pad, column cover, or dashboard.

• These objects could be entangled with the steering wheel, preventing the SRS frontal airbag, etc. from operating properly.
• If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, these objects could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.
• Do not put any objects under the driver's side of the instrument panel. If the SRS knee airbag

deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

- The key must not be attached to heavy, sharp or hard accessories, or another key. If the SRS knee airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.

Interior view of a car showing a hand holding a car seatbelt with a circular no-smoking symbol and a dog icon (no text or symbols present)

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the windshield or fit an extra-wide mirror over the inside rear view mirror. If

the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occupants.

Line drawing of a car interior showing seat, dashboard, and exhaust pipe (no text or symbols)

WARNING

• Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS side airbags and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags. In the event of SRS side airbag deployment, they could be propelled dangerously toward the vehicle's occupants and cause injuries.
• Do not attach a hands-free microphone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a r

pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A hands-free microphone or other accessory in such a location could be propelled through the cabin with great force by the curtain airbag, or it could prevent correct deployment of the curtain airbag. In either case, the result could be serious injuries.

Line drawing of a hanger with a handle and frame, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects on the coat hooks. If such items were hanging on the coat hooks during deploy-

- ment of the SRS curtain airbags, or they could cause serious injuries by coming off the coat hooks and being A thrown through the cabin or by preventing deployment of the cur- tain airbags.

Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no sharp objects in the pockets. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.

Medical illustration of a car interior with visible seat, dashboard, and wheel (no text or labels)

WARNING

- Do not put any kind of clothes or other objects over either front seatback and do not attach labels or stickers to the front seat sur-

face on or near the SRS side airbag. They could prevent proper deployment of the SRS side airbag, reducing protection available to the front seat's occupant

- Do not install a seat cover unless it is a genuine SUBARU seat cover exclusively designed for use with the SRS airbag. Even when using a genuine SUBARU seat cover, the SRS side airbag system may not function normally if the seat cover is not installed correctly.

■ General precautions regarding SRS airbag system and children

Illustration of two children seated in a car seat, one wearing a seatbelt and the other holding a belt (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at times.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the child restraint system, refer to "Child restraint systems" P65.

Illustration of a car interior showing a person inside a seatbelt, with no visible text or symbols.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Illustration of two children in a wheelchair, one assisting the other (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passenger's seat. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

Illustration of a child sitting on a chair with an adult, viewed from behind (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

Illustration of a child wearing a seatbelt and holding a car, inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

Illustration of a person in a car seatbelt, no text or symbols present

WARNING

• Never allow a child to do the following.
• Kneel on any passenger's seat facing the side window
• Wrap his/her arms around the front seat seatback
• Put his/her head, arms or other parts of the body out of the window
  In the event of an accident, the force of SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain airbag deployment could injure the child seriously because his/her head, arms or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain airbag.
• Since your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger's SRS frontal airbag, children should be placed in the rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all times.

Components

1 2 3 4 5 3 102284

The SRS airbags are stowed in the following locations.

Driver's SRS frontal airbag: In the center portion of the steering wheel which bears an "SRS AIRBAG" mark.

Front passenger's SRS frontal airbag. Under the top of the dashboard. An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located at the right corner of the dashboard.

SRS side airbag: In the door side of each front seat seatback which bears an "SR" AIRBAG" tag.

SRS curtain airbag: In the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass), "SRS AIRBAG" marks are located at the top of each center pillar.

SRS knee airbag: Under the steering column which bears an "SRS AIRBAG" mark.

1) Driver's SRS frontal airbag
2) Front passenger's SRS frontal airbag
3) SRS side airbag
4) SRS curtain airbag
5) SRS knee airbag

27 16 8 6 15 24 2 22 18 7 3 5 14 10 28 13 17 9 26 32 20 20 19 19 19 11 23 30 19 12 19 32 26 12 29 31 25 102285

1) Airbag control module (including impact sensor and rollover sensor)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver's side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger's side)
4) Front impact sensor (left-hand side)
5) Front impact sensor (right-hand side)
6) Side airbag module (driver's side)
7) Side airbag module (front passenger's side)
8) Side impact sensor (center pillar left-hand side)
9) Side impact sensor (center pillar right-hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
11) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter (driver's side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter (front passenger's side)
13) Side impact sensor (forward of rear wheel house right-hand side)
14) Side impact sensor (forward of rear wheel house left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger's side)
18) Knee airbag module (driver's side)
19) Front passenger's occupant detection system sensor
20) Front passenger's occupant detection control module
21) Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Side impact sensor (under the second-row center seat)

24) Side impact sensor (front door left-hand side)
25) Side impact sensor (front door right-hand side)
26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger's side)
27) Lap belt pretensioner (driver's side)
28) Side impact sensor (backward of rear wheel house right-hand side)
29) Side impact sensor (backward of rear wheel house left-hand side)
30) Second-row seatbelt pretensioner (right-hand side)
31) Second-row seatbelt pretensioner (left-hand side)
32) Front passenger's seat position sensor

■ SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system that complies with the new advanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 208.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system automatically determines the deployment force of the driver's SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment as well whether or not to activate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment. Your vehicle has warning labels on the driver's and front passenger's sun visors beginning with the phrase "EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS" and a tag attached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase "Even with Advanced Air Bags". Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag.

WARNING EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS • ...Chamber can be filled or actively replied by the air bag. • The back seat is the smallest space for children. • Never put a moving wheel seat in the front. • Listen road seats and child networks. • See every's manual for more information about air bags AVERTISSEMENT MÊME AVEC DES COUSSINS COMPLIÉS INTELLIGENTS • Use vehicles painted the parts of a car with a car's seat. • Les ampoules armels et l'avalier le plus pour la car. • Les points collées à 1-way on edge your wheels. Let me go out to them. • Solutions allow their components for details at the deposits de l'entre pour relief. • Put to record the pipeline pour de plus escape requirements as right the cause portfolio. 102286

Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is a supplemental restraint system and must be used in combination with a seatbelt. Occupants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an appropriate child restraint system.

For the locations of the SRS airbags, re to "Components" P89.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the following components deploy.

• Driver's SRS frontal airbag
• Front passenger's SRS frontal airbag
• SRS knee airbag
• SRS curtain airbag*

*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seat belts by reducing the impact to the occupant's head, chest and knees.

▼ Driver's SRS frontal airbag

The driver's SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact.

d All fer 102097

SRS airbag system warning light

Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates.

NOTE

The driver's SRS side airbag and SF curtain airbag are not controlled by SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.

▼ Front passenger's SRS frontal air-bag

The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator and an actual. The inflator and the actuator operate in different ways depending on the severity impact.

Line drawing of a car seat with seatbelt and seat connectors, no text or symbols present

1) Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection system sensors

are installed between the seat and seat rails, and monitor the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag should be depleted or not.

The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag even when the driver's SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is normal. In this case, although the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag does not operate, the front passenger's seatbelt pretensioner operates with the driver's seatbelt pretensioner. For details about the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to "Seatbelt pretensioners" P62.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail.

• Do not apply any strong impact the front passenger's seat, such as by kicking.

• Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front seat-back and seat cushion.

• Do not spill liquid on the front passenger's seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately.

• Do not remove or disassemble the front passenger's seat.
• Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the front passenger's seat.
• Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under the front passenger's seat.
• Do not place any objects (books, etc.) around the front passenger's seat.
• Do not use the front passenger's seat with the head restraint removed.
• Do not leave any articles on the front passenger's seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle engaged when you leave your vehicle.
  to Do not put sharp object(s) on the seat or pierce the seat upholstery.
• Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.

- Do not use front seats with the forward-backward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them not locked securely, adjust the again. For adjusting procedure, refer to "Manual seat" P35.

102097

SRS airbag system warning light

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passenger's occupant detection system have failed, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front passenger's seat while driving the vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

The front passenger's SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not controlled by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.

▼ Passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators

PASS AIR BAG OFF ON 305594

ON Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator

Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

Refer to "Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators" P174.

▼ Occupant detection system

Line drawing of a car seat with seatbelt and seat connectors (no text or symbols)

1) Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection system sensors are installed between the seat and seat rails, and monitor the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not.

WARNING

Do not kick the front passenger s or subject it to severe impact. Oth wise, the SRS airbag system warning light may illuminate to indicate malfunction of the front passenger occupant detection system. In this case, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Electrical devices, such as cell phones, laptops, portable music players, or electronic games, especially when connected to the accessory power outlet and placed on front passenger's seat or used by the person sitting in the front passenger's seat, may affect the operation of the occupant detection system. If either of the following situations occurs when using an electronic device in the vehicle, at first to relocate that device to avoid it creating any interference.

• The SRS airbag system warning light illuminates.
- The front passenger's frontal air-bag ON and OFF indicators oper-

ate erratically. If the device continues to cause interference, the use of that device in the vehicle should be discontinued.

102097

SRS airbag system warning light If the front passenger's seat cushion is wet, this may adversely affect the ability the system to determine deployment. Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the dry naturally and then check the SRS airbag system warning light.

PASS AIR BAG OFF ON 305594

ON Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator
Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

If the front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators do not work properly even when the front passenger's seat is dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger's seat and have the occupant detection system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

PASS AIR BAG OFF ON 305594

ON: Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator
Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

Also, if luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passenger's seat, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. This may prevent the front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators from working properly. Check that the indicators work properly.

When the OFF indicator turns off and the ON indicator illuminates, the front passenger's frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. Remove luggage and electronic devices from the front passenger's seat.

▼ Conditions in which front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is not activated

The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag will not be activated when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passenger's seat:

• The seat is empty.
• The seat is equipped with an appropriate child restraint system and an infant or a child is restrained in it. (See WARNING that follows.)
• The front passenger's occupant detection system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in a correct manner. Also it is strongly recommended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be installed in the REAR seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seated in the REAR seat. This because children sitting in the front passenger's seat may be killed or severely injured should the front

passenger's SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest place for children.

CAUTION

When the front passenger's seat is occupied by an infant in an appropriate child restraint system, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant detection system, activating the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occupied by the infant in the child restraint system.

• Do not place any article (including electronic devices) on the seat other than the infant in the child restraint system.
  Do not place more than one infant in the child restraint system.

If the front passenger's frontal system.

airbag ON indicator illuminates 4. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" and the OFF indicator turns off position and make sure that the front even when an infant or a small passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator child is in a child restraint system turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates them (including booster seat)

PASS AIR BAG OFF ON 305594

ON: Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator

Notes: Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" OFF" position.
2. Remove the child restraint system from the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint manufacturer's recommendations as well as the child restraint system installation procedures in "Child restraint systems" P65, correctly install the child restraint

If the ON indicator still remains illuminate while the OFF indicator turns off, take the following actions.

• Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint system and the child occupant.
• Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of the front passenger's seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminate while the OFF indicator turns off after taking the relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a restraint system or a small adult is seated in the front passenger's seat, the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system may or may not activate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag

depending on the occupant's seating posture. Children should always wear a seatbelt when sitting in the seat irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated. If the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activated (the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off), take the following action.

- Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the occupant.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off despite the fact that the actions noted above have been taken, seat the child/small adult in the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it is recommended that on subsequent trips the child/small adult always take the rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag child deactivated or activated.

▼ Conditions in which front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon impact when any of the following condi-

tions are met regarding the front passenger's seat.

• When the seat is occupied by an adu
• When certain items (e.g. jug of water) are placed on the seat.

If the passenger's frontal airba OFF indicator illuminates and ON indicator turns off even w the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult

-2. Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

PASS AIR BAG OFF ON 305594

ON: Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator
Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

If the OFF indicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, take the following actions.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger does not use a blanket, extra seat cushion, seat cover, extra seat heater or massager, etc.

3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passenger's seat, or should sit in a rear seat.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self-checking. Following the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator remains off.

This can be caused by the adult incorresitting in the front passenger's seat.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" OFF" position.

If the OFF indicator still remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off,

▼ Operation

A 1 B 2 101586

A) Driver's side
B) Passenger's side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver's vision is not obstructed.

The SRS airbags can function only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is designed to determine the activation or deactivation condition of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag depending on the characteristic of item(s) or person on the front passenger's seat monitored by the front passenger's occupant detection system sensor. For this reason, only the driver's SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the system.

If the following sensors detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only driver's module or both driver's and front passenger's modules) instructing the module(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).

• The front sub sensors
- The impact sensors in the airbag control module

On the driver's side, the SRS knee airbag also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.

The driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. The two inflators of each airbag are triggered either sequentially or simultaneously, depending on the severity of impact, in the case of the driver's SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the characteristic of item(s) or person on the seat in the of the front passenger's SRS frontal air bag.

▼ After deployment

After deployment, the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the drive vision is not obstructed and the driver's ability to maintain control of the vehicle not impaired. The time required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver's SRS frontal airbag deploys and the driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags deploy, the driver's and front passenger's seat pretensioners operate at the same time.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden fairly loud inflation noise will be heard a some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

▼ Example of the type of accident

The driver's SRS frontal airbag and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag are de-signed as follows.

• To deploy in the event of an accident is involving a moderate to severe frontal collision
- To function on a one-time-only basis

The driver's SRS frontal airbag and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag are not designed as follows.

• To deploy in most lesser frontal impacts*1
• To deploy in most side or rear impacts or in most rollover accidents

nd: Because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone.

*2: Because deployment of only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both the driver's an

front passenger's SRS frontal airbags would not protect the occupant in those situations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

Example of accident in which the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will most likely deploy

Line drawing of a car approaching a wall with a broken trunk and impact symbol (no text or labels)

101394

A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal

- CONTINUED -

airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the collision described above.

Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy

Two cartoon illustrations showing a car being crashed and moving, with no text or symbols present.

Only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).

Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur

1

4

Top-down diagram of two cars with directional arrows indicating collision or movement (no text or symbols)

2

Diagram of a car being struck by a truck, showing impact and collision (no text or symbols)

5

Top-down line drawing of three cars with a collision effect, no text or symbols present

3

101418

1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can move or deform, such as a parked vehicle.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS If the vehicle is struck from the side or from behind frontal airbag(s) are not designed to deploy in most of the following cases. SRS side airbag and SRS

Diagram illustrating vehicle collision and damage mechanism with labeled arrows and vehicle parts

The driver's and front passenger's SRS

1 2 1 101395

1) First impact
2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the driver's and/or front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy only once on the impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision first with another vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immediate succession,

Line drawing of a person working inside a car, holding a steering wheel (no text or symbols)

▼ SRS side airbag

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback, which bears an "SRS AIRBAG" tag.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant's chest and waist. The SRS side airbag operates only

for front seat occupants.

▼ SRS curtain airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBAR SRS curtain airbag system that complies with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of cabin is stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located at the top of each center pillar.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant's head.

In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on bo sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side window and supp ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact the occupant's head.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the vehicle dep between the occupant and the side window and supplement the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupant's head and chest.

▼ Operation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The following airbags deploy independently of each other since each has its own impact sensor.

• Driver's SRS side airbag
  • Front passenger's SRS side airbag
  • SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
  • SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)

Therefore, they may not both deploy in the same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploys independently of the driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel and instrument panel.

For the locations of the sensors and control modules, refer to "Components" to P89.

▼ After deployment

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment then

slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any part of the SRS curtain airbag system (from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat). Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

▼ Example of the type of accident The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed as follows:

• To deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side imp collision
• To function on a one-time-only basis.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in the following cases:

• In most lesser side impact
- In most frontal or most rear impacts (because the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment would not protect the occupant in those situations)

The SRS curtain airbags are also designed to deploy when the vehicle is in an extremely inclined state such as during a rollover. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser inclined state.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment depend on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag will most likely deploy.

Top-down line drawing of two cars with a directional arrow indicating collision or damage (no text or symbols)

1) A severe side impact near the front seat.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy.

1

Top-down diagram of two cars with arrows indicating collision or damage, no text or symbols present

2

Two cartoon-style car heads with expressive faces and wheels, no text or symbols present

3

Simple line drawing of a car with a crack on the ground (no text or symbols)

4

Simple line drawing of a car with a warning sign and lightning bolts (no text or symbols)

101789

1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side impact near the front seat or the rear seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal of the skidding vehicle's tires hit a curbstone laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag.

Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy.

Line drawing of a car emitting exhaust smoke, with no text or symbols present

Line drawing of a car on a surface with motion lines indicating speed or impact (no text or symbols)

Diagram showing two cars on a track with impact and collision, no text or symbols present

1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling

It is possible that the SRS side and curtain airbags will deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

102055

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy.

Line drawing of a car collision with visible cracks and impact lines (no text or symbols)

Top-down line drawing of two cars with cracks and motion lines, no text or symbols present

4

Simple line drawing of a car with a collision or explosion symbol (no text or labels)

Two hand-drawn car illustrations showing front and side views with no text or symbols

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof. There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy.

Line drawing of a car collision with visible impact lines (no text or symbols)

2

Line drawing of two cars with broken windows and impact symbols (no text or labels)

3

Simple line drawing of a car with a collision or explosion symbol (no text or labels)

4

Line drawing of a person riding a motorcyclist driving a car, with no text or symbols present.

101480

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS curtain airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS curtain airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases

1 2 3 102056

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
3) The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases.

2 1 A B 101410

1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is stru from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag dep only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle and immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on the first impact, they will not be activated on the second.

■ SRS airbag system monitor

Simple line drawing of a car head with two circular wheels and a small icon showing a person (no text or symbols)

SRS airbag system warning light

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system (including front seatbelt pretensioners) with the ignition switch in the "ON" position.

The SRS airbag system warning light will show normal system operation by illuminating for approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.

The following components are monitored by the indicator:

- Front impact sensor

- Right-hand side

- Left-hand side

● Airbag control module (including impact sensor and rollover sensor)

- Frontal airbag module

- Driver's side

- Front passenger's side

- Knee airbag module (driver's side)

- Side impact sensor

– Center pillar left-hand side

– Center pillar right-hand side

- Forward of rear wheel house left-hand side

- Forward of rear wheel house right-hand side

- Backward of rear wheel house left-hand side

- Backward of rear wheel house right hand side

- Front door left-hand side

- Front door right-hand side

- Under the second-row center seat

- Side airbag module

- Driver's side

- Front passenger's side

- Curtain airbag module

- Right-hand side

- Left-hand side

- Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter

- Driver's side

- Front passenger's side

- Lap belt pretensioner

- Driver's side

Front passenger's side

- Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger's side)

- Front passenger's occupant detection system sensor

- Front passenger's occupant detection control module

- Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator

- All related wiring

• Second-row seatbelt pretensioner

- Right-window side

- Left-window side

- Front passenger's seat position sensor

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag system.

- Flashing or flickering of the warning light

- No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the "ON" position

- Continuous illumination of the warning light

- Illumination of the warning light while driving

Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury.

SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING

• When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
• The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the system's wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in a indicated in the following list, have the work performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbag control module, impact sensor and airbag modules are stored in these areas.

• Under the center of the instrument panel
• On both the right and left sides the front of the vehicle
  • Steering wheel and column and nearby areas
• Bottom of the steering column and nearby areas
• Top of the dashboard on front passenger's side and nearby areas
  • Each front seat and nearby area
• Inside each center pillar
• Inside each front door
• In each roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear
• Between the rear seat cushion and rear wheel house on each side
• Under the second-row center seat

areas the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, replacement of the system should be performed only by an au-ized SUBARU dealer. When the com-nents of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use only genuine SUBARU parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
- The front part of the vehicle was at involved in an accident in which only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.
- The pad of the steering wheel, the cover over the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag, or either roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
- The center pillar, front door, rear wheel house or rear sub frame, or an area near these parts, was involved in seat accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not deploy.
- The fabric or leather of either front seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise damaged.
- The rear part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which no SRS airbag was deployed.

■ Precautions against vehicle modification

WARNING

- To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifications should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS airbag system. This includes following modifications.

• Installation of custom steering wheels
• Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard
• Installation of custom seats
• Replacement of seat fabric or leather
• Installation of additional fabric or leather on the front seat

• Attachment of a hands-free microphone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag.

• Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system components and/or wiring is not advisable. This could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.

• Modifications on or inside the front door panels for the purpose of a speaker replacement or sound insulation

- The impact sensors, which detect the pressure of an impact, are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door trims, such as the addition of door speakers for example. Any modifications to the doors will create a risk of airbag system becoming inoperative or unintended airbag deployment.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.

• Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.
• Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.
• Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owner's Manual.
• Attachment of any equipment (side steps or side sill protectors, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts on your vehicle.

■ How to contact the vehicle manufacturer concerning modifications for persons with disabilities that may affect the advanced airbag system

Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, front side frame, radiator panel, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you have any questions, you may contact the following SUBARU distributors.

Subaru of America, Inc. Customer Retailer Services Department One Subaru Drive Camden, NJ 08103-8500 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Subaru Hawaii 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu, HI 96819-4467 808-839-2273

Shen's Corporation dba Prestige Automobile 491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1 Dededo, Guam 96921-6225 671-633-2698

Puerto Rico> Trebol Motors P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00910 787-793-2828

Subaru Canada, Inc. Consumer Support Department 560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario L5R 4J7 1-800-894-4212

There are currently no SUBARU distributors in any other U.S. territories. If you are in such an area, please contact the SUBARU distributor or dealer from which you bought your vehicle.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Keys and doors

2-1. Keys.... 117

Key number plate 117

2-2. Keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped) 118

Safety precautions.... 119

Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob 121

Unlock using PIN Code Access.... 125

Power saving function 127

Power saving function of access key fob 128

Disabling keyless access function 128

Selecting audible signal operation 130

Warning chimes and warning indicator 130

When access key fob does not operate properly.... 130

Replacing battery of access key fob....130

Replacing access key fob 130

Certification for keyless access with push-button start system ....130

2-3. Immobilizer.... 132

Security indicator light.... 132

Key replacement.... 132

Certification for immobilizer system 132

2-4. Remote keyless entry system 134

Locking the doors 135

Unlocking the doors 135

Unlocking the rear gate.... 135

Vehicle finder function 135

Sounding a panic alarm 136

Setting audible signal operation (models without "keyless access with push-button start system") 136

Replacing the battery 136

Replacing lost transmitters.... 136

Certification for remote keyless entry system ..... 136

2-5. Door locks....138

Locking and unlocking from the outside.... 138

Locking and unlocking from the inside.... 139

Automatic door locking/unlocking 140

Key lock-in prevention function.... 140

Battery drainage prevention function.... 141

2-6. Alarm system....141

Alarm system operation 142

Arming the system.... 142

Disarming the system 143

Alarm system setting 143

If you have accidentally triggered the alarm system.... 144

Valet mode.... 144

2-7. Child safety locks....144

2-8. Windows....145

Power window operation 145

Initialization of power window (windows with off delay function) ....

2-9. Rear gate....148

Manual rear gate 148

Power rear gate (if equipped) 149

Keys and doors

2-10. Moonroof (if equipped).... 156

Sunshade switch 157

Moonroof switch....157

2-11. Rear door window sunshades (if equipped) 158

2-1. Keys

NOTE

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", refer to "Keyless access with push-button sta system" P118.

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

1 2 3 4 202627

1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate

These keys can be used in the following locations.

• Ignition switch
• Driver's door

- Glove box (except the valet key)

The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door locks. You can keep the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.

NOTE

Locking/unlocking using the remote keyless entry system can also be controlled with the buttons on the key details, refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P134.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder of key case to either key. If it bangs against your knees while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position, thereby stopping the engine.

■ Key number plate

The key number is stamped on the key number plate attached to the key set. Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle. Refer to "Key replacement" p# P132.

doors

or

2-2. Keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped)

The following access key fobs are provided with the vehicle.

1 2 3 202499

1) Access key fob (main)
2) Access key fob (sub)
3) Key number plate

The "keyless access with push-button start system" allows you to perform the following functions when you are carrying the access key fob.

• Locking and unlocking of the doors, rear gate and fuel lid. For details, refer "Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob" P121.
• Starting and stopping the engine. For

details, refer to "Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)" P315.

- Arming and disarming the alarm system. For details, refer to "Alarm system" P141.

NOTE

• Locking/unlocking using the remote keyless entry system can also be controlled with the buttons on the access key fob. For details, refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P134.
• Carefully store the key number plate 1) Release button supplied with the access key fob. It is) Emergency key

necessary for vehicle repair and additional registration of access key fobs For details, refer to "Key replacement P132.

An emergency key is attached to each access key fob.

1 2 202500

While pressing the release button of the access key fob, take out the emergency key.

The emergency key is used for the following operations.

• Locking and unlocking the driver's door
• Locking and unlocking the glove box

NOTE

The glove box can be kept locked when you leave your vehicle and the access key fob (with the emergency key removed) at a parking facility.

to

■ Safety precautions

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, stay at least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the transmitting antennas installed on the vehicle.

The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of implanted pacemakers and implanted defibrillators.

If you wear electronic medical equipment other than an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, before using the keyless access with push-button start system, refer to "Radio waves used for the keyless access with push-button start system" mentioned later, and contact the electronic medical equipment manufacturer for more information. The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of the electronic medical equipment.

"Radio waves used for the keyless access with push-button start sys-tem"

- The keyless access with push-button start system uses radio waves of the following frequency* in addition to the radio waves used for the remote key-less entry system. The radio waves are periodically output from the antennas installed on the vehicle as shown in the following illustrations.

* Radio frequency: 134 kHz

Technical diagram showing cross-sectional views of a car with labeled components and structural details

1) Antenna

CAUTION

• Never leave or store the access key fob inside the vehicle or within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The access key fob may be locked inside the vehicle, or the battery may discharge rapidly. Note that the push-button ignition switch may not turn on in some cases depending on the location of the access key fob.

• The access key fob contains electronic components. Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunctions.

• It is recommended to have the access key battery replaced at an authorized SUBARU dealer to avoid the risk of damage.

• Do not get the access key wet. If the access key fob wet, wipe it off immediately and let it dry completely.
• Do not apply strong impacts the access key fob.
• Never leave the access key fob in direct sunlight or anywhere that may become hot, such as on the dashboard. It

may damage the battery or cause circuit malfunctions.

• Do not wash the access key fob in an ultrasonic washer.
• Do not leave the access key fob in humid or dusty locations. Doing so may cause malfunctions.
• Keep the access key fob awa from magnetic sources.
• Do not leave the access key fob near a personal computer or home electrical appliance.
• Do not leave the access key fob near a battery charger of any electrical accessories.
• Do not apply metallic window tint or attach metallic objects to the windows.
• Do not fit non genuine accessories or parts.

- If the access key fob is dropped, the integrated emergency key inside may become loose. Be careful not to lose the emergency k

- When traveling in an airplane, do not press the button of the access key fob. If any button of the access key fob is pressed, radio waves are emitted and may affect

the operation of the airplane. In a bag, take measures to prevent the buttons from being pressed accidentally.

NOTE

• The operational/non-operational setting for the keyless access function can be changed. For the setting procedure, refer to “Disabling keyless access function” P128.
• For detailed information about the operation method for the push-button ignition switch while the keyless access function is switched to the non-operational mode, refer to “Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly” P417.
• The keyless access with push-button start system uses weak radio waves. The status of the access key fob and environmental conditions may interfere with the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle under the following conditions, and it may not be possible to lock or unlock the doors or start the engine.

- When operating near a facility where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a broadcast station and power transmission lines

- When products that transmit radio waves are used, such as access key fob or a remote transmitter key of another vehicle

- When carrying the access key of your vehicle together with the access key fob or the remote trmitter of another vehicle

- When the access key fob is placed near wireless communication equipment such as a cell p

- When the access key fob is placed near a metallic object

- When metallic accessories are attached to the access key fob

- When carrying the access key with an electronic appliances such as a laptop computer

- When the battery of the access key fob is discharged

- The access key fob is always communicating with the vehicle and is continuously using the battery. Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery becomes fully discharged, replace it with a new one.

- If an access key fob is lost, it is recommended that all of the remainir access key fobs be reregistered. For reregistration of an access key fob,

contact a SUBARU dealer.

For a spare access key fob, contact SUBARU dealer.

- Up to 7 access key fobs can be registered for one vehicle.

- Do not leave the access key fob the storage spaces inside the vehicle such as the door pocket, dashboard inside the corner of the cargo area. Vibrations may damage the key fob or down on the switch, possibly resulting a lockout.

- After the vehicle battery is discharged or replaced, initialization of the steering lock system may be required to start the engine. In this case

perform the following procedure to initialize the steering lock.

(1) Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position. For details, refer to "Switching power status" P167.

(2) Open and close the driver's door.

(3) Wait for approximately 10 seconds.

When the steering is locked, the in-alization is completed.

• Do not leave the access key fob in the following places.

- On the instrument panel

• On the floor
  a- Inside the glove box
• Inside the door trim pocket
• On the rear seat
• In the cargo area

If you do, the following situations or may occur.

- The access key fob is mistakenly locked inside the vehicle.

in- A false warning issues although no malfunction actually occurs.

- No warning issues even when a malfunction occurs.

■ Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob

When the access key fob is carried within the operating range, the doors, the rear gate and the fuel lid can be locked/unlocked just by touching the door handle.

NOTE

The vehicle can also be locked/unlocked with the remote keyless entry system. For details, refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P134.

▼ Operating ranges

1 2 2 2 203356

1) Antenna
2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32 in (40 to 80 cm))

1 202501

1) LED indicator

When the access key fob is within either the operating ranges of the front doors, LED indicator on the access key fob flashes. When the keyless access functions are disabled, the LED indicator does not flash unless a button on the access fob is pressed.

NOTE

• If the access key fob is placed to in a location with strong radio waves or close to the vehicle body, the keyless noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power access functions may not operate plant, broadcast station or an area properly. If it does not operate properly where wireless equipment is used), or repeat the operation from farther away while talking on a cell phone, the
• If the access key fob is placed neoperating ranges may be reduced, or the ground or in an elevated location the keyless access function may not from the ground, even if it is in the operate. indicated operating range, the keyless in such a case, perform the procedure access function may not operate pro described in "Locking and unlocking" erly. -P418.
• When the access key fob is within. The doors may lock or unlock when the operating range, it is possible for the car is being washed or exposed to a anyone, even someone who is not significant amount of water that concarrying the access key fob, to operate the door handle while the key fob the keyless access function. Note that still in the operating range. the keyless access function can be

operated only by the door handle, door How to lock and unlock lock sensor, rear gate opener button ltois possible to perform the following rear lock button in the operating range operations when you are carrying the in which the access key fob is detected as key fob.

- It is not possible to lock the doors. Lock and unlock the doors rear gate and fuel lid using the keyless access function when the access key

- Lock and unlock the fuel lid

NOTE

- It is not possible to lock the door rear gate and fuel lid using the key access function when the push-button ignition switch is in the "ACC" or position. Refer to "Switching power status" P167.

- If the door handle is gripped with gloved hand, the door lock may no released.

- If the door lock sensor is touched three times or more repeatedly, the system will ignore the sensor operation.

- When performing the locking procedure too quickly, locking may not complete. After performing the lockir procedure, it is recommended to put the REAR door handle to confirm the doors have been locked.

- If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are not fully closed, the following will occur to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not properly closed.

- An electronic chirp sounds five times.

- The hazard warning flashers flash five times.

- It is possible to lock the doors even when one of the doors is open. After

performing the locking procedure, close the opened door or rear gate lock it.

s Within 3 seconds after locking the doors and the rear gate using the keyless access function, it is not possible to unlock doors and/or the rear gate using the keyless access function

- When locking, be sure to carry the access key fob to prevent locking to access key fob in the vehicle.

- The setting of the hazard warning flasher operation and the volume of the audible signal can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for models with

-the combination meter display, the setting of the hazard warning flashe operation and the audible signal operation can be changed by operating the combination meter display. For detail

refer to "Menu screens" P197.

Locking with the door lock sensor to s- on. the our 1 203329

(6) Door lock sensor with Carry the access key fob, close all doors including the rear gate and fuel lid, and touch the door lock sensor on the door handle. All doors including the rear gate and fuel lid will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

▼ Locking with the rear lock button ▼ Unlocking

203330 1

1) Rear lock button

Carry the access key fob, close all door including the rear gate and fuel lid, and press the rear lock button. The rear gat all doors and fuel lid will be locked. Als electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

Illustration of a person cleaning a car with a magnified inset showing the tool (no text or symbols present)

Carry the access key fob, and grip the following door handle.

- The driver's door handle: Either only the driver's door and the fue with unlock, or all doors, the rear gate a the fuel lid will unlock.

- The front passenger's door handle: All doors, rear gate and fuel lid will be unlocked.

Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

▼ Unlocking rear gate

1 203338

1) Rear gate opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press the rear gate opener button. Either only the rear gate will unlock, or all doors and fuel and will unlock. Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

▼ Door unlock selection function

When the door is unlocked using the keyless access function, only the doors that were set can be unlocked.

The settings can be changed with the following methods.

• The setting can be changed by operating the combination meter display. Refer "Menu screens" P197.
• The setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

■ Unlock using PIN Code Access

When all doors including the rear gate are locked, you can unlock the driver's door without a key by pressing the rear lock button.

to 1 203330

1) Rear lock button

NOTE

PIN Code Access will be helpful if the key fob is accidentally left in the vehicle. It is recommended that a 5-digit security code (PIN code) be registered.

▼ Registration for a PIN code

Steps Operation		Time from the previous step
1 Turn off the		ignition switch. -
2 Close all doors (including rear gate). -
3		Press and hold the" button on the access key fob, and press and hold the rear lock button until a chirp sounds intermittently.	-
4 Press the "		" button on the access key fob. Within 30 seconds
5		The PIN code is inputted by using the rear lock button within 30 seconds after the chirp sound of step 4.For example, to register "32468" as the PIN code, perform the following procedure.	Within 30 seconds
		(1) Press the	button three times.
		(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.
		(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.
		(4) After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.
		(5) After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.
6		Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts sounding intermittently.	-
7 All doors will		be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.	-

NOTE
Press the “☐” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the “☐” button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.

NOTE

• Press the rear lock button ten tim to enter "0".
• Change the PIN code frequently to protect your vehicle from theft.
• If you have lent your vehicle to another person, confirm that the PIN code has not been changed or deleted. If the PIN code has been changed deleted, reregister a new PIN code.
• If you make an error during the registration procedure, press the "or " button on the access key Then, start over from the procedure described in "Preparation for registering a PIN code".
• To protect your vehicle from theft, you cannot register a string of the five numbers together, such as "00000", nor "12345" as a PIN code
• Do not register your vehicle licens plate number or simple numbers su as "11122" or "12121" as a PIN co Doing so will increase the risk of vehicle theft.
• When you try to register "22222", registered PIN code will be deleted. Y cannot unlock the doors by PIN Co Access until a new code is registered.

• After registering a new PIN code, make sure that you can unlock the doors using the PIN code.

• The PIN code cannot be deleted while the keyless access function is disabled by operating the access key fob.

• Reregister the PIN code in the following cases.
• When you forget the PIN code ted. - When you want to change the P or code

▼ Unlocking

Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5 descri om. "Registration for a PIN code".

NOTE

• You cannot unlock by PIN Code Access in the following cases.
  same When the access key fob is with the operating ranges
• When the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position
  If you make an operation error during the unlocking procedure, start over with the unlocking procedure after waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
  the to protect your vehicle from theft, an electrical chirp will sound if incorrect PIN codes are entered five times continuously. If this occurs, you cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code Access for 5 minutes.

■ Power saving function

The keyless access function will be dis- abled in the following cases to protect the access key fob battery and the vehicle battery.

- Case 1: When the keyless access function and the remote keyless entry system have not been used for 2 weeks or longer while all doors are locked

Operate one of the following procedures to recover the keyless access function:

- Unlock the doors by any procedure other than gripping the front passenger's door handle

- Lock the doors

Case 2: When the access key fob has been left in the operating range for 10 minutes or longer while all doors are locked

Operate one of the following procedures to recover the keyless access function:

- Unlock the doors by gripping the door handle

- Unlock the doors by pressing the rear gate opener button

- Lock the doors by touching the door lock sensor

- Lock or unlock the doors using the remote keyless entry system

- Lock or unlock the doors using the power door locking switch

To cancel the power save mode, press of the buttons on the access key fob.

where described in "Starting engine" P418.

■ Power saving function of access key fob

This function stops the access key fob from receiving signals and helps minimize the battery consumption of the access key fob.

1. Press the 🔒 button twice while holding the 🔒 button.

1 202501

1) LED indicator

1. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks times to notify that the setting is complete. When the access key fob is in the power save mode, the keyless access function and push-button start system will not be available.

■ Disabling keyless access function

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, perform the procedure described in "By operating the driver's door" P129 to disable the keyless access function. If you perform the procedure described in "By operating the access key fob" P128, the operation of an implanted pacemaker or implanted defibrillator may be affected by the radio waves from the transmitter antenna.

When the vehicle is not going to be used for a long time or when you choose not to use the keyless access function, the keyless access function can be disabled.

NOTE

The locking and unlocking function by the remote keyless entry system not disabled.

- To start the engine while the functions are disabled, perform the proce-

▼ Disabling functions

∇ By operating the access key fob If you have registered a PIN code for PIN Code Access, you can disable the keyless access function by operating the access key fob. For details about registering a PIN code, refer to "Unlock using PIN Code Access" ⊕P125.

1. Open the driver's door.
2. Rotate the lock lever toward the lock position.

202646

1. Press and hold the " " button and " " button on the access key fob simulta- neously for more than 5 seconds.

A chirp will sound, and the function will be

disabled.

∇ By operating the driver's door

Diagram of a car interior showing a handle panel with a zoomed-in inset (no text or symbols)

Steps	Operation Time Status
1 Sit	in the driver's seat, and close the door. - Close
2 Push “ [IMAGE] on the power door locking switch. - Close
3 Open the driver's door. Within 5 sec. Close→Open
4	Push [IMAGE] on the power door locking switch twice.	Within 5 sec.	Open
5 Close and open the driver's door twice.		Within 10 sec.	Open→Close→Open→Close→Open
6	Push [IMAGE] on the power door locking switch twice while the door is open.	Within 10 sec.	Open
7	Close and open the driver's door once.	Within 10 sec.	Open→Close→Open
8 Close the door.		Within 5 sec.	Open→Close

A chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.

NOTE

In steps 4 and 6, press the power locking switch slowly. If the switch pressed quickly, the functions may be disabled.

▼ Enabling functions

When the procedure to disable the functions is performed again, a chirp will sound, and the functions are enabled.

NOTE

- The keyless access function will be enabled only if you perform the procedure in the same manner used to disable the function (for example, w disabling by operating the driver's door, the function will not be enable even if you operate the access key - Press the push-button ignition switch if you do not know the procedure in which the keyless access function was disabled.

- When disabling by operating the driver's door: a chirp will not sound - When disabling by operating the access key fob: a chirp will sound For details, refer to "Warning chimes and warning indicator of the keyless access with push-button start system" P184.

■ Selecting audible signal op- dooderation

is Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the dc lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn the audible signal off. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

The setting can be changed by opening the combination meter display details, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

Warning chimes and warning indicator

The keyless access with push-button status sounds a warning chime and flashes the access key warning indicator on the combination meter in order to minimize improper operations and help protect your vehicle from theft.

For details, refer to "Warning chimes and warning indicator of the keyless access with push-button start system" P184.

■ When access key fob does not operate properly

Refer to "Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly" P417.

■ Replacing battery of access key fob

Refer to "Replacing battery of access key feb" P469.

■ Replacing access key fob

Access key fobs can be replaced by a SUBARU dealer. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.

or Certification for keyless access with push-button start system

U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: HYQ14AHK

FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-1

FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

• Canada-spec. models

the NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

• Mexico-spec. models

The immobilizer system is designed to prevent an unauthorized person from starting the engine. Only keys registered with your vehicle's immobilizer system can be used to operate your vehicle. If engine start is attempted with an unregistered access key fob or key, the engine will not start. Even if the engine does start, it will stop after a few seconds. This system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft guarantee.

CAUTION

• Do not place the key under dire sunlight or anywhere it may become hot.
• Do not get the key wet. If the gets wet, wipe it dry with a cl immediately.
• Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE

- To protect your vehicle from theft, please pay close attention to the following security precautions:

- Never leave your vehicle unattended with its keys inside.

- Before leaving your vehicle, close all windows and the moon-roof, and lock the doors and rea gate.

- Do not leave spare keys or a record of your key number in the vehicle.

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.

■ Security indicator light

Refer to "Security indicator light" P189

■ Key replacement

Your key number plate will be required if you ever need a replacement key made. Any new key must be registered for use with your vehicle's immobilizer system before it can be used. The maximum number of keys that can be registered for use with one vehicle is as follows.

- Four (models without "keyless access with push-button start system")

- Seven (models with "keyless access with push-button start system")

One key that has already been registered is required in order to register a new key

NOTE

If you lose a key, the lost key's ID code still remains in the memory of the vehicle's immobilizer system. For security reasons, the lost key's ID code should be erased from the memory. To erase the lost key's ID code, all keys that will be used are required.

For details about new key registration and erasing the lost key's ID code, contact your SUBARU dealer.

■ Certification for immobilizer system

• For models with "keyless access with push-button start system":
  Refer to "Certification for keyless access with push-button start system" P130.
• For models without "keyless access with push-button start system": or - U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-2

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

- Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

- Mexico-spec. models

2-4. Remote keyless entry system

CAUTION

• Do not expose the remote transmitter to severe shocks, such as those experienced as a result of dropping or throwing.
• Do not take the remote transmitter apart except when replacing the battery.
• Do not get the remote transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry v a cloth immediately.
• When you carry the remote transmitter on an airplane, do not press the button of the remote transmitter while in the airplane. When any button of the remote transmitter is pressed, radio waves are sent and may affect the operation of the airplane. When you carry the remote transmitter in a bag on an airplane, take measures to prevent the buttons of the remote transmitter from being pressed.

1 2 3 4 202502

Access key fob

1) Lock/arm button with 2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Rear gate unlock button
- 4) PANIC button

1 2 3 4 PANIC 202238

Transmitter

1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button

The remote keyless entry system has the following functions.

• Locking and unlocking the doors, rear gate and fuel lid
• Unlocking the rear gate
• Sounding a panic alarm
• Arming and disarming the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to "Alarm system" P141.

The operable distance of the remote key-less entry system is approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this distance will vary depending on environmental condi-

tions. The system's operable distance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast station, TV tower, or remote controller of home electronic appliances.

NOTE

• For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the push-button ignition switch is in any position other than the "OFF" position.
• For models without "keyless access with push-button start system", the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the key is inserted the ignition switch.

• The hazard warning flashers will flash once or twice when the access key fob/transmitter button is pressed the following cases.

• When locking the doors

• When unlocking the doors
• When unlocking the rear gate

Operation of the hazard warning flashers in the above cases can be to "On" or "Off" by a SUBARU deal. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Locking the doors

Press the lock/arm button to lock all do the rear gate and fuel lid. An electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are fully closed, the following will occur to all you that the doors (or the rear gate) are properly closed.
- An electronic chirp sounds five times. - The hazard warning flashers flash five times.
When you close the door, it will automatically lock and then the following will occur • An electronic chirp sounds once.
d The hazard warning flashers flash once.

■ Unlocking the doors

Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock the driver's door and the fuel lid. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. unlock all doors, the rear gate, briefly p the unlock/disarm button a second time within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and second presses of the unlock/disarm

button (for unlocking of all of the door and the rear gate) is extremely short, the system may not respond.

■ Unlocking the rear gate

Press the rear gate unlock button to unlock the rear gate.
Anotelectronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

■ Vehicle finder function

Use this function to find your vehicle parked among many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the lock/arm button three times in a 5-second period will cause your vehicle's horn to sound once and its hazard warning flashers to flash three times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too short when you press the lock/arm button three times, the system may not respond to the signals from the remote transmitter.

■ Sounding a panic alarm

To activate the alarm, press the "PANIC" button once.

The horn will sound and the hazard warning flashers will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any button on the remote transmitter. Unless button on the remote transmitter is pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.

Setting audible signal operation (models without "keyless access with push-button start system")

Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the door lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn the audible signal off.

Perform the following steps to deactivate the audible signal. You can also use the same steps to restore the function.

1. Sit in the driver's seat and shut all doors and the rear gate.

Line drawing of a car interior with a hand cursor pointing to a control panel (no text or symbols)

1. Press and hold the "a" button of the power locking switch and insert the key into the ignition switch and pull it out at least 6 times within 10 seconds.

\$ Open and close the driver's door once within 10 seconds. The hazard warning flashers flash 3 times to indicate completion of the setting.

Your SUBARU dealer can perform the above procedure for you. Also, for models with a combination meter display, the setting can be changed using the display. For details, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

■ Replacing the battery

Refer to "Replacing key battery" P468

■ Replacing lost transmitters If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional transmitters (up to four can be programmed), your transmitters should be reprogrammed for security reasons. For details, contact your SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters programmed into the remote keyless entry system.

■ Certification for remote key-less entry system

▼ U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: CWTB1G077

FCC ID: CWTD1G049

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

▼ Canada-spec. models

the NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

▼ Mexico-spec. models

■ Locking and unlocking from the outside

NOTE

If you unlock the driver's door with a key (including an emergency key) and open the door while the alarm system armed, the alarm system is triggered and the vehicle's horn sounds. In this case, perform any of the following operations:

- Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

• Press any button on the access key fob (except when the access key fob battery is discharged).
• Press the push-button ignition switch to "ACC".

- Carry the access key fob and perform either of the following p cedures.

- Grip the front door handle.

- Press the rear gate opener button.

- Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

- Press any button on the remote transmitter (except when the transmitter battery is discharged).

- Insert the key into the ignition direction that the grooved side is facing switch and turn the ignition switch and insert it again.

to "ON".

For details about the alarm system, refer to "Alarm system" P141.
^a How to lock and unlock the vehi ^d using the key m is

1 2 202957

o-1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock
2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlo

In this case, only the driver's side door locked or unlocked.

NOTE

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

The emergency key is directional. If key cannot be inserted, change the

▼ How to lock the vehicle without using the key

To lock the door from outside without the key, the following methods are available.

∇ Locking using lock lever

1 2 202958

1) Rotate the lock lever forward. k.2) Close the door.

In this way, only the door that was operated will be locked.

the

▼ Locking using power door locking switch

1 2 202959

1) Press the lock side of the power door locking switch.*
2) Close the door.
*: For details about the power door locking switch, refer to "How to operate the pow door locking switches" P139.

In this case, all closed doors, the rear and fuel lid are locked at the same tim

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the inside the vehicle when locking the doors from the outside without the

■ Locking and unlocking from the inside

▼ How to use the lock lever

1 2 202960

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock 2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.

'Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are closed before starting to drive.

The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked. Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.

When the door is locked, pulling the inside door handle unlocks the door, allowing it to be opened (front door only).

WARNING

• Keep all doors locked when you drive, especially when small children are in your vehicle.
  Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child restraints, locking the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an accident.
  Keys and doors
  It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is accidentally opened, and intruders from unexpectedly opening doors and entering your vehicle.
• Do not pull the front door handle from inside while driving. The door could open even if it is locked.

▼ How to operate the power door locking switches

All doors, the rear gate and fuel lid can be locked and unlocked using the power door locking switches located on the driver's side and the front passenger's side doors.

1 2 202961

Example

1) Press to lock
2) Press to unlock

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside using the po door locking switches.

■ Automatic door locking/un-locking

All doors and the fuel lid are automatic locked or unlocked under the following conditions.

- For automatic door locking

- Vehicle Speed: When the vehicle speed reaches more than 12 mph (20

km/h).

• Shift Into or Out of PARK: When select lever is shifted into a position other than the "P" position.
• Off: When the function is set to

- For automatic door unlocking

• Shift Into or Out of PARK: When select lever is shifted into the "P" position.
• Ignition OFF: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF.
• Driver Door Open: When the driver's door is open.
• Off: When the function is set to

NOTE

- Perform the settings of the automatic door locking and unlocking the combination meter. Refer to "M screens" P197.

When getting out of the vehicle from a rear door, make sure to unlock a doors by pushing the unlock side of power door locking switch. If a rear door is unlocked from the inside door lever then the door is opened and closed, the Key lock-in prevention function will be triggered. All doors are unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention warning indicator "will appear and the warning chime will also sound."

■ Key lock-in prevention func- the tion

Under the following conditions, all the doors will not lock when the door lock switch is pushed with the driver door open.

• The key is still in the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").
• The ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

NOTE

FF When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are holding the key before locking the doors.
- The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as “operational”. This function's operational/non-operational setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU II the dealer for details.

When getting out of the vehicle from a rear door, make sure to unlock all the floors by pushing the unlock side of the power door locking switch. If a rear door is unlocked from the inside door never then the door is opened and closed, the Key lock-in prevention function will be triggered. All doors will be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention warning indicator "5" will appear and

the warning chime will also sound.

▼ Non-operation of key lock-in prevention function

When the system is set so that it does operate, the doors are locked by the following operation.

- When the lock lever is turned to the front ("LOCK") position with the driver's door open and the driver's door is then closed with the lock lever in that position the driver's door will be locked.

- When the spare key is used to lock driver's door from the outside of the vehicle, the door will be locked.

■ Battery drainage prevention function

If a door or the rear gate is not complete closed, the interior lights will remain illuminated as a result. However, several lights are automatically turned off by the battery drainage prevention function to prevent the battery from discharging. The following interior lights are affected by the function.

Item	Switch position	Automatically turning off
Map lights	DOOR	Approximately 20 minutes later
not Reading light	—	Approximately 20 minutes later
Ignition switch light	—	Approximately 20 minutes later
Cargo area light	DOOR	Approximately 20 minutes later

NOTE

The default setting for this function is set as "operational". The operational/non-operational setting of this function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the setting.

- When leaving the vehicle, please make sure that all doors and the gate are completely closed.

- The battery drainage prevention function does not operate while the key is in the ignition switch.

2-6. Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and the hazard warning flashers flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle.

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

The system can be armed or disarmed with the keyless access function or access key fob.

The system will not be activated when the push-button ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

For models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

re the system can be armed or disarmed with the remote transmitter.

The system will not be activated when the key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle's alarm system has been set for activation at the time of shipment from the factory. You can set the system for deactivation yourself or have it done by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Alarm system operation

When the alarm system is armed, it is triggered by opening any of the doors, rear gate or engine hood.

The alarm system will activate the following alarms when triggered.

• The vehicle's horn will sound for 30 seconds.
• The hazard warning flashers will flash for 30 seconds.

If any of the doors, the rear gate or end hood remains open after the 30-second period, the horn will continue to sound maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear gate or engine hood is closed while the horn is sounding, the horn will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30 sec

NOTE

The alarm system can be set to trigger the illumination of the following interior lights.

• Map lights (illuminates only when the door interlock switch is in the "DOOR" position)
• Reading lights
• Cargo area light (illuminates only when the cargo area light switch is the "DOOR" position)

The notifications regarding the map lights, reading lights and cargo area light are deactivated as the factory setting. A SUBARU dealer can activate the system. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Arming the system

The alarm system becomes armed when the following operation is performed.
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if pine equipped) and turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position.
2. Carry the key and get out of the vehicle.
3. Make sure that the engine hood is closed.

1. Lock the doors using any of the following methods.

ger-Locking using the remote keyless prior entry system. For details, refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P134.
- Locking using the keyless access function (if equipped). For details, refer to "Locking with the door lock sensor P123.
in ● Locking using the power door locking switch. For details, refer to "Lock using power door locking switch" P139.

NOTE

e 202994

Security indicator light

All doors and the rear gate will lock, an electronic chirp will sound once, the hazard warning flashers will flash once, and the security indicator light will start flashing rapidly.

1. Approximately 30 seconds later, the system will enter surveillance state.

When the system is in surveillance state, the security indicator light will then flash slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the system has been armed for surveillance.

NOTE

- The system can be armed even if windows and/or moonroof are open.

Always make sure that they are fully closed before arming the system.

- When arming the system, if any of the doors or the rear gate is not full closed, an electronic chirp sounds five

times and the hazard warning flasher flash five times to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not pro closed. When you close the door, do will automatically lock and the system will automatically arm in 30 seconds.

- The 30-second standby time can be eliminated if you prefer. Have it performed by your SUBARU dealer.

- If any of the following actions is done during the standby period, the system will not switch to the surveillance state.

- Doors (including the rear gate) are unlocked using the access key fob/remote transmitter.

- Doors (including the rear gate) are unlocked using the keyless access function (models with "key less access with push-button start system").

- Any door (including the rear is opened.

- The ignition switch is turned

the "ON" position (models without the "keyless access with push-button start system").

- Push-button ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" position (moels with "keyless access with putally button start system").

■ Disarming the system

Perform either of the following procedure directly press a button (for less than 2 seconds) on the access key fob/remote transmitter.

- Carry the access key fob and perform either of the following procedures (mode with "keyless access with push-button start system").

- Grip the front door handle.

- Press the rear gate opener button.

- Unlock using the PIN code access

The flashing of the security indicator light will then change slowly (once approximately every 3 seconds from twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the alarm system has been disarmed

▼ Emergency disarming

For models with "keyless access with the touch-button start system":

If you cannot disarm the system using a access key fob (i.e., the access key fob

broken or the access key fob battery is too weak), refer to "Switching power status" P418.

For models without "keyless access with the push-button start system":

The system can be disarmed if you turn the ignition switch from the "LOCK"/"OFF" position to the "ON" position with a registered key.

NOTE

If the access key fob or transmitter battery is too weak, replace the battery immediately. Refer to "Replacing battery of access key fob" P469.

■ Alarm system setting

To change the setting of your vehicle's alarm system for activation or deactivation, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to "Disarming the system" P143.

2. Sit in the driver's seat and shut all doors, the rear gate and engine hood.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

4. Hold down "☐" of the driver's power door locking switch, open the driver's door within the following 1 second, and wait 10 seconds without releasing the switch. The setting will then be changed as follows.

- CONTINUED -

Setting status	Combination meter display	Horn
Activate AL	ON Once
Deactivate	AL OFF	Twice

NOTE

You may have the above setting done by your SUBARU dealer.

■ If you have accidentally gered the alarm system

▼ To stop the alarm

Do any of the following operations:

• Press any button on the access key remote transmitter.
• Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").
• Turn the push-button ignition to the "ACC" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

NOTE

Only registered keys will stop the alarm. If the key is not registered, alarm will not stop.

■ Valet mode

When you choose the valet mode, the alarm system does not operate. In valet mode, the remote transmitter is used on for locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the setting of your vehicle's alarm system to deactivation mode. Refer to "Alarm system setting" P143. The security indicator light will continue to flash once every 3 seconds, indicating that the system is in the valet mode.

to exit valet mode, change the setting your vehicle's alarm system to activation mode. Refer to "Alarm system setting" P143.

the

2-7. Child safety locks

202476

Each rear door has a child safety lock. When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, the door cannot be opened from the inside. The door can only be opened from the outside.

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks to the "LOCK" position when children sit in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out.

2-8. Windows

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, always conform to the following instructions without exception.

• When operating the power windows, be extremely careful to prevent anyone's fingers, arms, neck, head or other objects from being caught in the window.
• Always lock the passengers' windows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle.
• Always carry the key when you leave the vehicle for safety reasons and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window.

NOTE

- If the power window system detects resistance, an impact or abnormality, the window operation may be automatically stopped to prevent further jam-

ming, entrapment or malfunction.

• The closing window slides down slightly and stops.
• The opening window stops sliding down.

- The power window system may detect resistance, an impact or an abnormality in the following cases.

• A substantial sized object is caught between the window and the window frame.
• A foreign object is caught between the window and the window frame.
• The vehicle drives over a deep pothole.

- The window cannot be closed for few seconds after the window is automatically stopped by the system.

■ Power window operation

▼ Power window switches

1 2 3 4 5 202962

Driver's side power window switches 1) For front left window (with one-touch auto up and down feature)

2) For front right window (with one-touch auto up and down feature)
3) For rear left window
4) For rear right window
5) Lock switch

All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch cluster on the driver's side door.

The switch illuminates when operated.

Line drawing of a car's side panel with no text or symbols

Passenger's side power window switches

Each passenger's window can be controlled by the power window switch loca on the door.

The switch illuminates when operated.

▼ Operating the window

1 2 3 4 202972

With one-touch auto up and down feat (1) Automatically close*
2) Close
3) Open
4) Automatically open*
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the switch to the opposite side.

1 2 202973

Without one-touch auto up and down feature
1) Close
2) Open

NOTE

Avoid the following.

- Continuously operating a switch in the same direction after the window is fully closed or fully opened.

- Continuously operating three or more switches all at once in the same direction after the windows are fully closed or fully opened.

Either of the operations described above may cause the power window breaker to operate making it impossible to open or close the window. Be sure to initialize the power windows. Refer to

"Initialization of power window (windows with off delay function)" P1

few seconds after the anti-entrapment function operates.

tswitches does not illuminate, the window switch cannot be operated.

▼ Anti-entrapment function (windows with one-touch auto up and dow function)

▼ Off delay function (if equipped) The windows can be operated for approximately 40 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" or "OFF" position. If a front door is opened within seconds, the off delay function is canceled.

■ Initialization of power window (windows with off delay function)

While closing the window automatically, it the window senses a substantial enough object trapped between the window and the window frame, it automatically moves down slightly and stops.

▼Locking the passengers' windows

If a foreign object is caught while window opening automatically, the window will stop.

CAUTION

• Never attempt to test the power window operation using body parts fingers, hands or other parts of your body.
• If an object is caught just before the window fully closes, the system may not operate properly.

13 203438 1 2

1) Lock
2) Unlock

If the one-touch auto up and down function or off delay function does not operate properly, operate each window according to the following procedure in order to initialize the power window system.
If the one-touch auto up and down function or off delay function does not operate properly, operate each window according to the following procedure in order to initialize the power window system.

1. Close the door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
3. Open the window completely and then press and hold down the power window switch for approximately 1 second.
4. Close the window completely and then pull and hold the power window switch for approximately 1 second.

NOTE

• If a window detects an impact sin to that caused by trapping an obj example, when the vehicle encounter a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment function may operate.
• You cannot close the window for

When the lock switch is in the lock position, thereforar passenger's window switches on she driver's side door and the rear passengers' side doors cannot be operated. When the indicator on the window a

2-9. Rear gate

■ Manual rear gate

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked using any of the following systems.

• Power door locking switch: Refer to "Locking and unlocking from the inside" P139.
• Keyless access with the push-button start system (if equipped): Refer to "Key less access with push-button start system P118.
• Remote keyless entry system: Refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P134.

To open:

Line drawing of a car rear view with a close-up inset showing internal components (no text or symbols)

Rear gate opener button
1. Unlock the rear gate.

1. Press and hold the rear gate opener button. The rear gate will open slightly.
2. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slow

NOTE

If the rear gate cannot be opened due a discharged vehicle battery, a malfunction in the door locking/unlocking system or other causes, you can unlock it by manually operating the rear gate lock release lever. For the procedure, refer to "Rear gate - if the rear gate cannot be opened" P419.

To close:

Diagram of a car intake structure showing a black arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present

Lower the rear gate slowly and push down firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily with the handle.

WARNING

• To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, always keep the rear gate closed while the engine is running.
• Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the recessed grip. Also do not close the rear gate by pulling the handle from inside the cargo space. There is a danger of your hand being caught and injured.

CAUTION

• Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cellophane tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the stays while loading or unloading cargo. That could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open.
• Be careful not to hit your head or face on the rear gate when opening or closing the rear gate and when loading or unloading cargo.

■ Power rear gate (if equipped)

WARNING

• When operating the power rear gate, observe the following precautions. Ignoring the precautions may result in an injury (e.g., anyone's body is hit against the rear gate or is caught in the rear gate, etc.)
• Make sure there are no people around the rear gate.
• Never let anyone get close to the rear gate.

- When closing the rear gate, be extremely careful to prevent anyone's fingers, arms, neck, head or other objects from being caught in the rear gate. Otherwise, serious personal injury may be caused by entrapment.

- After opening the rear gate on a slope using the power rear gate feature, the rear gate may close. Make sure that the rear gate has stopped completely after opening it.

- When leaving the vehicle, always carry the key for safety and never allow an unattended child to

remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power rear gate.

• The driver should be aware of and pay careful attention to his/her responsibilities.
• Use the power rear gate only when the area around the rear gate is clearly visible and when you have checked that there is no danger of people being caught the rear gate.

CAUTION

• When closing the rear gate after opening it, make sure to use the power rear gate. If you close the rear gate manually with extra force, the power rear gate may be damaged.
• Do not install any accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts on the rear gate. If the weight of rear gate increases excessively, the rear gate stay cannot support the rear gate sufficiently when opening the rear gate. Also, the power rear gate may not function properly or

may malfunction.

- Do not touch the driving rod. Doing so may result in injury damage.

or

Keys and doors
The power rear gate operates only when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• The vehicle is stopped completely.
- The outside temperature is within a range of -22^ to 140^ (from -30^ 60^) .
in The ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position. Or, the ignition switch is in the "ON" position and the select lever is in the "P" position.

We recommend using the power rear gate function in most circumstances instead of manual operation.

NOTE

• Do not press the power rear gate button repeatedly while the power rear gate is operating. Otherwise, the system may ignore the button operation in order to avoid being damaged.
• If the vehicle starts to move while the power rear gate is operating, the system sounds a buzzer and closes the rear gate automatically. At this time, if the system detects jamming, it will deactivate the power rear gate function

- CONTINUED -

and the rear gate will not be closed. If ▽ By the power rear gate button this occurs, close the rear gate manually. For details, refer to "Manual rear gate" P148.

• If you try to open the rear gate using the power rear gate function immediately after closing the rear gate using the power rear gate function, an electronic chirp will sound and the rear gate will not open. Wait for a while before trying to open the rear gate via the power rear gate function.
• If either of the operating conditions has not been satisfied while operating the power rear gate, an electronic chirp will sound and the power rear gate will be deactivated. In this case, the rear gate may stop opening or closing suddenly.

▼ Operation

NOTE

• The rear gate will remain unlocked even after closing it. Always lock the rear gate when leaving the vehicle.
• If you cannot open/close the rear gate by performing the operation described as follows, a short electronic chirp will sound three times (beep, beep, beep).

using gate airp will 203339

Power rear gate button on the instrument panel

202639

Power rear gate button on the access

fob

Diagram of a car charging plug with two switches and a car icon, no text or symbols present

Power rear gate button on the transmitter To open the rear gate:

press and hold the power rear gate button when the rear gate is closed. The rear gate will open automatically. Then an electronic chirp and the hazard warning flashers will operate as follows:

• When operating the power rear gate button on the instrument panel/transmitter: sounds and flashes twice.
• When operating the power rear gate button on the access key fob: sounds and flashes four times.

NOTE

- While the rear gate is locked, you cannot open the rear gate by operating key the power rear gate button on the

instrument panel. In such a case, unlock the rear gate before operating the power rear gate button.

- The operational/non-operational setting of the remote power rear gate opening function using the access key fob or the transmitter can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

To pause the opening rear gate: Briefly press the power rear gate button while the rear gate is being opened. The an electronic chirp will sound twice and hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If you press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will close.

You can open the rear gate by pressing power rear gate button briefly while the rear gate is being closed.

NOTE

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with curved surfaces and an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The rear gate cannot be paused when is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) ran from the fully closed position. The system will ignore any button operation and the rear gate will continue to open

∇ By the buttons on the rear gate

NOTE

After performing the following procedures, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

en it range on pen 203346

and doors
Rear gate opener button

To close the rear gate:

Press and hold the power rear gate button. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If you briefly press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will open.

202506

Power rear gate button on the inside of the rear gate

To open the rear gate:

1. For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", carry the access key fob. For models without "keyless access with push-button start system", unlock the rear gate.
2. Briefly press the rear gate opener button when the rear gate is closed.

The rear gate will open automatically.

To pause the opening rear gate: Briefly press either of the following buttons while the rear gate is being opened.

• Rear gate opener button
• Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate

If you press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will close. You can open the rear gate by pressing the pow rear gate button briefly while the rear gate is being closed.

NOTE

edge s 203451

The rear gate cannot be paused wh is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) from the fully closed position. The system will ignore any button opera and the rear gate will continue to

To close the rear gate:

Briefly press either of the following buttons.

• Rear gate opener button
  ● Power rear gate button on the inside

edge of the rear gate

If you press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will open.

∇ By manual operation

To open the rear gate:

Lift up the rear gate when the rear gate is at midway position. The rear gate will open automatically.

To close the rear gate:

Pull down the rear gate when the rear gate is opened. The rear gate will close automatically.

NOTE

If the rear gate is moved slowly, it may not operate automatically open or close.

▼ Manual operation

NOTE

Using the power rear gate operation is recommended. Manual operation will require physical effort.

opere power rear gate can be closed manually. Refer to "Manual rear gate" P148.

▼ Memory function

MEMORY 203340

Memory switch

Your desired rear gate height can be registered.

Registration of the rear gate height:

1 2 203441

Memory switch status

1) ON status
2) OFF status

To register the rear gate height, perform the following procedures while the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.

1. Open the rear gate using the power rear gate function.
2. With the rear gate at the desired height, stop it using the power rear gate function.
3. Press the memory switch to select the "ON" status.

202506

Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate

1. With the rear gate at the desired height, press and hold the power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate until an electronic chirp is heard and the hazard warning flashers flash three times. The electronic chirp and the flashing hazard warning flashers confirm the selected rear gate height has been registered.

NOTE

• To change the registered height, press the memory switch to select the "OFF" status and perform the registering procedure again.
• It is possible to register the height from a completely closed position to

- CONTINUED -

approximately 2 in (5 cm) open.

Retrieval of the rear gate height:

To open the rear gate and stop it at the registered height, perform the following procedure.

1. Press the memory switch to select the ON status.
2. Press and hold any of the power rear gate switches.

Even if any of the power rear gate switches are pressed and held while the memory switch is in the OFF status, you can stop it at the registered height by pressing the memory switch to select the ON status before the rear gate reaches the registered height.

NOTE

The rear gate will open to the position that is stored in the memory function even if the rear gate is opened by the reverse function.

▼ Reverse function

WARNING

- Do not let parts of your body caught when operating the reverse function. If the reverse function does not operate for

some reason, this may lead to serious injury or accidents.

• The reverse function may not operate if foreign objects are caught in the rear gate just be it closes completely. Be careful not to catch your fingers and other body parts.
• The reverse function may not operate depending on the object shape and the manner in which was caught. Be careful not to catch your fingers and other body parts.

CAUTION

• If the reverse function is operated 3 times consecutively, automatic opening and closing of the power rear gate function will be canceled and the rear gate will stop opening or closing suddenly. However, the rear gate may open or close depending on the rear gate height when automatic operation is ceased. Be careful that
  get the rear gate does not hit anyone's head or face, etc. and the fingers and baggage, etc. are no caught in it.

- Take care not to damage the touch sensors. Otherwise, the reverse function may cease to operate.

ore If, while opening or closing using power rear gate, the rear gate catches persons or baggage or hits an obstacle, an electronic chirp will sound 3 times and the rear gate will operate as follows.

When opening the rear gate: The rear gate will automatically close.

When closing the rear gate: The rear gate will automatically open.

Line drawing of a car showing the open rear canopy and internal compartments (no text or symbols)

1) Touch sensor

Touch sensors are attached on the left and right edges of the rear gate. If the touch sensors detect fingers, baggage, etc.

while closing by the power rear gate function, an electronic chirp will sounds times and the rear gate will open automatically.

NOTE

When the rear gate is opened using reverse function, it will be opened or to the height registered in the memory function.

▼ Rear gate auto closure function

If, while fully opened via the power rear gate function, the rear gate is lowered to the weight of snow and such, an electric chirp will sound and the rear gate auto-closure function will apply braking to the rear gate so that it prevents a rapid clof of the rear gate.

NOTE

- If there is snow on the rear gate, use the power rear gate function at removing the snow.

- If you close the rear gate manual just after the rear gate is fully open using the power rear gate function, rear gate drop prevention function v detect a rapid closure of the rear g and apply braking to the rear gate. this case, this is not a malfunction.

▼ Selecting audible signal operation 3 Using an electronic chirp, the power re-gate will give you an audible signal be starting its operation. If desired, the audible signal can be turned off by a SUB dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. g

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", you can turn the audible signal off by operating the information display. For details, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal also works as the audible signal settings for the "remote keyless entry system" and the "keyless access with push-button start system". However, for the warning chime such as that caused by "Reverse function P154 or "Rear gate auto closure function", P155, it cannot be set as non-operational.

▼ Initialization of power rear gate If the power rear gate detects some abnormality while operating, an electronic chirp will sound and the power rear gate operation will be automatically stopped in either opening or closing position. In this case, the system needs to be initialized the following order to restart the function properly.

If the power rear gate is closed

ar fore di- ARU r multi 203346

1. Keep pressing the rear gate opener switch until it unlocked and lift up the rear gate.
2. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to close automatically. The system will be initialized once the gate is fully closed.
3. Operate the power rear gate and check that the function operates properly.

If the power rear gate is opened

1. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to close automatically. The system will be initialized once the gate is fully closed.
2. Operate the power rear gate and check that the function operates properly.

CAUTION

If the power rear gate function of not operate properly, have your vehicle checked by SUBARU deal

2-10. Moonroof (if equipped)

does

WARNING

Never let anyone's hands, arms, head or any objects protrude from the moonroof. A person could be seriously injured if any of the following conditions occur.

• The vehicle stops suddenly.
• The vehicle turns sharply.
- The vehicle is involved in an accident.
- Body parts protruding from the vehicle are struck by outside objects.

To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, always conform to the following instructions without exception.

• Before closing the moonroof, make sure that no one's hands, arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the moonroof.

● Always carry the key when you leave the vehicle for safety reasons and never allow an unattended child to remain in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the moon-roof.

- Never try to check the anti-en-trapment function by deliberately placing part of your body in the moonroof.

CAUTION

• Do not sit on the edge of the moonroof.
  open
• Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold conditions have caused it to freeze shut.
• The anti-entrapment function does not operate when the moon-roof is being tilted down. Be sure to confirm that it is safe to do so before tilting the moonroof down.
• If the moonroof does not close, have the system checked by a SUBARU dealer.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions.

The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

Sunshade switch

1 2 203360

1) Open
2) Close

To open or close the sunshade using automatic function, slide and hold the switch toward the open/close side and release.

To stop the sunshade halfway, slide the sunshade switch either way.

■ Moonroof switch
▼ Tilting moonroof

Diagram of car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and directional arrows indicating movement or navigation

To raise or lower the moonroof, press moonroof switch.

If the shade is closed past the half-open position when the switch is pressed, it open up to the half-open position.

NOTE

Release the switch after the moonro has been raised or has been lowered completely. Pressing the switch continuously may cause damage to the moonroof.

▼ Sliding moonroof

1 2 203362

1) Open
2) Close

To open the moonroof:

When the moonroof switch is slid and held to the open side, the moonroof will open, then stop slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Slide the moonroof switch again to fully open the moonroof.

dTo close the moonroof:

When the moonroof switch is slid and held to the close side, the moonroof will close, then stop at the tilt-up position.

Slide and hold the moonroof switch again to fully close the moonroof.

To stop the moonroof halfway, slide the moonroof switch either way.

- CONTINUED -

NOTE

• After washing the vehicle or after rains, wipe away water on the roof to opening the moonroof to prevent drops of water from falling into the passenger compartment.
• For the sake of safety, it is recommended that you avoid driving with moonroof fully opened.

▼ Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses a substantial enough object trapped between its glass and the vehicle's roof during closure, it automatically moves back to the fully open position and stops there. The anti-entrapment function may also be activated by a strong shock on the moonroof even when there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function using fingers, hands or other parts of your body.

2-11. Rear door window it shades (if equipped) prior

he h

1 203336

1) Hook

The rear door window sunshades are built in the rear door trim.

To use the sunshade, pull it up and hang it on the hooks.

To retract the sunshade, release it from the hooks slowly and allow it to roll into the door trim.

CAUTION

• Do not use the rear door window sunshade when the window is opened. There is a risk that the rear door window sunshade will come off of the hook.

• To ensure normal operation of the sunshades, observe the following precautions.

• Do not put anything where it may hinder the opening/closing of a sunshade.

• Do not put anything on the sunshades.
• Do not hang anything on the hook.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Instruments and controls

3-1. Ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system") ..... 164

Key positions 164

Key reminder chime....165

Ignition switch light (if equipped) 165

3-2. Push-button ignition switch (models with "keyless access with push-button start system") 166

Safety precautions.... 166

Operating range for push-button start system ..... 166

Switching power status.... 167

When access key fob does not operate properly.... 168

3-3. Hazard warning flasher 168

3-4. Meters and gauges 168

Speedometer 168

Tachometer.... 168

Odometer 169

Double trip meter.... 169

Fuel gauge 170

Engine coolant temperature gauge.... 170

ECO gauge 171

Combination meter settings 171

3-5. Illumination brightness control 171

Auto dimmer cancel function 172

3-6. Warning and indicator.... 172

Initial illumination for system check.... 172

Seatbelt warning light and chime 173

SRS airbag system warning light 174

Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators 174

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light.... 175

Charge warning light.... 176

Oil pressure warning light 176

Engine low oil level warning light 176

Windshield washer fluid warning light ..... AT OIL TEMP warning light.... 177

Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if equipped).... 177

Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models).... 177

ABS warning light 179

Brake system warning light (red) 179

Electronic parking brake light.... 180

Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light 181

Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light..... 181

Low fuel warning light.... 181

Door open warning light.... 182

All-Wheel Drive warning light 182

Power steering warning light 182

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/ Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light 183

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 184

Warning chimes and warning indicator of the keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped).... 184

Security indicator light 189

Select lever/gear position indicator.... 190

Turn signal indicator lights.... 190

High beam indicator light 190

High beam assist indicator light (if equipped) ..... 19

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (models with LED headlights) 190

LED headlight warning light (models with LED headlights) 190

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light (if equipped) 190

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ......

Headlight indicator light.... 191

X-MODE indicator 191

Hill descent control indicator 191

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) 191

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) 191

RAB warning indicator (if equipped).... 191

RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped).... 191

Icy road surface warning indicator (if equipped) 191

3-7. Combination meter display.... 192

Basic operation 192

Welcome screen (opening animation) and Good-bye screen (ending animation).... 193

Warning screen 193

Telltale screen 194

Basic screens.... 195

Menu screens 197

3-8. Multi-function display (black and white)..... 199

Driving information display 199

Outside temperature indicator.... 202

X-MODE indicator 202

Clock.... 202

3-9. Multi-function display (color LCD) .....203

Features 203

Welcome screen.... 203

Self-check screen.... 203

Interruption screen.... 204

Basic operation.... 205

Basic screens 205

Setting screen.... 212

How to get the source code using the open source 219

3-10. Clock 220

Setting the clock manually 220

Setting the clock automatically.... 222

Regulatory information.... 223

3-11. Light control switch 223

Precautions and tips 223

Headlights 224

High/low beam change (dimmer) 226

Headlight flasher 226

High beam assist function (if equipped).... 227

Daytime running light system.... 229

3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) (if equipped) 230

3-13. Headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights)....231

3-14. Fog light switch (if equipped) .....231

3-15. Turn signal lever....232

One-touch lane changer 232

Instruments and controls

3-16. Wiper and washer.... 232 Windshield wiper and washer switches .... 235 Rear window wiper and washer switch.... 237

3-17. Mirrors 238 Inside mirror.... 238 Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink® (if equipped).... 238

Smart Rearview Mirror/compass with HomeLink® (if equipped) 245 Outside mirrors.... 258 3-18. Defogger and deicer.... 259 3-19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel.... 260 Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped) .... 261 3-20. Horn.... 262

3-1. Ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system")

WARNING

• Never turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position while the vehicle is being driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel, preventing steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it takes a much great effort than usual to steer.
• Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child or others. Children could operate the power windows, the moonroof or other controls or even make the vehicle move.
  to

Do not attach a large key holder key case to either key. If it bange against your knees or hands while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position, thereby stopping the engine. Also, if the key is attached to a holder or to a large bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted turning of the ignition switch.

PUSH LOCK ACC ON START

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

CAUTION

NOTE

• Keep the ignition switch in the "LOCK" position when the engine is shot running.
• Using electrical accessories for a long time with the ignition switch in the "ON" or "ACC" position can cause the battery to go dead.
• If the ignition switch will not move from the "LOCK" position to the "ACC" eposition, turn the steering wheel slightly to the left and right as you turn the ignition switch.

■ Key positions

Position	Description
LOCK	The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key.
ACC	In this position the electrical accessories (audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can be used.
ON	This is the normal operating position after starting the engine.
START	The engine is started in this position.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to "START" position while the engine is running.

NOTE

2 PUSH LOCK ACC OK 301690

- To turn the key from the "ACC" to "LOCK" position, the select lever must be in the "P" position and the key must be pushed in and turned. - If your registered key fails to start the engine, pull out the key once (the security indicator light will blink), and then insert the key again and turn it—the "START" position again to restart the engine.

• The engine may not start in the following cases:

Technical illustration of a key inserted into a circular component, no text or symbols present

- The key grip is touching another key or a metallic key holder.

st must ne to 301692

- The key is near another key contains an immobilizer transpon-

der.

- The key is near or touching another transmitter.

■ Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the driver's door is opened and the ignition switch is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position.

The chime stops under the following conditions.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
• When the key is removed from the ignition switch.
  When the driver's door is closed.

■ Ignition switch light (if equipped)

For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, the ignition switch light illuminates when the driver's door is opened or when the driver's door is unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for several tens of seconds and then gradually turns off under the following conditions.

• When the driver's door is closed.
  When the doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light turns off immediately under the following conditions.

• When the ignition switch is turned to "ON" position.
• When all doors and the rear gate are locked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

3-2. Push-button ignition switch (models with "keyless access with push-button star system")

■ Safety precautions

■ Operating range for push-button start system

Refer to "Safety precautions" P119.

1 2 305671

1) Antenna
2) Operating range

NOTE

- If the access key fob is not detected within the operating range of the antennas inside the vehicle, the push-button ignition switch and the engine start

cannot be operated.

Even when the access key fob is outside the vehicle, if it is placed too close to the glass, it may be possible to switch the power or to start the engine.

- Do not leave the access key fob in the following places. It may become impossible to operate the push-button ignition switch and the engine start. It may also cause a false warning to issue although no malfunction actually occurs, or not to issue a warning when any malfunction occurs.

• On the instrument panel
• On the floor
• Inside the glove box
• Inside the door trim pocket
• On the rear seat

- In the cargo area

- When operating the push-button ignition switch or starting the engine, if the access key fob battery is discharged, perform the procedure described in "Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly" P417. In such a case, replace the battery immediately. Refer to "Replacing battery of access key fob" P469.

Switching power status

1 ENGINE START STOP 2 304877

1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch

The power is switched every time the push-button ignition switch is pressed.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in driver's seat.
2. Shift the select lever into the "P"/"N" position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal. Every time the button is pressed, the power is switched in the sequence of "OFF", "ACC" "ON" and "OFF". When the engine is stopped and the push-button ignition switch is in "ACC" or "ON", the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch illuminates in orange.

Power status	Indicator color	Operation
OFF	Turned off	Power is turned off.
ACC	Orange	The following systems can be used:audio and accessory power outlet.
ON	Orange(while engine is stopped)	All electrical systems can be used.
	Turned off(while engine is running)

CAUTION

• When the push-button ignition the switch is left in "ON" (while the engine is not running) or "ACC" for a long time, it may result in vehicle battery discharge.
• Do not spill drinks or other liquid on the push-button ignition switch. It may cause a malfunction.

• Do not touch the push-button ignition switch with a hand soil with oil or other contaminants. I may cause a malfunction.

• If the push-button ignition switch does not operate smoothly, stop the operation. Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

• If the push-button ignition switch does not illuminate even when the instrument panel illumination is turned on, have the vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
• If the vehicle was left in the hot sun for a long time, the surface the push-button ignition switch may get hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.

NOTE

• When operating the push-button ignition switch, firmly press it all the way.
  • If the push-button ignition switch is pressed quickly, the power may not turn on or off.
• If the indicator light on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green when the push-button ignition switch is pressed, steering is locked. When this occurs, press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

▼ Battery drainage prevention function

When the push-button ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position for approximately 1 hour, the push-button ignition switch will be automatically switched to "OFF" to prevent the battery from going dead.

■ When access key fob does not operate properly

Refer to "Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly" P417.

3-3. Hazard warning flasher

ft 305664

The hazard warning flasher is used to wait other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works regardless of the position of the ignition switch.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the hazard warning button on the instrument panel. All the turn signal lights and the turn signal indicator lights will flash. To turn off the flasher, push the button again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is the turn signals do not work.

3-4. Meters and gauges

NOTE

Some of the meters and gauges on the combination meter use liquid-crystal displays. You will find their indications hard to see if you wear polarized glasses.

■ Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.

Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone.

on,

■ Odometer

1 2 900 mi 305589

1) TRIP RESET switch
2) Combination meter

This meter displays the odometer when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.

NOTE

If you press the TRIP RESET switch when the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the odometer/trip meter will light up.

The indicators will turn off when:

• The TRIP RESET switch is not operated for approximately 10 seconds.
• The driver's door is opened and closed.

■ Double trip meter

1 2 A 34.5 305590

1) TRIP RESET switch
2) Combination meter

This meter displays the two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The trip meter shows the distance that vehicle has been driven since you last it to zero.

The display can be switched as shown the following sequence by pressing the TRIP RESET switch.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pressing the TRIP RESET switch and keep the knob pressed for more than 2 seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result.

NOTE

- If the connection between the combination meter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data recorded on the trip meter will be lost. - If you press the TRIP RESET switch when the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is possible to switch between the A trip meter and B trip meter indications while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. In addition, it is possible to reset the meter by pressing and holding the TRIP RESET switch.

The indicators will turn off when: - The TRIP RESET switch is not operated for approximately 10 seconds.

- CONTINUED -

- The driver's door is opened then closed.

■ Fuel gauge

F I E 305606

The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank. When the ignition switch is in the "LOC "OFF" or "ACC" position, the fuel gauge shows "E" even if the fuel tank contains fuel.

The gauge may move slightly due to full level movement in the tank (e.g., during braking, turning or acceleration). If you press the trip reset switch while ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" of "ACC" position, the fuel gauge's dial will light up and the needle will indicate the amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

df, while the fuel gauge needle is indicati the amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you (a) do not press the trip reset switch 10 seconds or (b) open and close the driver's door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the "E" position and the dial and needle will turn off.

NOTE

Simple black fuel pump icon with a play button symbol, no text or labels present.

You will see the " sign in the gauge.

This indicates that the fuel filler does (lid) is located on the right side of the vehicle.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

H C 1 C 305605

1) Normal operating range

The engine coolant temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The engine coolant temperature will vary in accordance with the outside temperature and driving conditions.

fuel We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the engine coolant temperature gauge reaches near the middle of the range. Engine operation is optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high revving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Refer to "Engine overheating" P413.

■ ECO gauge

- MPG + 305591

The ECO gauge shows the difference between the current rate of fuel consumption and the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset. If the ECO gauge moves towards the + side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.

NOTE

- The ECO gauge shows only an approximate indication of fuel efficiency. - After resetting the trip meter, the average rate of fuel consumption is shown until you have driven for 1 (or 1km ). Before that time, the ECO gauge does not operate.

■ Combination meter settings

Meter and vehicle settings can be set on the combination meter. Meter and vehicle settings can be set on the combination meter display. Refer to "Menu screens" P197.

3-5. Illumination brightness control

not mile 305585

The instrument panel and the ambient lighting illuminate under the following conditions.

- When the light switch is in the "D" or "D" position. - When the light control switch is in the "AUTO" position and the headlights illuminate automatically.

You can adjust the illumination brightness for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward. To darken, turn the control dial downward.

NOTE

• When the control dial is turned fully upward, the illumination brightness becomes the maximum and the automatic dimming function does not work at all.
• The brightness setting is not canceled even when the ignition switch turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position

■ Auto dimmer cancel functio

When the ambient light is bright, the illumination brightness is set to the maximum regardless of the position of the control dial. In this case, you cannot add the illumination brightness by using the control dial. When the ambient light is 0 you can dim the illumination brightness as described above.

The operational/non-operational setting and sensitivity of the auto dimmer canc function can be changed by your SUBAR dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

3-6. Warning and indicator

■ Initial illumination for system check

Several of the warning and indicator light illuminate when the ignition switch is initially turned to the "ON" position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. For the system check, several of the following lights illuminate and then turn off after several seconds or after the engine has just started.

dark, as Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the driver fastens the seatbelt.)

PASS

: Front passenger's seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turn off only when the front seat passenger fastens the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
ON Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light
OFF: Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light

CHECK: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- function indicator light

Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

AT OIL: AT OIL TEMP warning light

(1) Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)

ABS/ (ABS): ABS warning light

BRAKE / (!) Brake system warning light

: Low fuel warning light

AWD: AWD warning light

Power steering warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light

S_eff : Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.

■ Seatbelt warning light and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the driver's and front passenger's seat, as required by current safety standards.

With the ignition switch turned to the "ON" position, this device reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by illuminating the warning lights in the locations indicated in the following illustration and sounding a chime.

Simple line drawing of a balance scale with circular components and a central pointer (no text or symbols)

Driver's warning light

nd y PASS 305593

Front passenger's warning light

▼ Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/ has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will flash for several seconds, to warn that the seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver's seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also sound simultaneously.

NOTE

- If the driver's and/or front passenger's seatbelt(s) are/is still not fasten 6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning device operates as follows according to the vehicle speed.

- At speeds lower than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s) will alternate between steady illumination and flashing at 15-second intervals. The chime will not sound.

- At speeds higher than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s) will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light(s) is/are flashing.

- It is possible to cancel the warning operation that follows the 6-second warning after turning ON the ignition switch. When the ignition switch is turned ON next time, however, the complete sequence of the warning operation resumes. For further details about canceling the warning operation, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front passenger's seat, the seatbelt warning device for the front passenger's seat will be deactivated. The front passenger's occupant detection system monitors whether or not there is a passenger on the front passenger's seat.

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the device from functioning correctly or cause the device to

- CONTINUED -

fail.

• Do not install any accessory such as table or TV onto the seatback.
• Do not store a heavy load in the seatback pocket.
• Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passenger's seatback, or allow him/her to pull the seatback.
• Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any them are not locked securely, adjust the again. For adjusting procedure, refer to "Manual seat" P35.

If the seatbelt warning device for the front passenger's seat does not function correctly (e.g., it is activated even when the front passenger's seat is empty or it is deactivated even when the front passenger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take the following actions.

• Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than a child restraint system its child occupant, although we strongly recommend that all children sit in the reseat properly restrained.
• Ensure that there is no article left in a seatback pocket.
• Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger's

seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning device for free passenger's seat does not function correctly after taking relevant corrective actions described above, immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

■ SRS airbag system warning light

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag system. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury.

• Flashing or flickering of the warning light

• No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the "ON" position

• Continuous illumination of the warning light
  ● Illumination of the warning light while driving

For details about the components monitored by the warning light, refer to "SRS airbag system monitors" P109.

■ Front passenger's frontal air-bag ON and OFF indicators

PASS AIR BAG OFF ON 305594

ON Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator
Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

The front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag.

The indicator is displayed on the center of the instrument panel.
When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, both the ON and OFF indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked. Following the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passenger's SRS front airbag determined by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system monitoring. If the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activated, the passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger's SRS frontal airba is deactivated, the passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator will remain off while the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the "ON position, if both the ON and OFF indicate remain illuminated or off simultaneously even after the system check period, the system is malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light illuminates while you are driving, have your vehicle checked/ repaired by alyour SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your vehicle's warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is at least one problem or potential problem somewhere in the emission control system.

▼ If the light illuminates steadily If the light illuminates steadily while drive or does not turn off after the engine state an emission control system malfunction has been detected. You should have your vehicle checked to an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the fue filler cap is not tightened until it clicks

If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illuminating could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until its clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warning light turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. If the light does not turn off, take your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

▼ If the light is blinking

If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission-control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you should do the following.

Reduce vehicle speed.
- Avoid hard acceleration.
- Avoid steep uphill grades.
- Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
- Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible.

- CONTINUED -

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and illuminate steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

■ Charge warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine running, it may indicate that the charging system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or do not turn off after the engine starts, stop engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but the light remains illuminate contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

■ Oil pressure warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine running, it may indicate that the engine pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or do not turn off after the engine starts, stop engine at the first safe opportunity and check the engine oil level. If the oil level low, add oil immediately. If the engine does at the proper level but the light remains illuminated, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately. For details about checking the engine level or adding the engine oil, refer to "Engine oil" P438.

Do not operate the engine with oil pressure warning light illuminated. This may cause serious engine damage.

the

■ Engine low oil level warning light

This light illuminates when the engine oil level decreases to the lower limit. If the engine low oil level warning light illuminates while driving, park the vehicle in a safe and level location, and then check the engine oil level. When the engine oil is level is not within the normal range, refill with engine oil. Refer to "Engine oil" P438.

If the warning light does not turn off after the refilling the engine oil, or the warning light illuminates even though the engine oil level is within the normal range, have the vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

• The warning light may stay illuminated when the engine is started straight after topping up or changing the engine oil. In such cases, park the vehicle on a level surface and wait for more than a minute until the oil level settles, after which the warning light will turn off.

• The warning light may illuminate temporarily in the following conditions because a low oil level may be detected as a result of significant oil movement in the engine.

• When the vehicle is considerably inclined on an uphill or steep slope.

• When the vehicle has continuously accelerated and decelerated.
• When the vehicle is continuously turned.
• When the vehicle is driven on a road that alternates continuously between uphill and downhill.

■ Windshield washer fluid warning light

This light illuminates when the fluid level in the windshield washer fluid tank decreases to the lower limit (approximately 0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).

■ AT OIL TEMP warning AT OIL light TEMP

If this light illuminates when the engine running, it may indicate that the transmission fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe play and let the engine idle until the warning light turns off.

▼ Transmission control system warning

If the "AT OIL TEMP" warning light flas after the engine has started, it may indicate that the transmission control system is working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.

■ Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if equipped) R.DIFF TEMP

CAUTION

If the R.DIFF TEMP warning light illuminates, reduce vehicle speed and stop the vehicle in a safe l tion as soon as possible. Contin to drive with this light illuminate may damage the rear differential other parts of the powertrain.

If this light illuminates when the engine running, it may indicate that the rear differential oil temperature is too hot. If the light illuminates while driving, reduce vehicle speed and stop the vehicle in the nearest safe location. Park the vehicle for several minutes. After the light turns off, you can start driving. If the light does not turn off, contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for service.

NOTE

- If the tire pressures are not corred and/or the tires are not all the san-cated brand, the rear differential will be heavily loaded when the vehicle is driven, resulting in an abnormally h oil temperature.

- The rear differential oil will deteriorate if its temperature increases enough for the rear differential oil temperature warning light to illuminate. Advisable to have the rear differential oil replaced as soon as possible.

■ Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)

When the ignition switch is turned to the andON" position, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate for approximately

isseconds to check that the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning properly. If there is no problem and all tires are properly inflated, the light will turn off. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to

- CONTINUED -

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Should the warning light illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, have the system inspected by your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate briefly after the ignition switch is turned ON or the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly and keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

that this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the Low tire pressure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

re If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge. After any change to tire pressure(s), the tire pressure monitoring system will not re-check tire inflation pressures until the vehicle have first driven more than 20 mph (32 km/h). After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS re-checking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few

minutes later. Therefore, be sure install the specified size for the and rear tires.

■ ABS warning light ABS/(ABS)

CAUTION

• If any of the following condition occur, we recommend that you have the ABS repaired at the available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
• The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON position.
• The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, but it does not turn off even after the vehicle is started.
• The warning light illuminates during driving.
• When the warning light is on (at the brake system warning light off), the ABS function shuts down. However, the conventional brake system continues to operate normally.

to The ABS warning light, Vehicle Dynamics light will turn off.

from Control warning light, and brake system warning light illuminate simultaneously if the EBD system malfunctions. For further details of the EBD system malfunction warning, refer to "Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning" P180.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as first described in the following conditions the ABS may be considered normal.
- The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the position and turns off approximately seconds after the engine has started
- The warning light illuminates right after the engine is started but turns immediately, remaining off.
- The warning light remains illuminated after the engine has been stable but it turns off while driving.
- The warning light illuminates during driving, but it turns off immediately remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery voltage, such as when the engine is jum started, the ABS warning light may illumi

nate. This is due to the low battery volta and does not indicate a malfunction. Wh the battery becomes fully charged, the

■ Brake system warn BRAKE / (!) ing light (red)

This light illuminates with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch in the "ON" position. It turns off when parking brake is fully released.

WARNING

• Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system
  "ON" may not be working properly. 2 the light remains illuminated, have the brakes inspected by SUBARU dealer immediately.
  off
• If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

and The brake system warning light has the following functions.

p▼ Brake fluid level warning BRAKE / (!)

aghis light illuminates when the brake fluid level has dropped to near the "MIN" level of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

- CONTINUED -

switch in the "ON" position and with the parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should illuminate while driving (with the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch positioned in "ON"), it could be a indication of leaking of brake fluid or wo brake pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the nearest safe location and check the brake fluid level. the fluid level is below the "MIN" mark the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

▼ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning

If the warning light remains on even tho the parking brake is released, the brake fluid level may be low or there could be problem with the EBD system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact a SUBARU dealer.

▼ Vacuum pressure system warning

The brake system warning light will illuminate when the vacuum pressure sensor is malfunctioning or brake booster pressure is decreasing. If the brake warning light continues to illuminate for several minutes after starting the engine, there may be a malfunction of the vacuum system. In this case, drive t vehicle carefully and have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer.

■ Electronic parking PARK / (P) brake light

r▼ Parking brake indicator

The light illuminates with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released.

▼ Electronic parking brake system warning

WARNING

When you release the electronic parking brake while the engine running, the electronic parking brake indicator light will turn off. However, if the light still illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer.
- If at all in doubt about whether brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
the• If the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in a safe location, use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving and contact your SUBARU dealer. For details, refer to "Electronic parking brake" P343.

NOTE

• When the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position with the electronic parking brake applied, the electronic parking brake indicator light remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and then turns off.
• When the electronic parking brake switch is pulled to apply the electronic parking brake while the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the electronic parking brake indicator light illuminates, remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and then turns off.
  Even if the electronic parking brake indicator light flashes, if the warning light behavior is as described in the following examples, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning.

- The indicator light turns off wh the electronic parking brake is re- leased.

• The electronic parking brake indicator light may flash immediately after engine is started. However, it is not malfunctioning if the indicator light turns off after the electronic parking brake is released.
• The electronic parking brake indicator light may flash after the electron parking brake is frequently applied a released. However, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning if the light turns off for a short per time.

The electronic parking brake indicator light flashes when the electronic parking brake system is malfunctioning. If the indicator light flashes, promptly park in a safe location as soon as possible and contact your SUBARU dealer.

The electronic parking brake indicator light remains illuminated when the parking brake cannot be released even if the parking brake switch is pushed. For details, refer to "Electronic parking brake" P343.

ven ▽ Parking brake apply inhibit warning The electronic parking brake indicator light flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sour will be heard if the parking brake switch operated when the parking brake cannot be applied.

Frequent operation warning The electronic parking brake indicator light kashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sour will be heard if the parking brake switch operated too frequently. In this case, the operation of the parking brake switch is restricted to protect the electronic parking brake system.

NOTE Wait until the indicator light turns

■ Auto Vehicle Hold ON AVH indicator light

CAUTION If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicate light does not illuminate even when the Auto Vehicle Hold switch is pressed to activate the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning.

This indicator light illuminates when the Auto Vehicle Hold is activated. For details, refer to "Auto Vehicle Hold function" P345.

is Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light

This indicator light illuminates while the vehicle is stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function. For details, refer to "Auto Vehicle Hold function" P345.

■ Low fuel warning light 📄 The low fuel warning light illuminates when the tank is nearly empty, at approximately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal). It only operates when the ignition switch is in the off-ON" position.

CAUTION Promptly put fuel in the tank wh ever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could ca damage to the engine.

■ Door open warning light

The warning light illuminates if any door the rear gate is not fully closed. This function is effective even if the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, or the key is removed from the ignition switch.

For some models, only the open doors indicated by the warning lights.

Always make sure this light is not illuminated before you start to drive.

■ All-Wheel Drive warn-AWD ing light

This light blinks if the vehicle is driven tires of differing diameters fitted on the wheels or with an excessively low air pressure in any of the tires.

WARNING

If the AWD warning light flashes, promptly park in a safe location the check whether all four tires are the same diameter and whether any of the tires has a puncture or has lost air pressure for some other reason. Continuing to drive with the AWD warning light flashing can lead to powertrain damage.

NOTE

If the temporary spare tire is used, AWD warning light may flash. Use temporary spare tire should therefore be restricted to the minimum time necessary. Replace the temporary spare tire with a conventional tire as soon as possible.

■ Power steering warning light

While the engine is running, this warning light illuminates when a malfunction has been detected in the electric power steering system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning highlight is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering wheel is operated. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent the system components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from overheating.

as. The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low speeds, such as while frequently turning the steering wheel during parallel parking.

- The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period of ertime.

At this time, there will be more resistance when steering. However this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while the power steering control system h an opportunity to cool down. However if the power steering is operated in non-standard way which causes pow assist limitation to occur too frequent that may result in a malfunction of power steering control system.

and Control system and ABS are inop aserative in this case, the ordinary functions of the brake system are astill available. You will be safe w/ er driving with this condition, but dri tly carefully and have your vehicle the checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.

• The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
• The warning light illuminates while the vehicle is running.

■ Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light

▼ Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system provides its ABS control through the electrical circuit of the ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes unable to provide ABS control. As a result, Vehicle Dynamics Control system also becomes inoperative, causing the warning light to illuminate. Although both the Vehicle Dynamic

NOTE

- If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system itself malfunctions, the warning light only illuminates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-Io Brake System) remains fully operational.

- The warning light illuminates when the electronic control system of the ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunctions.

- The Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light, ABS warning light, and brasystem warning light illuminate simultaneously if the EBD system malfunctions. For further details of the EBD system malfunction warning, refer to "Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning" P180.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably inoperative under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as described in the following examples, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal.

The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the "OI position and turns off approximately 2 seconds after the engine has started.

• The warning light illuminates right after the engine is started but turns of immediately, remaining off.
• The warning light illuminates after the engine has started and turns off while the vehicle is subsequently being driven.

• The warning light illuminates during driving, but it turns off immediately and remains off.

- The warning light illuminates when the engine has stalled and continues to illuminate after the engine has been restarted. However, it will turn off once the vehicle starts moving.

- CONTINUED -

▼ Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light

The indicator light flashes during activation of the skid suppression function and during activation of the traction control function.

NOTE

• The light may remain illuminated for a short period of time after the end has been started, especially in cold weather. This does not indicate the existence of a problem. The light should turn off as soon as the end has warmed up.
• The indicator light illuminates when the engine has developed a problem and the CHECK ENGINE warning light malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under the following condition. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

- The light does not turn off even after the lapse of several minutes (the engine has warmed up) after the engine has started.

■ Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

The light illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.
The light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
- The light does not turn off even once several seconds have elapsed after the ignition switch has been turned to the "position.

■ Warning chimes and warning indicator of keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped)

N" 305677

Access key warning indicator

The keyless access with push-button start system sounds a warning chime and flashes the access key warning indicator on the combination meter in order to minimize improper operations and help protect your vehicle from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or the warning indicator flashes, take the appropriate action.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the ind tor on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in green when starting the engine. This indicates the status that the steering wheel not released and could result in a accident involving serious injury of death.

CAUTION

• When starting the engine again after the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green, if the operation indicator is still flashing in green there could be a steering lock malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
• When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in orange, contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

- Even when the access key fob is within the operating ranges inside the vehicle, the access key warning for engine start may be provided depending on the status of the access key fob and the environmental conditions.

When the access key fob is taken out of the vehicle through an open window, the access key fob takeout warning or passenger access key fob takeout warning will not be provided.

▼ List of warnings

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings occurs even if the access key warning indicator does not appear, take the appropriate action.

Inside warning chime	Outside warning chime	Operation indicator on push-button ignition switch	Status Action
Ding, ding ... (intermittent)	—	—	The driver's door was opened while the push-button ignition switch is "ACC" (when the select lever is in the "P" position).	Switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF", or close the driver's door. *When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF".
			The push-button ignition switch was switched to "OFF" while the driver's door is open.	Close the driver's door.
Ding	Short beep (2 seconds)	—	Lockout warning: An attempt was made to lock all doors using the power door locking switch of access key fob while the access key left inside the vehicle. For details, refer "Key lock-in prevention function" P140.	Take out the access key fob from the vehicle, and lock the doors. *The doors cannot be locked while the access key fob is inside the vehicle. *A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors will be unlocked.
—	Short beep (2 seconds)	—	Access key fob lock-in warning: The door lock sensor was touched while the push-button ignition switch is "OFF" and the access key fob is inside the vehicle.	Take out the access key fob from the vehicle, and lock the doors. *If the access key fob is inside the vehicle, the doors cannot be locked.
—	Beep, beep, beep, beep, beep (5 times)	—	Door ajar warning: The door lock sensor is touched while ignition switch is in the "OFF" position one of the doors including the rear gate opened.	Close the doors securely and lock them. #one of the doors including the rear gate is opened, the doors cannot be locked.
Ding	Long beep (60 seconds max.)	—	Power warning: The door lock sensor was touched while carrying the access key fob, the push-button ignition switch is in a position of than "OFF" (when the select lever is in "P" position).	Return the access key fob inside the vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF". Other the push-button ignition switch is not switched to "OFF", the doors cannot be locked.
Ding, ding ... (7 seconds)	—	—	Access key warning: The vehicle was driven while the access key fob is not inside the vehicle.	Carry the access key fob, and drive the vehicle.
Ding — —			Access key warning for engine start:The push-button ignition switch was pressed while the access key fob is inside the vehicle.	Carry the access key fob, and press the push-button ignition switch.
Ding	Beep, beep, beep (3 times)	—	Access key takeout warning:The driver exited the vehicle with the access key fob and closed the driver's door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than "OFF" (when the select lever is in the "P" position).	Switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF", and get out of the vehicle.
Ding	Beep, beep, beep (3 times)	—	Passenger access key takeout warning:A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with the access key fob and closed a door other than the driver's door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than "OFF".	Return the access key fob to inside the vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF".
Long beep (continuous)	Long beep (continuous)	—	Access key takeout without P position warning:The driver exited the vehicle with the access key fob and closed the driver's door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than "OFF" and select lever is in a position other than "P" position.	Shift the select lever to the "P" position switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF" and exit the vehicle.the
Long beep (continuous)	—	—	Select lever position warning:The engine is turned off by pressing the push-button ignition switch and the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.	Start the engine, shift the select lever to the "P" position, switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF" and exit the vehicle.
Long beep (continuous)	—	—	Select lever position warning:The driver's door was opened while the shift the select lever to the "P" position, push-button ignition switch is in a position other than "OFF" and the select lever is "OFF" and exit the vehicle.
Ding — —	The battery of the	access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.
Ding —		Flashes in green (15 seconds max.)	Steering lock warning:The engine start procedure was performed, but the steering is still locked.	While turning the steering wheel right and left lightly, depress the brake pedal and press the push-button ignition switch.
Ding —		Flashes in orange (15 seconds max.)	System malfunction warning:A malfunction was detected in the power system or steering lock.	Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and have the vehicle inspected.

■ Security indicator light

This indicator light shows the status of alarm system. It also indicates operation the immobilizer system.

▼ Alarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operation status of the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to "Alarm system" P141.

▼ Immobilizer system

The security indicator light starts blinking in the following conditions.

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

- Immediately after the push-button ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position

- Immediately after the driver's door is opened or closed when all of the follow conditions are met.

- The push-button ignition switch is the "ON" or "ACC" position.

- The engine is not running.

In the event that an unauthorized key is used (for example, the key is unregistered or the ID code does not match), the power is not switched to "ON" and the security indicator light continues blinking.

For models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

ne • Immediately after the key is pulled out.

- Approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position.

If the indicator light does not blink in the above conditions, it may indicate that immobilizer system may be malfunctioning. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for example, an unauthorized duplicate) is used to start the engine, the security indicator light illuminates. For details about the immobilizer system, refer to "Immobilizer" P132.

NOTE

The security indicator light remains off in the following conditions. It means that the matching of the ID code is completed and the immobilizer system is deactivated, and it does not indicate a malfunction.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

- While the engine is running. - The push-button ignition switch has been turned to the "ON" or

"ACC" position and the driver's door has not been opened or closed.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

- While the engine is running.

- When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

- For approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position.

- Even if a malfunction occurs, such as the security indicator light flashes irregularly, it will not affect the functionality of the immobilizer system.

■ Select lever/gear position dicator

1 2 2 3 701769

1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Select lever/gear position indicator

This indicator shows the position of the select lever.

For models with manual mode, when the manual mode is selected, the gear posi indicator (which shows the current gear selection) and the upshift/downshift indicator light up. Refer to "Continuously variable transmission" P325.

■ Turn signal indicator ← → lights

These lights show the operation of the signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blirapidly, the turn signal bulb may be but out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to "Replacing bulbs" P463.

■ High beam indicator light

This light shows that the headlights are the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when the headlight flasher is operated.

■ High beam assist indicator light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the high beam assist function is activated. For details about the high beam assist function, refer to "High beam assist function" P227.

■ Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (models with LED headlights)

This light illuminates when the automatic headlight beam leveler does not operate normally.

If this light illuminates during driving, have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer.

■ LED headlight warning light (models with LED headlights)

This light illuminates if the LED headlights malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

■ Steering Responsive SRH Headlight warning light/OFF Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the Steering Responsive Headlight is turned off. Also, the light flashes when a malfunction occurs in the Steering Responsive Headlight. Refer to "Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)" P230.

■ Front fog light indicator light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates while the front fog lights are illuminated.

■ Headlight indicator light ≡DOE

This indicator light illuminates under the following conditions.

- When the light switch is turned to the "ODOE" or "D" position.

- When the light control switch is in the "AUTO" position and the headlights illuminate automatically.

■ X-MODE indicator

This indicator appears while the X-MOD is activated. It will disappear when the MODE is deactivated. Refer to "To activate/deactivate the X-MODE" P340.

■ Hill descent control indicator

This indicator appears while the hill descent control function is in standby. It will flash while the hill descent control function is operating. It will disappear when the descent control function is not available. Refer to "Hill descent control function" P341.

■ BSD/RCTA warning in-☐,☐,☐ dicator (if equipped)

This warning indicator appears when the BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case, the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be shown on the combination meter display. When this indicator appears, have your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU deal as soon as possible.

■ BSD/RCTA OFF indica-□OFF tor (if equipped)

The indicator appears when the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the BSD/RCTA or when the BSD/RCTA suspended temporarily. In this case the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on the combination meter display. For detail refer to "BSD/RCTA" P351.

■ RAB warning indicator (if equipped) RAB

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse Automatic Braking System malfunctions. Refer to "Reverse Automatic Braking System" P360.

■ RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Reverse Automatic Braking System is turned OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic Braking System is suspended temporarily. Refer to "Reverse Automatic Braking System" P360.

■ Icy road surface warning indicator (if equipped)

When the outside temperature is 37^ F to (8^) or less, the icy road surface warming will illuminate to inform the driver that the road surface may be frozen.

sNOTE

• The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature in the area around the sensor. Therefore, the temperature indication may differ from the actual outside air temperature.
• The icy road surface warning screen should be treated only as a guide. Be sure to check the condition of the road surface before driving.
• Once the icy road surface warning screen appears, it will not disappear unless the outside temperature has increased to 41^ (5°C) or higher.

3-7. Combination meter display

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to safe driving when operating the combination meter display while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the combination meter display interferes with your ability concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle before performing operations on the screen. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so may cause you look away from the road and could result in an accident.

Various information will be shown on the combination meter display. Also, a warning message will appear on the display if malfunction. is detected. In addition, several settings for the displayed content can be performed.

to

A MPG 1 2 3 4 B MPG D 842.0 7452 mi D 842.0 7452 mi 5 6 7 5 6 7 a 305607

Combination meter display

1) ECO gauge (refer to "ECO gauge" P171.)
2) Warning screen (refer to "Warning screen" P193.)/Basic screen (refer to "Basic screens" P195.)
3) EyeSight screen 4) Telltale screen (refer to "Telltale screen"

P194.)

5) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer to "Select lever/gear position indicator" P190.)
6) X-MODE indicator (refer to "X-MODE indicator" P191.)
7) Odometer (refer to "Odometer" P169.)/ double trip meter (refer to "Double trip meter" P169.)
A: Deactivating the EyeSight system
B: Activating the EyeSight system

■ Basic operation

1 2 3 304906

Control switch

By operating “▲” or “▼” of the control switch, the screens and selection items can be switched. When the “I/SET”

switch is pulled toward you, the item can be selected and set.

If there are some useful messages, such as vehicle information, warning information, etc., they will interrupt the current screen, and appear on the display accompanied by a beep. If such a screen is displayed, take proper action according to the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the original screen after a few seconds. While the "I" information reminder is shown on the display, it may be possible to display the warning screen again. To recall the message marked with "I" on the display, pull the "I/SET" switch on the steering wheel toward you.

■ Welcome screen (opening animation) and Good-bye screen (ending animation)

When the driver's door is opened and closed after unlocking the door, the welcome screen (opening animation) will appear on the multi information display for approximately 20 seconds.

When the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the multi information display gradually turns off by showing Good-bye screen (ending animation).

NOTE

- The welcome screen and the goodbye screen may differ in the actual words and appearance.

- The basic screen will be shown when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position while the welcome screen is displayed.

- Once the welcome screen appears, it takes a certain period of time to display it again.

- If the ignition switch is operated after unlocking the driver's door, the ywelcome screen will not appear even when the driver's door is opened and closed.

- The welcome screen will disappear when you lock the driver's door by using the remote keyless entry syste (all models) or the keyless access function (if equipped) while the welcome screen is displayed.

- The welcome screen including the multi-function display (color LCD) and the audio/navigation unit can be set to on or off.

- The welcome screen and the goodbye screen can be set to on or off. For details, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

■ Warning screen

SRS Airbag System

305010

andExample of warning

If there is a warning message or a maintenance notification, it will appear on this screen. Take the appropriate actions based on the messages indicated.

■ Telltale screen

MPG 1 D 842.0 7452 mi 305608

1) Telltale screen

When the corresponding situation occurs, the following telltales will be displayed on the telltale screen.

NOTE

When there is warning information to display, it will be displayed in five warning indicators, starting on the left in ascending order of severity. If there are six or more warning information displayed, pull the I/SET" switch and check the item.

Mark Name Page
	Door open indicator 182
	LED headlight warning indicator (if equipped)	190
	High beam assist indicator (if equipped)	190
SRH OFF	Steering Responsive Headlight warning light (if equipped)	190
R.DIFF TEMP	Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if equipped)	177
	Engine low oil level warning indicator	176
RAB	RAB warning indicator (if equipped)	191
RAB OFF	RAB OFF indicator (if equipped)	191
re	BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)	191
	BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped)	191

Mark Name Page
	Automatic headlight beam leveler system malfunction warning (models with LED headlights)	190
	Windshield washer fluid warning indicator	176
	Hill descent control indicator	191
	Icy road surface warning indicator	191

■ Basic screens

By operating the “” or “” switch on the steering wheel, you can change the screen that is always displayed.

Average fuel consumption screen:

AVG A 12.7 MPG 100 mi 305011

Average fuel consumption

Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

Current fuel consumption screen:

25.3 MPG

100mi

Current fuel consumption

Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the rate of fuel consumption at the present moment.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining is only a guide. The indicated value differ from the actual driving range the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low warning light illuminates.

Driving information screen:

99h37

200mi

305910

Journey time

Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (the time that has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to the "ON" position) and journey distance (the distance that has been driven since the ignition switch was turned to the "ON" position).

fuel

Digital speed screen:

SPEED LIMIT 50 1 2 —— 10 MPH 305014

1) Speed limit indicator (if equipped)
2) Vehicle speed

This screen displays the current vehicle speed.

TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):

psi 33 33 22 32 305015

This screen displays each tire pressure. When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire and the tire pressure will be displayed on the screen in yellow.

NOTE

• The tire pressure values are displayed several minutes after driving.
• You can set the tire pressure units.
  For details about setting the units, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

Menu screen entering screen:

Pull and hold "i/SET" Switch For Menu 305016

While this screen is selected, pull and hold the "I/SET" switch to enter the menu or screen.

■ Menu screens

Pull and hold the "I" /SET" switch to enter the menu screens when all of the follow conditions are satisfied.

• The menu screen entering screen is selected.
• The “i” information reminder is off.

NOTE

• While driving, the setting items available on the combination meter display are limited.
• For function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display, refer to "Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display" P26.

By operating the ▲" or ▼" switch on the steering wheel, you can select the menu Pull the "I/SET" switch to enter the selected menu.

NOTE

If you enter the "Go Back" menu, system will return to the previous screen.

▼ Screen Settings

After entering the "Screen Settings" men is select one of the following menus.

▽ Welcome Screen

The welcome screen can be activated deactivated.

Good-bye Screen

The good-bye screen can be activated deactivated.

▽ Gauge Initial Movement

The movement of the meter needles and gauge needles that occurs when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position can be activated or deactivated.

Units

Changes the units displayed in the combination meter display, the type A multi-function display (black and white) and the type B multi-function display (color LCD).

the ▽ Tire Pressure Units (U.S.-spec. models)

Changes the units displayed in the Tire Pressure Monitoring system.

▽ Languages

Changes the language displayed in the combination meter display and the multifunction display (color LCD).

▼ Warning Volume

Sets the EyeSight warning volume, the BSD/RCTA warning volume and the RAB warning volume.

▼ EyeSight

NOTE

For details about how to use the EyeSight system, refer to the Owners' Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

▼ RAB (if equipped)

▽ Sonar Audible Alarm

When the Reverse Automatic Braking system is in operation, the warning sound to notify that an obstacle is detected in the rear can be activated or deactivated.

NOTE

For models with Reverse Automatic Braking system, refer to "Reverse Automatic Braking System" P360.

▼ SRH (if equipped)

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) can be activated or deactivated.

▼ Vehicle Setting

After entering the "Vehicle Setting" menu select one of the following menus.

▼ Keyless Entry System

Sets the settings used when the keyless access function was operated.

- Audible Signal (if equipped) Sets the electronic chirp that sounds when the door is locked or unlocked.

- Hazard Warning Flasher Sets the operation of the hazard warning flasher that blinks when the door is locked or unlocked.

- Driver Door Unlock (if equipped) Select only the driver's door to unlock o doors to unlock simultaneously when the driver's door is unlocked.

- Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock (if equipped) Select only the rear gate to unlock or all doors to unlock simultaneously when accessing from the cargo area.

Defogger

Sets and customizes the operation of the defogger.

Interior Light

Sets and customizes the interior light off delay timer.

Auto Door Lock and Unlock

Setting conditions for Auto Door Lock a Unlock

- Auto Door Lock:

Set the condition of the following items lock the door automatically.

- Vehicle Speed: When the vehicle speed reaches more than 12 mph (km/h).

- Shift Into or Out of PARK: When select lever is shifted into a position other than the "P" position.

ed - Off: When the function is set to

- Auto Door Unlock:

Set the conditions of the following items unlock the door automatically.

- Shift Into or Out of PARK: When select lever is shifted into the "P" position.

- Ignition OFF: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF.

– Driver Door Open: When the driver's door is open.

- Off: When the function is set to

Auto Light Sensor

Sets and customizes the sensitivity of the auto light sensor.

▽ Welcome Lighting

andSets the leaving time and approaching time.

- Approaching time set to Sets the illumination time of the headlights that illuminate when you approach the vehicle.

1. Leaving time set Sets the time until the headlights turn off when you have moved away from the vehicle.

OFF. ▽ One-touch lane changer

Sets the one-touch lane changer on/off. to

Ambient Lighting

theets the ambient light on/off.

▼ Default Settings

Select "Yes" to use the menu screen to restore customized settings to the factory default settings. Select "No" to return to the previous screen without restoring to the factory default settings.

OFF.

3-8. Multi-function display (black and white)

NOTE

For models with multi-function displ (color LCD), refer to "Multi-function display (color LCD)" P203.

1 2 3 4 305415

1) Outside temperature indicator
2) X-MODE indicator
3) Driving information display
4) Clock

With the ignition switch in the "ACC" position, the clock appears on the display.

With the ignition switch in the "ON" position, the outside temperature indicator, driving information display and clock all appear on the display.

NOTE

The indicated values vary in accordance with changes in the vehicle's running conditions. Also, the indicat values may differ slightly from the actual values and should thus be treated only as a guide.

■ Driving information display NOTE

You can set the units for both the function display (black and white) at the combination meter at the same time. For details about setting the refer to "Menu screens" P197.

▼ How to change the information display

INFO 305595

Pressing the INFO button on the instrument panel changes the display to the following sequence.

graph TD
    A["Driving range on remaining fuel"] --> B["Average fuel consumption"]
    B --> C["Current fuel consumption"]
    C --> D["Average vehicle speed"]
    D --> E["Blank"]

▼ Driving range on remaining fuel

1 93 mi 2 150 km 301994

1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH

2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h

The driving range indicates the distance that can be driven taking into account the amount of fuel remaining in the tank and the average rate of fuel consumption.

1 mi 2 km 301995

1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH
2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h. If the driving range is shown as ", the is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

▼ Average fuel consumption

1) Displays the driving range per gallon of fuel
2) Displays the fuel consumption per 100 km

This display shows the average rate of consumption since the trip meter was last set.

Line drawing of a car interior showing a seatbelt and armrest (no text or symbols)

1) TRIP RESET switch

Press the TRIP RESET switch to switch between the displays for the average fuel consumption that corresponds to the A trip meter mileage and the average fuel con-emption that corresponds to the B trip meter mileage.

When the trip meter displays is reset, the corresponding average fuel consumption value is also reset.

NOTE

When the trip meter display is reset, the average fuel consumption corresponding to that trip meter display is not shown until the vehicle has subsequently covered a distance of 1 mile (or 1 km).

▼ Current fuel consumption

1 18.4 MPG 2 12.8 1/100km 305674

1) Displays the driving range per gallon of fuel
2) Displays the fuel consumption per 100 km

This indication shows the rate of fuel consumption at the present moment.

▼ Average vehicle speed

1) When units in miles is selected
2) When units in km is selected

This display shows the average vehicle speed since the trip meter was last res

Diagram of a car interior showing a seatbelt and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

1) TRIP RESET switch

Pressing the TRIP RESET switch toggles the display between the average vehicle speed corresponding to the A trip meter display and the average vehicle speed corresponding to the B trip meter display. When either of the trip meter displays is reset, the corresponding average vehicle speed value is also reset.

NOTE

When either trip meter display is reset, the average vehicle speed corresponding to that trip meter display is not shown until the vehicle has subsequently covered a distance of 1 mile (or 1 km).

▼ Turn off display of driving information display

Select the blank space in the menu to exit the driving information display selection.

NOTE

- The average fuel consumption and average vehicle speed are calculated even while the driving information display is not displayed.

- Even if you turn off the driving information display, the display will automatically turn on when the batte voltage is disconnected and then re-connected for battery replacement or fuse replacement.

■ Outside temperature indicator

1 70°F 2 21°C 301992

1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models

NOTE

- The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature around the sensor. Therefore, the temperature indication may differ from the actual outside air temperature.

• The temperature unit cannot be changed.
  ▼ Road surface freeze warning indication

1 37°F 2 3°F 301993

1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models

When the outside temperature drops to a certain temperature or lower, the temperature indication flashes for 5 seconds to show that the road surface may be frozen. If the display is already indicating that the outside temperature is low when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the indication does not flash.

-NOTE

The outside temperature indication may differ from the actual outside

temperature. The road surface freeze warning indication should be treated only as a guide. Be sure to check the condition of the road surface before driving.

■ X-MODE indicator

This indicator will be shown while the X-MODE is activated. It will turn off when the X-MODE is deactivated.

Clock

For details about clock setting, refer to "Clock" P220.

3-9. Multi-function display (color LCD)

NOTE

For models with multi-function display (black and white), refer to "Multi-function display (black and white)" P19

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to safe driving when operating the multi-function display (color LCD) while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the multi-function display (color LCD) is disturbing you awareness and ability to concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle a safe place before performing operations on the screen. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so may cause you look away from the road and could result in an accident.

Features

The multi-function display (color LCD) the following functions.

Description Page
Displays useful messages, such as notification, etc.	204
Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel consumption screen, etc.)	205
Sets and adjusts maintenance notification	218

Also, the multi-function display (color L can also be used to set and initialize multi-function display (color LCD) itself.

NOTE

- When the vehicle is in motion, certain functions and selections may not be available. - You can set the language and unit for both the multi-function display (color LCD) and the combination me at the same time. For details about setting the language and units, refer "Menu screens" P197.

- The images displayed in this Owner's Manual are sample images. The actual image may vary depending on the market and vehicle specifications

■ Welcome screen

sWhen the driver's door is opened and closed, the welcome screen will appear for a short time.

NOTE

• The welcome screen will disappear when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position while the welcome screen is displayed.
• The welcome screen can be set to or off. For details, refer to "Screen Settings" P197.

- For a certain period of time after the welcome screen has once appeared, it may not appear again even when the driver's door is opened and closed again. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Self-check screen NOTE

When the setting is "On", the self checked screen appears. For details about this setting, refer to "On/Off setting" P218.

When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the vehicle self-check will be performed. The screens corresponding to the following items will appear one after another for several seconds each.

- CONTINUED -

1 2 3 4 304971

1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine oil replacement.
2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter replacement.
3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation
4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the interval of inspection and maintenance.

When the checks are performed, the color of the icon corresponding to the checked item will change.

If there is a notification, the message will be displayed. Take the appropriate actions based on the message indicated.

After the self-check is completed, today's date, the stored birthday or the stored anniversary is displayed.

NOTE

- After performing the maintenance, change the setting of the correspond-

ing maintenance item. For details, re to "Maintenance settings" P218.

- The maintenance notification screen will be displayed under either of the following conditions.

- The period of time remaining until the registered notification date is 1 days or less.

- The total driving distance remaining until the registered notification distance is approximately 311 miles (500 km) or less.

- The maintenance notification screen will be displayed until either of the following conditions is satisfied.

- The period of time passed after the registered notification date is days or more.

- The total distance driven after registered notification distance is approximately 311 miles (500 km) more.

■ Interruption screen

Time to change engine oil 305107

Example

Useful messages, such as reminder information, weather information (if equipped) and traffic information (if equipped) may interrupt the current screen and appear on the display accompanied by a beep. Take proper action according to the message.

The interruption screen will return to the original screen after a few seconds. Also, you can press the "ENTER" or "VIEW" button to skip the interruption screen.

Basic operation

VIEW/J 1 2 3 305596

Front view monitor models
1) ▼
2) "VIEW/
3)
"button

ENTER 1 2 3 305662

Other models
1)

2) "ENTER" button
3)

Press the "ENTER" or "VIEW/J" button on the instrument panel to switch the item displayed on the basic screen. You can operate the items on the setting screen by using the "▲", "▼ and "ENTER" or "VIEW/J" buttons.

Basic screens

1:36 64°F VIEW Press and hold for Info 3 305600

1) Clock
2) Outside temperature
3) Information screen

While the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position, the basic screen will be

- CONTINUED -

displayed.

▼ Outside temperature indicator

The outside temperature is displayed on the multi-function display (color LCD).

NOTE

• The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature around the sensor. Therefore, the temperature indication may differ from the actual outside air temperature.
• The temperature unit cannot be changed.

▼ Clock

The clock can be displayed in either 12-hour display or 24-hour display. For details about the setting, refer to "Clock" P220.

▼ Information screen
Press the "ENTER" or "VIEW" button on the instrument panel to switch the item displayed on the information screen.

Content Description Page
Electric components operating status screen	Displays the operating status of the electric components and equipment. 208
Prevention safety screen Displays the status of your vehicle. 208
EyeSight screen Displays the operating status of EyeSight. 209
Favorite screen Displays up to 3 optional items. 209
Weather information screen*	Displays weather information. 210
Traffic information*/Navigation*2 screen	Displays information linked with the navigation system.	210
Audio screen	Displays audio system information. 211
Fuel consumption screen	Displays fuel consumption information.	211
Clock/date screen	Displays the clock.	211
Guidance screen	Moves to the setting screen.	212

*1: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
*2: Models with navigation system

▽ Electric components operation screen (if equipped)

1 2 3 1:36 64°F VIEWJ Press and hold for info 8 7 6 305609

1) High beam assist*
2) EyeSight
3) Smart rear view mirror*
4) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)*
5) BSD/RCTA*
6) Auto wiper*
7) Front view monitor*
8) Auto on/off headlights
*: If equipped

This screen displays the electric components operation status of the vehicle. The electric components information can be shown on the screen.

1. Press the "▲" or ▼" button to select the preferred item.
2. Press and hold the "ENTER" or "VIEW/" button to enter the selected item.

NOTE

• Indicators do not display for functions that are not equipped to the vehicle.
• The indicators of functions that are not operating are displayed in grey.
• If the multi-function display (color LCD) unit, battery, or fuse is removed, the Auto on/off headlights indicator turns off on the multi-function display (color LCD). After reinstalling the removed multi-function display (color LCD) unit, battery, or fuse to the vehicle, the Auto on/off headlights indicator will appear once more if the light control switch is turned to the "AUTO" position.

∇ Prevention safety screen

1 2 10/03/ OUT TEMP 72°F 6° 4 3 305601

1) Telltale screen
2) Steering angle
3) Vehicle posture
4) Running condition

This screen displays the driving status of the vehicle and the operation status functions. For functions that are operating, the indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE

- The vehicle posture indication may differ from the actual vehicle posture. - When X-MODE has turned on, the screen of the multi-function display is switched to the prevention safety screen.

▽ EyeSight screen

1 10:03 2 OUT TEMP 72°F 5 4 3 305602 EyeSight

1) Lead vehicle indicator
2) Your own vehicle indicator
3) Stop lights
4) Road line indicator
5) Lane indicator

This screen displays the status of the EyeSight system. The lead vehicle indicator moves forward and backward depending on the distance with the vehicle in front. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

∇ Favorite screen

10:03 154 F Oil Temp 54 MPH AVG Speed Accel 39 % OUT TEMP 86° F 305603

Favorite screen (display example)

This screen displays up to three optional pieces of information that can be selected from the following items.

*1: If equipped
*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Item Details
	The engine oil temperature is displayed.
	The average vehicle speed is displayed.
	The accelerator opening ratio is displayed.
	The vehicle posture is displayed.
	The current rate of fuel consumption is displayed.
	The direction of the vehicle is displayed.*1
	The weather information is displayed.*2
	The posted speed limit of the ro you are currently driving on is displayed.*1
	The calendar is displayed.
	Nothing is displayed.

NOTE

Some displayed items may not be displayed depending on the model and specifications.

The items shown in the favorite screen be changed. For details, refer to "Favor setting" P216.

▽ Weather information screen (if equipped)

10:03 72°F xxxxx New 2 xxxxx 305604

1) Weather information for the destination.* can2) Weather information for the current location.
*: Only when a destination is set in the navigation system

The weather information is displayed on the screen.

NOTE

- When all of the following condition are satisfied, weather information is displayed.

• The vehicle is equipped with audio and navigation system for SiriusXM satellite radio.

• You have a current SiriusXM satellite radio subscription.

• The weather forecast for the set destination remains displayed until a new destination is set or until you reach the destination.

• Depending on the reception timing of XM, the display of weather information may be delayed.

∇ Navigation screen (models with navigation system)

10:03 OUT TEMP 72°F 1.2 mi xxxxxxxxxxx Ave. 305610

The navigation system information to the destination is displayed on the screen.

NOTE

When a destination is not set in the navigation system, the compass orientation, name, route sign and speed limit of the road the vehicle is traveling on remain displayed on the screen.

▽ Audio screen

22:03/ FM XXXXXX ΔΔΔΔ 000 Radio OUT TEMP 72°F 123456 305611

The screen of the currently selected audio source is displayed.

For details about how to use the audio refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

∇ Fuel consumption screen

10:03 OUT TEMP 72°F 260 miles AVG 49.2 MPG 0 20 40 60 MPG 3 306080

bio 1) Driving range on remaining fuel 2) Average fuel consumption corresponding to the driving distance of each trip me set 3) Current fuel consumption

The fuel consumption information is displayed on the screen.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

▽ Clock/date screen

10:03 OUT TEMP 72°F 8/25 Thursday 305613

The time and date are displayed. You can adjust the time and date. For details, refer to "Clock" P220.

Guidance screen

10:03 86°F Press and hold [VIEW/J] button to access settings screen 305789

Models with front view monitor

10:03 86°F Press and hold [ENTER] button to access settings screen 305788

Other models

When the "ENTER" or "VIEW/J" button on the instrument panel is pressed and held on this screen, the setting screen

be displayed.

For details, refer to "Setting screen" P212.

■ Setting screen

1. Press and hold the "ENTER" or "VIEW/J" button on the guidance screen. The top menu is displayed.
2. Operate the "▲" or "▼" button to select the preferred menu from the top menu.
3. Press the "ENTER" or "VIEW/ button to enter the selected menu.
4. Operate the "▲" or "▼" button to select the preferred menu from the 2nd menu.
5. Press the "ENTER" or "VIEW/ button to enter the selected menu.

can

The menu list is as follows.

Top menu	2nd menu Description Page
Time/Date	Time/Date* Set and adjust the	time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 215
	Birthday Set a birthday. 215
	Anniversary Set an anniversary	day. 215
	Go Back Return to the 1st menu.	—
Display/Beep	Screen Off*	Turn the screen on or off.	Yes or No	215
	Favorite	Set and customize the triple meter.		216
	Bypass Screen	Set the bypass screen for each item.	On or Off	216
	Beep	Adjust the beep sound volume.	High, Low or Off	216
	Go Back Return to the 1st menu.	—
Camera set-tings (if equipped)	Brightness	Set and adjust the brightness of a display.		217
	Contrast	Set and adjust the contrast of a display.		217
	Camera Shift Link	Set the camera shift link.	On or Off	217
	Go Back Return to the 1st menu.	—
Maintenance	Engine Oil	Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date.		218
	Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil	filter maintenance notification date.	218
	Tires	Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date.		218
	Maintenance Schedule	Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date.		218
	ON/OFF	Turn on or off the self-check screen that is activated when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.	On or Off	218
	Clear All Settings	Clear all settings for maintenance items.	Yes or No	219
	Go Back Return to the 1st menu.	—
Initialize	—	Reset all settings to the default settings.	Yes or No	219

Top menu	2nd menu Description Page
Go Back	— Return to the	setting screen.	—

*: You can also set this while driving.

▼ Date and time settings

You can set the date, time and 12h or format settings.

▽ Current date and time setting For details about clock setting, refer to "Clock" P220.

▽ Birthday setting

If a birthday or anniversary is approach a message will be displayed when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. This function can be set to on off. For details, refer to "Bypass screen setting" P216.

1. Select "Birthday" from the 2nd menu the setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

10:03 Birthday Select ▶ 1 01/21 xxxxxx 2 --/-- 3 --/-- ENTER Select Go Back 305615

1. Select from the list the number that

want to register.

24h

10:03 OUT 72°F Select Birthday 1 ▶01 / 21 xxxxxx Enter Select Set Go Back 305616

1. Enter the date and the text by using incontrol switches.
2. Select "Set" to exit settings. Select Back" to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

You can store a maximum of 5 birth-days.

▽ Anniversary setting

1. The procedure for setting an anniversary is the same as "Birthday setting" P215, except that in step 1 "Anniversa is selected.

NOTE

You can store a maximum of 5 anniversaries.

▼ Display/Beep settings

You can set the display settings and volume settings.

▽ Screen OFF setting

1. Select "Screen Off" from the 2nd menu in setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

the 10:03 Screen Off OUT OFF 72°F Select Turn off screen? ENTER ▲ Yes No Select 305617

1. Select "Yes" to turn off the screen. Select "No" to return to the previous screen.

Restoring the screen

When the "ENTER" or "VIEW" button is operated after the ignition switch is turned

- CONTINUED -

to the "ON" or "ACC" position, the screen will be restored. The screen will be restored with the basic screen that was displayed when the screen was turned

∇ Favorite setting

1. Select the "Favorite" from the 2nd menu in setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

10:03 OUT TEMP 86°F Select VIEW/4 Favorite Accel Inst Cons AVGSpeed Select Set Go Back 305790

1. Set the desired items by using the control switches. For details about items refer to "Favorite screen" P209.
2. Select "Set" to exit settings. Select "Back" to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

- You can display a maximum of the 3 items.

- The same item cannot be selected for the left, center or right location. - Weather information for 3 hours later or 6 hours later can be displayed

∇ Bypass screen setting

1. Select "Bypass Screen" from the 2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

10:03 Select ENTER Dipass Screen Birthday Reminder On Anniversary Reminder On Traffic Info On Select Set Go Back OUT TEMP 72°F 305619

1. Select "On" or "Off" to turn the displ of items on or off by using the control switches.
2. Select "Set" to exit settings. Select Back" to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

Traffic information setting is only displayed for the audio unit with SiriusXM satellite radio.

Beep setting

1. Select "Beep" from the 2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

10:03 OUT TEMP 86°F Beep Select VIEW/√ ▲ ▶ High Select Set Go Back 305791

1. Set the beep volume by using the y control switches.
2. Select "Set" to exit settings. Select "Go Back" to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

▼ Camera settings (if equipped)

You can set the front camera display settings.

∇ Brightness setting

1. Select "Brightness" from the 2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

Brightness Auto Auto Check surroundings directly 305792

1. Select the brightness level by using control switches.
2. Press the "VIEW/J" button to confirm the setting.

∇ Contrast setting

1. Select "Contrast" from the 2nd menu the setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

Contrast Check surroundings directly 305793

1. Select the contrast level by using the control switches.
2. Press the "VIEW/J" button to confirm the setting.

▽ Camera shift link setting

in1. Select "Camera Shift Link" from the 2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

10:03 OUT TEMP 86°F Camera Shift Link Select VIEWJ On Select Set Go Back 305810

1. Select "On" or "Off" by using the control switches.
2. Select "Set" to exit settings. Select "Go Back" to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

▼ Maintenance settings

You can set maintenance reminders.

▽ Engine oil setting

1. Select "Engine Oil" from the 2nd men in the setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

10:03 Select ENTER Engine Oil Notification Date Notification Distance Remaining 6000miles Set Update Go Back 305621

1. Set the date and distance of the reminder by using the control switches.
2. Select "Set" to exit settings. Select "Update" to change the notification distance to the default value. Select "Go Back" to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

- The reminder will be displayed by either date or distance in accordance with the setting.

Even when either day or distance displayed as “_ _”, a pop-up screen appear.

- The reminder will be displayed until either of the following conditions is satisfied.

- The period of time passed after the registered notification date is days or more.

- The total distance driven after registered notification distance is approximately 311 miles (500 km) more.

Oil filter setting

The setting procedure is the same as "Engine oil setting" P218, but select the "Oil Filter" item in step 1.

∇ Tires setting

The setting procedure is the same as "Engine oil setting" P218, but select the "Tires" item in step 1.

▽ Maintenance schedule setting

The setting procedure is the same as "Engine oil setting" P218, but select the "Maintenance Schedule" item in step 1.

On/Off setting

1. Select "On/Off" from the 2nd menu on the setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

10:03 ON/OFF Select ▼ ENTER ▶ Off Select Set Go Back 72°F

or

1. Select "On" or "Off" to turn the opening screen on or off by using the control switches.
2. Select "Set" to exit settings. Select "Go Back" to return to the previous screen without applying the setting changes.

∇ Clear setting

1. Select "Clear All Settings" from the menu on the setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

10:03 Select ▼ ENTER ▲ Select Clear All Settings Delete all settings? Yes ▶No OUT TEMP 72°F 305623

1. Select "Yes" or "No" by using the control switches.

▼ Initialize

2nd You can initialize the items that have b set to your preference.

1. Select "Initialize" from the 2nd menu the setting screen. Refer to "Setting screen" P212.

10:03 OUT TEMP 72°F Initialize Select Return to factory settings? ▼ ENTER Yes ▶No Select 305624

1. Select "Yes" or "No" by using the control switches.

■ How to get the source code en using the open source

Free/Open Source Software Information on This product contains Free/Open Source Software (FOSS).

The license information and/or the source code of such FOSS can be found at the following URL.

http://www.globaldenso.com/en/open-source/ivi/subaru/

3-10. Clock

For models with a SUBARU genuine navigation and/or audio system, the clock can be adjusted using either auto mode manual mode.

- Auto mode: automatic clock adjustment

- Manual mode: manual clock adjustment

■ Setting the clock manually

▼ Type A multi-function display (black and white)

1. Turn the ignition switch to "ON".

Diagram of car air intake system with labeled component and directional arrow indicator

1. Press the button.

2. Select "Settings".

3. Select "Vehicle".

4. Select "Clock adjustment" and then select "Manual".

or k 304891

1. Press the "+" button or the "-" button beside the clock.

Setting 12-hour or 24-hour display

The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour display. Perform the following procedure to switch the display format.

1. Turn the ignition switch in the "LOCK" OFF position.
2. Press and hold the “-” button located near the clock display for approximately seconds. The clock display will then start to flash.
3. While the clock display is flashing,

press and hold the "+" button for approximately 2 seconds. The clock format will then change.

1. The clock display will continue to flash for approximately 3 seconds to indicate that the clock display has been changed.

▼ Type B multi-function display (color LCD)

1. Turn the ignition switch to "ON".

our 305663

1. Press the button.
2. Select "Settings".
3. Select "Vehicle".
4. Select "Clock adjustment" and then select "Manual".

VIEW/J 1 2 3 305596

Models with front view monitor

ENTER 1 2 3 305662

Other models

1. Press the "▲" or ▼ button to select the item.

10:03 OUT View 72°F Setting Time / Date Display/Beep Maintenance Initialize Select VIEW/J Select 305716

1. Select "Time/Date" and press the "ENTER" or "VIEW/J" button.

10:03 Select VIEW/0 Select Time / Date Time / Date Birthday Anniversary Go Back OUT Temp 72°F 305717

1. Select "Time/Date" and press the "ENTER" or "VIEW/J" button.

NOTE

If "Clock adjustment" is not in many mode, "Time/Date" cannot be selected. Be sure to perform steps 2 through

10:03 Time / Date Select ▶08 / 25 20XX VIEW/□ 24H 10 : 03 Select Set Go Back 306079

1. Press the ▲" or ▼" button to scroll through to the items you can set.

(1) Press the "ENTER" or "VIEW/J" button to choose the item you would like to change.
(2) Press the “▲” or “▼” button to adjust the items.
(3) After adjusting the item, press the "ENTER" or "VIEW/J" button. The item will be set and time adjustment complete.

1. Select "Set" and press the "ENTER" "VIEW/J" button to complete the clock setting.

Select "Go Back" to return to the previous screen without saving settings.

NOTE

The Birthday/Anniversary and maintenance reminder system function are based on the time and date on the multifunction display (color LCD).

■ Setting the clock automatically

1. Turn the ignition switch to "ON".

305663

2 Will Press the 🔒 button.

1. Select "Settings".
2. Select "Vehicle".
3. Select "Clock adjustment" and then select "Auto".

▼ Models with navigation system

The clock will be set automatically where a GPS signal is available.

▼ Other models

The clock will be set and adjusted automatically when a smartphone is connected via Bluetooth® for transferring phonebook data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio system. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SETTINGS" in the supplemental Owner's Manual for the audio/navigation system.
2. Transfer phonebook data to the system. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SETTINGS" in the supplemental Owner's Manual for the audio/navigation system. The clock will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smartphone, the settings of the connected smartphone may need to be changed. (ex: For iOS or other models, notification settings may need to be activated.) For details, check the instructions on connecting smartphones.

■ Regulatory information

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

3-11. Light control switch

■ Precautions and tips

CAUTION

• Use of any lights for a long of time while the engine is not running can cause the battery discharge.
• Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the lights are turned. If the vehicle is left unattended for a long time with the lights illuminated, the battery may be discharged.

period

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

The light control switch operates when the push-button ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

Regardless of the position of the light control switch, the illuminated lights are turned off when the push-button ignition switch is turned off.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

The light control switch operates when the key is inserted in the ignition switch.

Regardless of the position of the light

- CONTINUED -

control switch, the illuminated lights are turned off when the key is removed from the ignition switch.

NOTE

The light control switch can be operated (except auto on/off headlights), even under the following conditions.

• When the push-button ignition switch is turned off (models with "key-less access with push-button start system").
• When the key is not inserted into ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

If the driver's door is opened while headlights are illuminated under such conditions, a chirp sound will inform the driver that the lights are illumina

Headlights

eye- the 301716

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob the end of the turn signal lever.

the position:

Instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, n side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are on.

"ODO" position:

Instrument panel illumination, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are on.

"AUTO" position:

• Auto on/off headlights

When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are automatically on or off depending on the level of the ambient light.

NOTE

The sensitivity of the auto on/off headlights can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for models with a combination meter display, the setting can be changed using the display. For details, refer to "Menu screens" -P197.

Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights While the light control switch is in the "AUTO" position, the headlights will automatically turn on when the windshield wipers operate several times. The headlights will automatically turn off when the wipers stop.

NOTE

The ON/OFF setting of this function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

"O" position:

The headlights are all off.

▼ Welcome lighting function

The welcome lighting function turns on a low beam headlight for smooth approaching to or exiting from the vehicle at night in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the following conditions are met.

• The light control switch is in the "AUT position.
• It is dark enough to turn on the auto off headlights.

When approaching:

While the welcome lighting function is activated, the low beam headlights will automatically illuminate when unlocking doors including the rear gate by using remote keyless entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain illuminated for 30 seconds and then turn off. However, if any of the following operations is done, the low beam headlights will turn off.

• The doors are locked.
• The light control switch is turned to a position other than "AUTO".
• The ignition switch is turned to the "O position.

When exiting:

While the welcome lighting function is activated, the low beam headlights will remain illuminated even when either of following operation is done.

• The push-button ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" status (models with "keyless access with push-button start QSystem")
• The key is pulled out from the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system")

The low beam headlights will turn off under any of the following conditions.
- 3 minutes have passed since the low beam headlights were illuminated by the welcome lighting function.

- 30 seconds have passed since the door is opened and closed.

• The light control switch is turned to a position other than "AUTO".
• The locking procedure is performed twice. When performing the unlocking procedure after performing the locking procedure, perform the locking procedure twice again.

N1: The setting for the period of time in which the low beam headlights remain on by the welcome lighting function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for details.

Also, for models with a combination meter display, the setting can be changed using the display. For details, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

▼ Sensor for the auto on/off headlights

der 304997

Models without automatic rain sensing windshield wipers

Diagram of a car's frontview showing a mounted device and a numbered component (no text or symbols present)

Models with automatic rain sensing wind-shield wipers
1) Rain/light sensor

The sensor is as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near sensor, the sensor may not detect the level of the ambient light correctly and the auto on/off headlights may not operate properly.

■ High/low beam change (dimmer)

1 2 304881

1) High beam

When the headlights are on high beam, high beam indicator light "≡" on the combination meter is also on.

■ Headlight flasher

Line drawing of a car's side profile with no text or symbols

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a few seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold the lever.

When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light “☐” on the combination meter also illuminates.

■ High beam assist function equipped)

NOTE

- The high beam assist function utilizes the stereo camera installed at position of the front map lights.

- For details on how to handle the stereo camera, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

The high beam assist function automatically changes the headlight from high beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are met, the headlight will change to high beam.

• When the vehicle speed increases to above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• There is no preceding or oncoming vehicle.
  ● The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
• The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions are met, the headlight will change to low beam.

- When the vehicle speed decreases to or below 10 mph (16 km/h).

- When the forward area of the vehicle is bright.

(If When there is a preceding or oncoming vehicle.

- When the EyeSight system is malfunctioning or temporarily stopped.

tNOTE

The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as "operational". This setting can be changed to OFF (non-operation) at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.

▼ How to use the high beam assist function

The high beam assist function will be activated when all the following condition are met.

• The light control switch is in the "AUTO position and the low beam headlights are on automatically.
- The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

r ≡A 304963

High beam assist indicator

When the high beam assist function is activated, the high beam assist indicator is slight on the combination meter will illuminate.

NOTE

If the high beam assist function is malfunctioning or temporarily stopped, the headlight will be fixed at low beam

▼ How to temporarily lower the sensitivity of the high beam assist function

The sensitivity of the high beam assist function can be lowered by performing the following operations.

1. Before turning the ignition switch to the "ON" position, set the light control switch to

the "AUTO" position and push the signal lever forward (high beam position).

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and within approximately 15 seconds, press the ▶/▽ (following distance setting) switch more than 10 times consecutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam assist function is lowered, the high beam assist indicator light A" on the combination meter will flash.

NOTE

- The sensitivity of the high beam assist function cannot be lowered in the following conditions.

- Cruise control or Adaptive Cru Control is in operation

- The EyeSight warning indicator (yellow) is illuminated

- The sensitivity of the high beam assist function returns to normal level the next time the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and the engine is restarted.

▼ How to change the headlight mod manually

Change to the low beam:

When you return the turn signal lever to center position, the high beam assist function will turn off and the high beam assist indicator light will turn off.

Change to the high beam:

When you turn the light control switch to the "D" position, the headlight mode will be changed to the high beam.

At this time, the high beam assist function will turn off, the high beam assist indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator light will turn on.

NOTE

- After manually changing the head-light mode to the high beam, if you on the high beam assist function, return the light control switch to the "AUTO" position.

When manually changing the head-light mode to the high beam, if you the light control switch to the "EDGE" position, the instrument panel illumination, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail light and license plate lights will be on.

▼ Tips for the high beam assist sys-tem

- The high beam assist function recognizes the conditions surrounding the vehicle based on the brightness of illumination ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the headlight mode may switch in some situations that do not match to the driver's sense.

- A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be detected.

- Under the following situations, the brightness of ambient illumination may not be detected correctly and the high beam assist function may not work properly. As a result, the glare of the high beam may disturb the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode may continue although there are no oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead. In the such cases, change the headlight mode manually.

• In bad weather (fog, snow, sand storm, heavy rain, etc.).
• When the windshield glass is dirty or fogged.

- When the windshield is cracked or damaged.

- When the stereo camera is de- hts formed or the stereo camera lenses are dirty.

• If there are lights similar to the headlights or the tail lights in the surrounding area.
• When an oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead is driven without its headlights and tail lights on.
• If the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the light beams are not aimed correctly.

- When a rapid change of brightness continues while driving.

- When driving on a road with many ups and downs or uneven surfaces.

- When driving on a road with many curves.

- When there are some objects that reflect light strongly, such as a road sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.

- When the rear part of the vehicle ahead, such as a container, reflects light strongly.

- When the headlights of your vehicle are damaged or dirty.

- When your vehicle is tilted, such as in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is being towed.

- Immediately after the engine has started.

- In the following conditions, the head-light mode will not be automatically changed from the high beam to the low beam.

- When your vehicle passes an on- coming vehicle suddenly in a blind curve.

- When another vehicle passes in front of your vehicle.

- When an oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead comes in and out of view because of continuous curves, median

e strips, roadside trees, etc.

- If the stereo camera detects the light of the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle, the headlight mode may change from the high beam to the low beam automatically

- The headlight mode may change from the high beam to the low beam, or the low beam mode may continue, when affected by a street light, traffic signal, illumination of an advertisement board, or a reflective object such as a road sign and signboard

- The timing of the change of headlight mode may differ due to the following factors.

- Color or brightness of the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail light of a vehicle ahead.

- The headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of the vehic ahead are covered with mud, snow, etc.

- Movement and direction of an on- coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.

- When the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a veh ahead illuminate on only one side.

- When the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.

- Conditions of a road (slope, curve road surface, etc.).

– Number of passengers and weight of loaded cargo.

- Limitation of the detection ability of the stereo camera.

Daytime running light system

WARNING

When the daytime running lights are illuminated, the tail lights do not illuminate. When it becomes dark outside, turn the light switch to the d."D" position to illuminate the headlights and tail lights. This will improve visibility and allow other drivers to see your vehicle more easily.

The daytime running lights will automatically illuminate when the following conditions are fulfilled.

• The engine is running.
• The parking brake is fully released.
- The light control switch is in the "AUTO" (if equipped), “do” or off position.
- The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

NOTE

When the light switch is in the position, the instrument panel illumination, front side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are also illuminated.

3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) (if equipped)

1 2 304837

1) The target area of illumination when SRH is activated
2) The target area of illumination when SR is not activated

SRH is a function that automatically moves the headlight beam to the left or right in accordance with the steering angle and vehicle speed. This function helps to improve the visibility at night by illuminating the road ahead at corners and intersections.

1 SRH OFF 305294

1) SRH OFF indicator

The SRH OFF indicator on the combination meter turns off when SRH is turned on. The SRH OFF indicator on the combination meter illuminates when SRH is turned off.

NOTE

The setting can be changed by operating the combination meter display. For details, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF indicator on the combination meter flashes when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. It indicates that SRH has been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

• When you turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position, the SRH OFF indicator will illuminate and turn off after several seconds.
• SRH only activates when the vehicle is traveling forward at the speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.

3-13. Headlight beam leveler 3-14. Fog light switch (if (models with LED headlights equipped)

The LED headlights produce more light than conventional halogen headlights.

When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and the headlight beams are angled upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle may experience glare.

To prevent this, the automatic headlight beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the optimum height automatically depending on the load the vehicle is carrying.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the headlights may become misaligned, and the headlight beam leveler will not reset them to the proper angle. That may occur after transporting your vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if t vehicle is parked and restarted on different angles. In such cases, has the headlight alignment checked by a SUBARU dealer.

1 2 301721

1) Headlight switch
2) Fog light switch

The front fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch is placed in the position while the headlights are in the following condition.

• While the headlight switch is in the position.
• While the headlight switch is in the "AUTO" position and the low beam headlights turn on automatically.

To turn off the front fog lights, turn the switch back down to the position.

10 304967

The indicator light on the combination meter will illuminate when the front fog lights are illuminated.

3-15. Turn signal lever

1 2 3 4 304856

1) Right turn
2) Lane change right signal
3) Lane change left signal
4) Left turn

If the lever does not return after cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and hold it during the lane change. The lever will return automatically to the neutral position when you release it.

■ One-touch lane changer

To flash the turn signal and turn signal indicator light three times, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and immediately release it.

NOTE

The operational/non-operational setting of the one-touch lane changer can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. For models with the combina-

tion meter display, the setting can also be changed by operating the combination meter display. For details, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

3-16. Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the wind-shield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster.

er. Otherwise the washer fluid can fofreeze on the windshield, blocking a- your view.

to

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 10 seconds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level frequently, such as at fuel stops.

• Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the blade rubbers and might cause the wiper motor to fail. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window, always use the windshield washer.

• In freezing weather, be sure that the blade rubbers are not frozen to the windshield or rear window before switching on the wipers. Attempting to operate the wiper with the blades frozen to the window glass could cause not only the blade rubbers to be damaged but also might cause the wiper motor to fail. If the bl rubbers are frozen to the window glass, be sure to operate the defroster, windshield wiper dei-cer (if equipped) or rear window defogger before turning on the wiper.

• If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some of obstruction on the window, this might cause the wiper motor to fail even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and clean the window gla to allow proper wiper operation.
• Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to "Windshield washer fluid" P455.

- Do not clean the blade rubbers with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzine. This will cause deterioration of the blade rubbers.

For models with automatic rain sen sing windshield wipers:

- When the wiper switch is in the "AUTO" position, do not touch the windshield near the rain/light sensor and do not place a wet cloth on the windshield near the rain/light sensor. Doing so may result in unexpected wiper operation and cause injury.

• When washing the vehicle, make sure that the wiper is turned of Otherwise, the wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause injury.
• When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car was make sure that the wiper is turned off. Otherwise, the wipers may be damaged because they may operate unexpectedly and car wash brushes could become tangled around them.

NOTE

- The windshield wiper motor is protected against overloads by a circuit breaker. If the motor operates continuously under an unusually heavy load, the circuit breaker may trip to stop the motor temporarily. If this happens, park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off a wiper switch, and wait for approximately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker will reset itself, and the wipers will again operate normally.

- Clean your blade rubbers and wind-dow glass periodically with a washer solution to prevent streaking, and to remove accumulations of road salt or road film. Operate the windshield washer for at least 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window.

- Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the blade rubbers results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove those streaks after operating the washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window and the blade rubbers using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent of mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the window glass and blade

rubbers with clean water. The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with water.

- If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this procedure, replace the blade rubbers with new ones. For replacement instructions, refer to "Replacement of wiper blades" P456.

NOTE

For models with automatic rain sensing windshield wipers:

- When the wiper switch is turned to the "AUTO" position while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the wipers will operate once. This indicates that the wiper switch is in the "AUTO" position.

- When the wiper switch is in the "AUTO" position, the following situations may occur.

- The wipers may operate if the rain/light sensor or the windshield is vibrated or objects such as insects, dirt, mud, etc. are covering them. Turn off the wiper unless it is raining or snowing. - The wipers do not operate if the rain/light sensor does not detect rain or snow. If necessary, push the wiper control lever down to the

low speed position or high speed position.

- The wipers may not operate properly if the rain/light sensor does not detect the amount of raindro because a water-repellent coating, dirt, or ice is on the upper half windshield.

- The rain/light sensor may be malfunctioning if the wiper interment operation does not vary depending on the amount of rainfall necessary, turn the wiper switch any position except the "AUTO" position. We recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected as so as possible.

- The wipers stop operation if the ambient temperature decreases to 5^ (-15^) or lower. The wipers resume operation when the ambient temperature increases to 14^ (-10^) or higher. If you need to operate the wipers under 5^ (-15^) , push the wiper control lever down to the low speed position or high speed position.

- The wipers may not operate if the temperature around the rain/light sensor is more than 176°F (80°C) because the system cannot detect

the amount of raindrops under these temperatures.

- This system is also equipped with the vehicle speed interlocking intermittent wiper function. When the vehicle stops, the wiper operation interval will be done longer compared with that while driving.

- This system may malfunction in a location with strong radio waves or noise.

■ Windshield wiper and wash switches

The wiper operates only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

▼ Windshield wipers (models with automatic rain sensing windshield wipers)

AUTO 305672

△/ MIST: Mist (for a single wipe) ○/ OFF: Off
AUTO / AUTO: Automatic operation
▼ / LO: Low speed
▼ / HI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down. With the wiper switch the "AUTO" position, the wipers operate automatically when the rain/light sensor detects falling rain. The wiper timing is automatically adjusted depending on the

amount of rain.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever the "OFF"/"O" position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the lever up. The wipers operate until you release the lever.

NOTE

The automatic adjusting mode of the wiper timing can be changed from the rain-sensing mode to the vehicle speed interlocking mode. The setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. For more details, we recommend that you contact a SUBARU dealer.

▽ Rain/light sensor

1 in 305665

1) Rain/light sensor
The rain/light sensor is on the windshield

glass.

▽ Sensor sensitivity control

AUTO 1 305588

Turn the dial to adjust the sensitivity of the rain/light sensor for wiper control. Turn the dial downward to increase the sensitivity. Turn the dial upward to decrease the sensitivity.

▼ Windshield wipers (models without automatic rain sensing windshield wipers)

301723

Δ / MIST: Mist (for a single wipe)
O/ OFF: Off
/ INT: Intermittent
▼/LO:Low speed
▼ / HI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the "O"/"OFF" position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the lever up. The wipers operate until you release the lever.

▽ Wiper intermittent time control

Diagram of a car handle with directional arrows and leaf symbols, no readable text or labels

When the wiper switch is in the “position, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper. The operating interval can be adjusted in several steps from the shortest interval to the longest.”

▼ Windshield washer

Simple line drawing of a mechanical component with a base and arrow, emitting a downward arrow (no text or symbols)

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper control lever toward you. The washer fluid sprays until you release the lever. The wipers operate while you pull the lever.

NOTE

Diagram of a car steering wheel with a gear symbol and a magnified inset showing the gear (no text or labels)

Windshield washer fluid warning light

The windshield washer fluid warning light illuminates when the washer fl level in the tank has dropped to the lower limit. If the warning light illuminates, refill the tank with fluid. For refilling procedure, refer to "Wind-shield washer fluid" P455.

■ Rear window wiper and washer switch

Diagram of a connector with ports and an arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

: Washer operation (accompanied by wiper operation)

: Continuous operation : Intermittent operation

the : Off : Washer operation (accompanied by wiper operation)

▼ Rear wiper

With the switch turned to the " " position the rear wiper will operate intermittently intervals corresponding to the vehicle speed. In this position, when you move the select lever to the "R" position, the wiper will switch to continuous operation.

When you move the select lever from the "R" (reverse) position to another position, the rear wiper will return to intermittent operation.

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:

Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off "O" position, if the front windshield wiper is operating continuously, the rear wiper will operate intermittently when you move the select lever to the "R" (reverse) position.

The factory setting (default setting) of the reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is all follows.

• U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
- Other models: Operational

This setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that disturbs the rear wiper operation on the rear gate. Doing so may damage the rear wiper when it operates.

▼ Washer

To wash the rear window, turn the knob the "☐" position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you release the knob.

3-17. Mirrors

to

Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted before you start driving.

■ Inside mirror

2 1 305310

1) Normal position

2) Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal To reduce glare from the headlights of vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the antiglare position.

■ Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink(if equipped)

1 2 3 304867

1) Display
2) HomeLink Buttons
3) Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming feature senses distracting glare from vehicle headlights behind you and automatically dims to eliminate the glare and preserve your vision.

▼ To Operate the Auto-Dimming Feature

Press the "⏻" switch to turn the auto-dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming feature is enabled when the switch's green LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming feature will default to on with each ignition

cycle.

▼ To Operate the Compass Feature

1. To turn the compass feature on/off, press and hold the ⏻” switch for more than 3 seconds or until the display turns on/off. The compass feature will default on with each ignition cycle.
2. If the display reads "C", slowly drive vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 304866

Compass calibration zones

1. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the 1" switch for more than 6 seconds or until a zone number appears in the display.
(3) Once the zone number appears

the display, toggle the "山" switch again until your current location zone number appears. After you stop pressing the switch, your new zone number will be saved. Within a few seconds, the display will show a compass direction.
4. If the vehicle's magnetics have changed or if the compass appears inaccurate recalibrate the compass. Press and hold the "U" switch for more than 9 seconds until a "C" appears in the display. Once "C" appears in the display, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.

▼ HomeLink \* Wireless Control System

The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up three hand-held radio-frequency remotes used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, and even home lighting. The below steps are generic programming instructions; for Genie and Sommer garage door openers, please go directly to the HomeLink website. Additional information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

• Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage.
• When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to outside of the garage.
  Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards.
• It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld remote (garage door opener remote) of the device for quicker and more accurate training.
• Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the "ON" or "ACC" position for pro-

gramming and/or operation of HomeLink.

- Keep the hand-held remote (gar-age door opener remote) of the device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to "Erasing HomeLink Buttons" P242.

▽ Programming a New HomeLink Button

1 2 304868

1) Indicator Light
2) HomeLink Buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink button that you would like to program. The HomeLink indicator light will flash orange slowly (if not, refer to "Erasing HomeLink Buttons" P242).

1 304869

1. Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to cm) away from the HomeLink button that you would like to program.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door opener remotes) may actually train better at a distance of 6 to 12 inch (15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if have difficulty with the programming process.

Line drawing of a hand pressing down on a curved surface with a small object, no text or symbols present

1. While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and hold the hand-held remote button. Continue pressing the hand-held remote button until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to replace this "Programming a New HomeLink Button" step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Programming" section. Refer to "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" P242.

1 304871

1) Indicator Light

1. Press the HomeLink button that you would like to program and observe the indicator light.

2. If the indicator light remains constant, green, your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed. At this point, if your device operates, programming is complete.

3. If the indicator light rapidly flashes green, firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button up to three times to complete the programming process. At this point if your device operates, programming is complete. If the device does not operate, continue with the next step of the programming instructions.

1 304872

1) "Learn" button

1. At the garage door opener motor, (security gate motor, etc.) locate the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. The can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-he unit (see the device's manual to identify this button). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps.

1. Firmly press and release the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. You now have 30 seconds in which to complete 7.

Simple line drawing of a finger pointing at a curved surface, no text or symbols present

1. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button up to three times. At this point programming is complete and your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

1 304874

1) Status Indicators

1. If status indicator arrows appear next to the indicator light, please refer to "Garage Door Two-Way Communication" P243.

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink website.

▽ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter remote signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held remote will go off when the device times out, indicating that it has finished transmitting.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator of garage door opener by using the programming procedures, replace "Programming a New HomeLink Button" step 3 with the following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and release ("cycle") your device's hand-held remote every two seconds until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with "Programming a New HomeLink Button" step 4 to complete.

▽ Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the handheld remote of the device may also be used at any time.

▼ Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED indicator will change from continuously lit to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. HomeLink is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming a New HomeLink Button" - step 1.

▽ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button

To program a previously trained button, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly flash orange after 20 seconds. The HomeLink button can be released at this point. Proceed with "Programming a New HomeLink Button" - step 3.
3. If you do not complete the programming of a new device to the button, it revert to the previously stored programming.

▽ Garage Door Two-Way Communication

HomeLink has the capability of communicating with your garage door opener. HomeLink can receive and display "closing" or "opening" status messages from compatible garage door opener systems. At any time, HomeLink can also recall a display the last recorded status communicated by the garage door opener to indicate your garage door being "closed" or "opened".

HomeLink has the capability of receiving this communication from the garage door opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 Range may be reduced by obstacles such as houses or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle speed to successfully receive the garage door opener communication.

▽ Programming Two-Way Communication

1 304874

1) Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink's garage door status indicators will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door two-way communication has been enabled. If your garage door status indicators flashed, two-way communication programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do flash, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found Recall and display (at any time) the last recorded garage door status message communicated to HomeLink by simultaneously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and 2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display the last recorded status for three seconds.

e ▽ Using Two-Way Communication

1 ↓仓 304875

1) Status Indicators

1 2 3 4 304876

1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking Orange)

2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid Green)

3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blinking Orange)

4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid Green)

If two-way communication programming successful, HomeLink will display the status of your garage door opener with arrow indicators.

▼ Certification

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-355-3515.

• U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

is This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

• Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

HomeLink® and the HomeLinkhouse are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

WARNING

• When programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System, you may be operating a garage door opener or other device. Make sure that people and objects are out of the way the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
• Do not use the HomeLinkWireless Control System with a garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet these safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink website at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

■ Smart Rearview Mirror/compass with HomeLink(if equipped)

▼ Safety precautions

WARNING

• Never rely exclusively on the Smart Rearview Mirror. The Smart Rearview Mirror has blind spots that must be checked prior to operating the vehicle. Please exercise caution when using this system.
• Do not disassemble or modify the main unit, camera or wiring of the Smart Rearview Mirror. If there is a strange odor or smoke, stop using it immediately and we recommend that you consult a SUBARU dealer.
• Never operate the Smart Rear-view Mirror while driving. Doing so could result in an accident that causes serious injury or death.

CAUTION

- Do not put the main unit, camera or wiring of the Smart Rearview

Mirror close to fire. Doing so could result in a malfunction and fire.

• When the Smart Rearview Mirror malfunctions, change to the mirror mode immediately and we recommend that you consult a SUBARU dealer.
• Staring at Smart Rearview Mirror for extended period of time may result in car sickness.
• The display could become hard to see because of lights (e.g. sunlight or the headlights of approaching vehicles) from outside of the vehicle. In this case, change to the mirror mode if necessary.

NOTE

When the moonroof is opened (if equipped):

If the sunlight is too bright to see the display of the Smart Rearview Mirror, close the moonroof (sunshade), or select the mirror mode.

▼ Smart Rearview Mirror switches

5 1 2 3 4 305629

1) Mode lever
2) Left button
3) Center button
4) Right button
5) HomeLink buttons

▼ How to use the Smart Rearview Mirror

CAUTION

Adjust the rearview mirror before driving.

1) Change the Smart Rearview Mirror to the mirror mode.
2) Sit with the correct posture in driver's seat and adjust the mirror position to see behind.

3) Change the Smart Rearview Mirror to the display mode. If you start driving without adjusting the mirror, light may reflect on the mirror while selecting the display mode and it may make it hard to the screen.

∇ To change the mode

1 2 305630

1) To select the display mode, first adjust the rearview mirror, then pull the mode lever towards you.
2) To select the mirror mode, push the mode lever away from you.

Select the display mode to show the image from the camera that is installed on the 1' rear gate.

Select the mirror mode to use as a normal?

mirror. If the mirror mode is selected, the image from the camera is not shown on the mirror.

NOTE

It is not possible to use the Smart Rearview Mirror in the display mode when the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position.

- When using the display mode, parts of the vehicle interior may reflect light on the display. Adjust the angle of the Smart Rearview Mirror to avoid unwanted reflection.

▽ Display adjustment

THE MESSAGE OR DISTRICT FIELD OF VIEW CHECK YOUR SURFERENCE AFTER MESSAGE CEATS. DISPLAY HOMEBUS COMPASS LANGUAGE EXIT 1 2 3 305631

1) Left button
2) Center button
3) Right button

Press any of the left, center or right butt to display the main menu. Select "DISPLAY" using the center button and press the left button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed the display while the select lever is position other than the "P" position.

Brightness adjustment

305632 1 2 3

1) Setting button: Press the setting button set the brightness.
2) Press this button to decrease the brightness.
3) Press this button to increase the brightness.

After pressing the setting button, the mode will change to the up/down adjustment mode.

tōns leave the brightness adjustment men press the HomeLink button.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the brightness adjustment menu will exit.

Up/down adjustment

1 2 3 305633

1) Setting button: Press the setting button set the angle.
2) Press this button to lower the angle.
3) Press this button to raise the angle.

After pressing the setting button, the mode will change to the left/right adjustment mode.

To leave the up/down adjustment menu, press the HomeLink button.

,NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the up/down adjustment menu will exit.

Left/right adjustment

1 2 3 305634

1) Setting button: Press the setting button to set the angle.
2) Press this button to turn the angle left.
to 3) Press this button to turn the angle right.

After pressing the setting button, the mode will change to the rotation adjustment mode.

To leave the left/right adjustment menu, press the HomeLink button.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the left/right adjustment menu will exit.

Rotation adjustment

1 2 3 305635

1) Setting button: Press the setting button to set the angle.
2) Press this button to turn the angle counterclockwise.
3) Press this button to turn the angle clockwise.

After pressing the setting button, the mode will change to the brightness adjustment mode.

To leave the rotation adjustment menu, press the HomeLink button.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the rotation adjustment men will finish.

Dimming setting

The Smart Rearview Mirror has a dimming mirror mode. When the mirror mode is selected with the ignition switch in the ON position, auto dimming will activate. This mode decreases glare automatically depending on the brightness level from behind.

THE MESSAGE MAY OBSTRUCT FILL OF VIEW CHECK YOUR SURROUNDING AFTER MESSAGE CALLS. AUTO DRINKING HOMELINE COMPASS LANGUAGE EXIT 1 2 3 e 305636

1) Left button
2) Center button
3) Right button

When selecting the mirror mode, press any of the buttons to select the main Select "AUTO DIMMING" using the cen

button and press the left button. Press one of the left, center, or right buttons to turn the dimming mirror mode ON/OFF.

ON 305637

Dimming mirror mode ON indicator

OFF 305638

Dimming mirror mode OFF indicator

When turning the dimming mirror mode

ON/OFF, the dimming mirror mode ON/OFF indicator will illuminate for 5 seconds.

NOTE

• When the ignition switch is turned the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, Auto dimming will not activate.
• When the display mode is selected, auto dimming will not activate.

▼ When the display mode malfunctions

▽ Vehicle communication error

VEHICLE COMMUNICATION ERROR 305639

When the vehicle communication error, the warning indicators will appear as shown in the illustration.

305640 to 1 2 3 4

1) Mode lever
2) Left button
3) Center button
4) Right button

When the warning indicators appear, operate the mode lever to select the mode. In such a case, we recommend you consult your SUBARU dealer for repair.

If the mode does not change to the mirror mode even when operating the mode lever, the mode lever may have malfunctioned. In such a case, press and hold one of the left, center, or right buttons for 10 seconds. Then the mode will change to the mirror mode.

▽ Camera calibration error

Front view diagram of a vehicle rearview mirror with control panel and sensor icon (no text or labels)

When the camera calibration error, the warning indicators will appear as shown in the illustration.

When the warning indicators appear, operate the mode lever to select the mirror mode. In such a case, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer for repair.

▼ Maintenance

Line drawing of a car rear view with no visible text or symbols

1) Camera

• Make sure to clean the Smart Rearview Mirror and the area around the camera regularly. If these parts are not clean, the screen cannot be seen clearly.
• Wipe off the Smart Rearview Mirror and the area around the camera by using a soft cloth. If the foreign matter cannot be removed, first wipe the area off using a soft cloth, and then wipe using a dry cloth
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning. Doing so could result in discoloration, deterioration, or malfunction.
• Make sure to clean the rear gate glass regularly. When you clean the rear gate glass, first soak a soft cloth with diluted

mild detergent to wipe it off, and wipe a dry cloth.

- Do not attach stickers on the rear gate glass that is in front of the camera.

▼ Tips

• Do not use the display mode for a long time while the engine is not running. Do so could result in the battery discharge.
• Do not install radio antennas around the Smart Rearview Mirror. Radio waves may disturb the Smart Rearview Mirror screen.
• Observe the following instructions. Not doing so could result in malfunction or main mirror unit falling off.

- Do not push the button too strong or move the lever too forcibly.

- Do not turn the main mirror unit more than 90 degrees.

- Do not impact the main mirror unit dry - Do not impact the camera or camera cover that are installed on the wet upper part of the rear gate.

• If the screen is hard to see because light, select the mirror mode.
• If LED lights or scattered reflections are caught in the camera, the screen may flicker. However, this is not a malfunction
• If something moves rapidly near the camera, the display may not be able to catch the item. However, this is not a

usingfunction.

• If the display mode is used, the view of the rear will be different from the normal use of the inner mirror or the mirror mode. Do not rely solely on the Smart Rearview Mirror; check the rear visually if necessary. Pay attention to traffic conditions for safe driving.
• Adjust the brightness of the screen appropriately. If the screen is too bright, the driver's eyes may get tired while driving.
• When it is raining, use the rear wiper. If the screen of the Smart Rearview Mirror is still unclear, even though rear wiper is being used, check the condition of the rubber of the rear wiper blade.
• When using the rear wiper, the screen may flicker when the rear wiper passes through the front of the camera. However, t. this is not a malfunction.
• If the screen of the Smart Rearview Mirror is not clear, clean the rear gate glass around the camera. If it is still not clear, there is a possibility that the surface of the glass is covered with oil. In this case, remove the oil and clean the glass.
• If the rear gate glass is fogged, use the rear window defogger. Use the mirror mode until the fog is clear completely. For how to use the rear window defogger, refer to "Defogger and deicer" P259.

- The Smart Rearview Mirror sometimes becomes hot. However, this is not a malfunction. - In the following cases, the color may be clear. However, this is not a malfunction.

- The shown items are a very far distance away. - The environmental conditions are very dark.

▼ To operate the compass feature

THE MESSAGE MAY DISTRICT FIELD OF VIEW CHECK YOUR SURRUMINGS AFTER MESSAGE CLEAR. HEADING DISPLAY OKOFFY COMPASS SIZE SELECTION COMPASS CALIBRATION EXIT 1 2 3 305641

1) Left button
2) Center button
3) Right button

Press any of the left, center or right buttons to display the main menu. Select "COMPASS" using the center button and press the left button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed the display while the select lever is position other than the "P" position.

∇ To turn the compass feature on off

THE MESSAGE MAY INSTRUCT FIELD OF VIEW. CHECK YOUR SURRONGS AFTER MESSAGE CLEAR. HEADING DISPLAY ON OFF EXIT 1 305642 NW

1) Compass display

1. Select "HEADING DISPLAY ON/OFF" using the center switch and press the le switch.
2. Select "ON" or "OFF" using the centre switch and press the left switch.

∇ To adjust for compass zone on variance

in a THE MEASURE MAY DISTRICT READ OF VIEW CHECK YOUR SURFORDING AFTER MEASURE CHADS COMPASS ZONE COLLECTION PRESS DOWN BUTTON TO SELECT YOUR ZONE FROM MAT AT LET. ZONE 10 305643

1. Select "COMPASS ZONE SELEC-TION" using the center switch and press the left switch.
2. Select your current location in the display using the center switch and press the left switch.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 30 seconds, the compass zone variance menu will finish.

∇ Compass calibration

If the compass appears inaccurate, recal brate the compass.

THE MESSAGE MAY DISTRICT FIELD OF VIEW. CHECK YOUR SURPLAIDINGS AFTER MESSAGE CLOSES NW COMPASS CALIBRATION PRESS "CA" TO INITATE COMPASS CALIBRATION CAL 305644

1. Select "COMPASS CALIBRATION" using the center switch and press the left switch.

2. To start the Compass calibration, press the center switch.

3. Once a "C" appears in the display, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.

▼ HomeLink © Wireless Control System

The HomeLink® Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up three hand-held radio-frequency remotes used to activate devices such as gate

operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, and even home lighting. The below steps are generic programming instructions; for Genie and Sommer garage door openers, please go directly to the HomeLink website. Additional information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

• Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way the device to prevent potential harm or damage.
• When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to par outside of the garage.
• Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features, as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet

current U.S. federal safety standards.

• It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld remote (garage door opener remote) of the device for quicker and more accurate training.
• Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the "ON" or "ACC" position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink.
• Keep the hand-held remote (gar-age door opener remote) of the device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to "Erasing HomeLink Buttons" P242.

HomeLink settings

1 2 3 4 305653

1) HomeLink buttons
2) Left button
3) Center button
4) Right button

Press any of the left, center or right butt to display the main menu. Select "HOMELINK" using the center button and press the left button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed the display while the select lever is position other than the "P" position.

▽ Programming a New HomeLink button

THE MESSAGE MAY EXCEPT HELD OF VIEW CHECK YOUR SURROUNDING AFTER MESSAGE CEANS PROGRAM BUTTON 1 PROGRAM BUTTON 2 PROGRAM BUTTON 3 EXIT HomeBook 305654

1. Select "PROGRAM BUTTON" using the center button and press the left butt
2. Select the HomeLink button that you would like to program on the display us the center button. Then press the left button.
3. Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to cm) away from the mirror.

in a

THIS MESSAGE ANY OBTUATE FIELD OF VIEW. CHECK YOUR SURVEEACHS AFTER MESSAGE GUIDE. DO YOU WANT TO PROGRAM BUTTON 17 YES NO EXIT HoneyJet.com 305655

1. Select "YES" using the center button and press the left button.
2. While the HomeLink programming instructions are displayed, press and hold the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door opener remotes) may actually train better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have difficulty with the programming process.

1. Continue pressing the hand-held remote button until the HomeLink display changes to screen in step 7 or 8 below:

THE MESSAGE MY DISTRICT FIELD OF VIEW CHECK YOUR SURROUNDING AFTER MESSAGE LEVEL HOMELINK MIRROR BUTTON HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY PROGRAMMED PHASED THIS PROGRAMMED BUTTON SEVERAL TIME. SÕES THE GARAGE DOOR ON OTHER COMPATIBLE DEVICE WORK? YES NO EXIT HOMELIN 305712

7. Successfully Programmed:

If the programmed HomeLink button works, select "YES" and programming is completed.

If the programmed HomeLink button does not work select "NO" and proceed to step below.

THE MESSAGE MY DISTRICT RELD OF NEW CHECK YOUR SURROUNDING AFTER MESSAGE CLOSE. 1. LOCATE AND PRESS THE LASHI BUTTON ON THE GARAGE DOOR OPWERS OR OTHER COMPATIBLE DEVICE. 2. WITHIN 30 SECONDS PRESS THE HOMELAN MIRROR BUTTON SEVERAL TIMES. 3. READ THE DEVICE WORLD? No contact Yes No 305713

1 8 304872

1) "Learn" button

1. At the garage door opener motor, (security gate motor, etc.) locate the

"Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head

unit (see the device's manual to identify this button). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps.

1. Firmly press and release the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. You now have 30 seconds in which to complete step 10.
2. Return to the vehicle and press the HomeLink button. At this point your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

Pure diagram of nested rectangular structures with a labeled arrow and number 305656, no text or symbols present.

1) Status Indicators

1. If status indicator arrows appear next to the indicator light, please refer to

"Garage Door Two-Way Communication" P243.

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink website.

▽ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter remote signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held remote will go off when the device times out, indicating that it has finished transmitting.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the programming procedures, replace "Programming a New HomeLink Button" step 3 with the following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and release ("cycle") your device's hand-held remote eve two seconds until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

'NOTE

If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unp the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with "Programming a New HomeLink Button" step 4 to complete.

▽ Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office fighting, etc.). For convenience, the handheld remote of the device may also be used at any time.

▼ Erasing HomeLink Buttons

1. Press any of the left, center or right buttons to select the main menu. Select "HOMELINK" using the center switch and press the left switch.
2. Select the "CLEAR BUTTON" using the center button and press the left button.

plug ss THE MESSAGE MAY DISTRICT FIELD OF VIEW. CHECK YOUR SURROUNDING AFTER MESSAGE CLEAR CLEAR ALL CLAR BUTTON 1 CLAR BUTTON 2 CLAR BUTTON 3 EXIT HomeLine 305657

Instruments and controls

1. Select the HomeLink button that you would like to erase the program on the display using the center button. Then press the left button.
2. To erase the program for the HomeLink button, select "YES" using the center button and press the left button.

HomeLink is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming a new HomeLink button" - step 1.

▽ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button

To program a previously programmed HomeLink button refer to "Programming a New HomeLink button" P253.

▽ Garage Door Two-Way Communication

HomeLink has the capability of communicating with your garage door opener. HomeLink can receive and display "closing" or "opening" status messages from compatible garage door opener systems. At any time, HomeLink can also recall a display the last recorded status communicated by the garage door opener to indicate your garage door being "closed" or "opened".

HomeLink has the capability of receiving this communication from the garage door opener at a range up to 820 feet (250) Range may be reduced by obstacles such as houses or trees. You may have to say your vehicle speed to successfully receive the garage door opener communication.

▽ Programming Two-Way Communication

THE MESSAGE MAY DISTRUCT FIELD OF NEW CHECK YOUR SURROUNDING AFTER MESSAGE CLEARS NW PROGRAMMING COMPLETED HomeLab 1 305714

1) Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink's garage door status indicators will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door two-way communication has been enabled. If your garage door status indicators flashed, two-way communication eprogramming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do flash, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found online at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

∇ Using Two-Way Communication

1 305658

1) Status Indicators

Recall and display (at any time) the last recorded garage door status message communicated to HomeLink by simultaneously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and 2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display the last recorded status for three seconds.

1 2 3 4 304876

1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking Orange)

2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid Green)

3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blinking Orange)

4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid Green)

If two-way communication programming successful, HomeLink will display the status of your garage door opener with arrow indicators.

▼ Certification

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-355-3515.

• U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

• Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

HomeLink® and the HomeLinkhouse are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

WARNING

• When programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System, you may be operating a garage door opener or other device. Make sure that people and objects are out of the way the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
• Do not use the HomeLinkWireless Control System with a garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet these safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink website at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru or call 1-800-355-3515.

Language

THE MESSAGE MAY DISTRICT FIELD OF VIEW. CHECK YOUR SURROUNDAGE AFTER MESSAGE CONTACTS. INVOICE PROVISIONS EXPANSAL EXIT 306081

Changes the language displayed in the smart rearview mirror.

1. Press any of the left, center or right buttons to display the main menu. Select "LANGUAGE" using the center button and press the left button.
2. Select the language using the center button and press the left button.

NOTE

• If the button is not touched for 30 seconds, the language setting menu will exit.
• The main menu cannot be displayed on the display while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

Outside mirrors

Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and farther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the convex mirror to judge the distance of vehicles behind you when changing lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in convex mirror.

Remote control mirror switch

is 304882

Select side to adjust

Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" "ACC" position.

1. Turn the control switch to the side that you want to adjust. "L" is for the left mirror, "R" is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral position to prevent unintentional operation.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.

3-18. Defogger and deicer

1 2 3 305666

1) Rear window defogger

2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The vehicle is equipped with the defogg

and the deicer (if equipped) system. The defogger and deicer system is activated only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

1 2 305584

Instruments and controls
1) Models without outside mirror defogger
2) Models with outside mirror defogger

To activate simultaneously the rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger (if equipped) and windshield wiper deicer (if equipped), press the control switch that is located on the climate control panel. The indicator light on the control switch illuminates while the defogger and deicer system is activated.

To turn them off, press the control switch again. They also turn off when the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK"/er"OFF" position.

The defogger and deicer system will automatically shut off after approximately 15 minutes. If the rear window and the outside mirrors have been cleared and windshield blade rubbers have been deiced completely before that time, pres the control switch to turn them off.

It is possible for the defogger and deicer system to be set to continuous operation mode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult you SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for models with a combination meter display, it is possible to set the defogger and deicer system for the continuous operation mode. For details, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

CAUTION

• To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the defogger and deicer system continuously for any longer than necessary.
• Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface the rear window. They may damage the conductors printed on the window.

NOTE

• Turn on the defogger and deicer system if the wipers are frozen to windshield.
• If the windshield is covered with snow, remove the snow so that the windshield wiper deicer works effectively.
• While the defogger and deicer system is in the continuous operation mode:

- If the vehicle speed remains at 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15 minutes, the windshield wiper deicer system automatically stops operating. However, the rear window defogger system and outside mirror defogger system maintain continuous operation in this condition. - If the vehicle battery voltage drops below the permissible level, continuous operation of the defogger system and deicer system is canceled and the system stops operating.

of

3-19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

WARNING

• Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt/telescopic position while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.
  9 If the lever cannot be raised to the fixed position, adjust the steering wheel again. It is dangerous to drive without locking the steering wheel. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.

1 2 3 304858

1) Tilt adjustment
2) Telescopic adjustment
3) Tilt/telescopic lock lever

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to "Manual seat" P35 or "Power seat" P36.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down
3. Move the steering wheel to the desire level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it up and down and forward and backward.

■ Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped)

The Heated Steering Wheel system warms the steering wheel at a constant temperature.

1 2 3 3 3 304900

1) Heated Steering Wheel switch
2) Indicator light
3) Heated area

To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel switch when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position. Then the steering wheel will be warmed and the indicator light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull the switch again. Then the indicator light will turn off.

CAUTION

• Use the Heated Steering Wheel system with the engine running. Otherwise, the battery voltage may drop below the permissible level and it may not be possible to start the engine.
• There is a possibility that people with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low temperatures if they use the Heated Steering Wheel for a long period of time. When using the Heated Steering Wheel, always be sure to warn the persons concerned.
• Do not cover the Heated Steering Wheel with an object such as a steering wheel cover. Doing so may cause the Heated Steering Wheel to overheat.

NOTE

• If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is approximately above 104^ (40^) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. Then, the indicator light will continue to illuminate.
• The Heated Steering Wheel system will automatically turn off approximately 30 minutes after the system has been turned on.

3-20. Horn

ed ering 304901

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Climate control

4-1. Ventilator control 264

Center ventilators 264

Side ventilators 264

Rear ventilators 264

4-2. Climate control panel 265

Front climate control panel 266

Rear climate control panel (if equipped) 267

Climate control display 268

4-3. Automatic climate control operation.... 268

Sensors.... 269

4-4. Manual climate control operation for front climate control 270

Airflow mode selection 270

MAX A/C mode 271

Temperature control 271

Fan speed control.... 271

Air conditioner control.... 271

Air inlet selection 271

SYNC mode 272

To turn off the front climate control system......

Rear climate control 272

To turn off the rear climate control system......

4-5. Manual climate control operation for rear climate control 273

Airflow mode selection.... 273

Temperature control 273

Fan speed control 273

To turn off the climate control system 273

4-6. Defrosting 274

4-7. Operating tips for heater and air conditioner....274

Cleaning ventilation grille.... 274

Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight 275

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit 275

Checking air conditioning system before summer season 275

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low temperature weather conditions ..... 275

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded.... 275

Refrigerant for your climate control system ..... 275

4-8. Air filtration system....276

Replacing a cabin air filter.... 276

4-1. Ventilator control

■ Center ventilators

Top-down diagram of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating traffic or movement (no text or symbols)

Center ventilators

To adjust the airflow direction, move the To adjust the flow direction, move the tab. tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all the way down.

■ Side ventilators

2 1 402805

Side ventilators

1) Close
2) Open

■ Rear ventilators

Diagram of a car intake manifold with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

To adjust the airflow direction, move the tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all the way rearward.

4-2. Climate control panel

WARNING

• The cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
• Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

CAUTION

Do not open and close the center console lid while operating the rear climate control panel. There is the risk of fingers being caught in the lid.

■ Front climate control panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REAR CTRL HOLD REAR CTRL AUTO SYNC MODE REAR ON/OFF ON/OFF MAX A/C 14 13 A/C 11 12 402798

1) Driver's side temperature control dial (Refer to "Automatic climate control operation" P268 and/or "Temperature control" P271.)
2) AUTO button (Refer to "Automatic climate control operation" P268.)

3) SYNC button (Refer to "SYNC mode" P272.)
4) ON/OFF button (Refer to "Automatic climate control operation" P268.)
5) Fan speed control dial (Refer to "Fan speed control" P271.)

6) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to "Airflow mode selection" P270.)
7) Rear climate control ON/OFF button (Refer to "To turn off the rear climate control system" P272.)
8) Rear climate control button (Refer to "Rear climate control" P272.)
9) MAX A/C button (Refer to "MAX A/C mode" P271.)
10) Passenger's side temperature control dial (Refer to "Temperature control" P271.)
11) Air conditioner button (Refer to "Air conditioner control" ∞P271.)
12) Rear window defogger button and outside mirror defogger button (if equipped) (Refer to "Defogger and deicer" P259.)
13) Defroster button (Refer to "Defrosting" P274.)
14) Air inlet selection button (Refer to "Air inlet selection" P271.)

Rear climate control panel (if equipped)

1 2 TEMP ON/OFF MODE AUTO 3 4 5 402799

1) Temperature control button (Refer to "Temperature control" P273.)
2) Fan speed control button (Refer to "Fan speed control" P273.)
3) Climate control ON/OFF button (Refer to "To turn off the climate control system" P273.)
4) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to "Airflow mode selection" P273.)
5) AUTO button (Refer to "Automatic climate control operation" P268.)

■ Climate control display

▼ Front climate control panel

13 12 11 10 9 60 FULL AUTO REAR CONTROL SYN REAR MAX A/C 65 6 7 8 402932

1) Set temperature indicator (driver's side)

2) FULL AUTO indicator

3) AUTO indicator

4) Airflow mode indicator

5) Fan speed indicator

6) Set temperature indicator (rear)

7) Maximum air conditioner ON indicator

8) Set temperature indicator (front passenger's side)

9) SYNC indicator (front)

10) Rear climate control lock indicator

11) Rear climate control ON/OFF indicator

12) SYNC indicator (rear)

13) Rear climate control display indicator

▼ Rear climate control panel

7 6 5 4 SWE FULL AUTO 1 2 3 402933

1) Set temperature indicator

2) Airflow mode indicator

3) Fan speed indicator

4) AUTO indicator

5) FULL AUTO indicator

6) Rear climate control lock indicator

7) SYNC indicator

4-3. Automatic climate control operation

When this mode is selected, the fan speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control, and air conditioner compressor operation are automatically controlled. To activate this mode, perform the following.

1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator light "FULL AUTO" on the climate control display illuminates.

2. Set the preferred temperature using the temperature control dial.

NOTE

- Operate the automatic climate control system when the engine is running.

- Even when cooling is not necessary, the air conditioner compressor will automatically turn on if the temperature is set much lower than the current outlet air temperature. Even in this case, the "A/C" indicator light on the control panel illuminates.

- The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the regional specifications of the vehicle.

- If you operate any of the buttons on the control panel other than the ON/OFF button, rear window defogger button, SYNC button and temperature control dial(s) during FULL AUTO mode

operation, the "FULL" indicator light the control panel will turn off and "AUTO" indicator light will remain illuminated. You can then manually control the system as desired using the button you operated. To change system back to the FULL AUTO mo press the AUTO button.

To turn off the climate control system, press the ON/OFF button. Then the air inlet selection will be set to the following.

• When the air inlet selection is set to auto mode: Outside air circulation
• When the air inlet selection is set to manual mode: No change

■ Sensors the The sensors are located as follows.

the de, 1 2 402806

1) Front interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor

1 402856

1) Rear interior air temperature sensor

The automatic climate control system employs several sensors. These sensors are delicate. If they are not treated properly and become damaged, the system may not be able to control the interior temperature correctly. To avoid damaging the sensors, observe the following precautions.

• Do not subject the sensors to impact.
• Keep water away from the sensors.
• Do not cover the sensors.
• Do not touch the rear interior air temperature sensor.

4-4. Manual climate control operation for front climate control

■ Airflow mode selection

Select the airflow mode using the airflow mode selection button.

Airflow modes are as follows.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the instrument panel and some through windshield defroster outlets (A small amount of air flows to the windshield and both side windows to prevent fogging.)

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seatbelt with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets, foot outlets and both side outlets of the instrument panel (Refer to "Defrosting" P274.)

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Defrost: Windshield defroster outlets and both side outlets of the instrument panel

(Refer to "Defrosting" P274.)

■ MAX A/C mode

For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/C button.

When the MAX A/C mode is on, the following settings will be changed automatically.

• The air conditioner will turn on.
• The temperature will be set on the lowest.
• The fan speed will be set on the maximum speed.
  ● The air inlet will be set to recirculation
• The air flow mode setting will be set ventilation mode.

To turn off MAX A/C mode and return previous setting, press the MAX A/C button again.

■ Temperature control

Turn the temperature control dial to set preferred interior temperature.

NOTE

The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the regional specifications of the vehicle.

■ Fan speed control

Select the preferred fan speed by turning the fan speed control dial.

■ Air conditioner control

The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running.

Press the air conditioner button while the fan is in operation to turn on the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the "A/C" indicator light illuminates. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again.

NOTE

For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold weather, turn on the air theconditioner. If the ambient temperature decreases to approximately 32°F (0°C), the air conditioner and dehumidification system may not operate properly.

th Air inlet selection

Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet selection button.

- Recirculation:

When the indicator light on the air inlet selection button illuminates, interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the air inlet selection button to the ON position

for fast cooling with the air conditioner when driving on a dusty road.

- Outside air circulation:

When the indicator light on the air inlet selection button does not illuminate, outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. Press the air inlet selection button to the OFF position when the interior has cooled to a comfortable temperature and the road is no longer dust

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON p tion may fog up the windows. S to the OFF position as soon as outside conditions are no longer dusty.

SYNC mode

Press the SYNC button to turn on the SYNC mode. The SYNC indicator on the climate control display will illuminate. The SYNC mode can be controlled to synchronize the driver's, front passenger's and rear passenger's side climate control using the front climate control panel.

▼ Temperature control

When the SYNC mode is turned on, the driver's, front passenger's and rear pas-

rsenger's side (when rear climate control on) temperatures are synchronized using the driver's side temperature control dial. Press the SYNC button again or turn the front passenger's control dial to cancel SYNC mode. Press the temperature control button on the rear climate panel to cancel the rear climate SYNC mode only. When the SYNC indicator(s) is/are not illuminated, the temperature can be controlled individually using the driver's and front passenger's temperature control dials, and the rear passenger's temperature control button.

Airflow mode and fan speed control When the SYNC mode is turned on, both the driver's and rear passenger's side airflow mode and fan speed control are synchronized using the front climate control panel. Press the SYNC button again or operate the rear climate control panel to cancel SYNC mode. The SYNC indicator will no illuminate. In this case, airflow mode and fan speed control on the driver's side a rear passenger's side are separated. The airflow mode and fan speed control will controlled individually using the front climate control panel and rear climate control panel.

■ To turn off the front climate control system

To turn off the front climate control system: e press the ON/OFF button. he

■ Rear climate control

To operate the rear climate control by front climate control panel, press the rear climate control button while the rear climate control is on.

▼ Rear climate control panel lock function (if equipped)

To lock the rear climate control panel, dress and hold the rear climate control button. When the rear climate control panel lock mode is selected, the rear climate control panel lock indicator "on the front and rear climate control panel is illuminated.

To unlock the rear climate control panel, press and hold the rear climate control button again.

To turn off the rear climate control system

be To turn off the rear climate control system, press the REAR ON/OFF button.

4-5. Manual climate control operation for rear climate control

■ Airflow mode selection

Select the airflow mode using the airflow mode selection button.

Airflow modes are as follows.

Interior view of a car showing three seats and two side seats with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Ventilation: Rear ventilator outlets

Line drawing of a car interior showing seat compartments and a directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Heat: Foot outlets under the rear left side trim

Interior view of a car showing seat compartments and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Bi-level: Rear ventilator outlets and Foot outlets under the rear left side trim

■ Temperature control

Press the temperature control button to set the preferred interior temperature.

NOTE

• The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the regional specifications of the vehicle.
• If the air conditioner button on the front climate control is turned off, the rear interior temperature may not become the setting temperature.

Fan speed control

Select the preferred fan speed by pressing the fan speed control button.

■ To turn off the climate contro system

To turn off the climate control system: press the ON/OFF button.

4-6. Defrosting

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Select the 📄 or 🌐 mode to defrost or dehumidify the windshield and front door windows.

NOTE

- When the “” or “” mode is selected, the air conditioner compressor operates automatically regardless of the position of the air conditioner button to defrost the windshield more quickly. However the indicator on the air conditioner button will not illuminate. At the same time, the air inlet selection is automatically set to the outside air mode.

- After defrosting the windshield by pressing the defroster button 📊",

pressing the button again returns the 4-7. Operating tips for heater system to the setting that had been selected before the defroster was activated. ■ Cleaning ventilation grille

■ Cleaning ventilation grille

Line drawing of a modern SUV front view with no visible text or symbols

1) Front ventilation inlet grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean because cooling performance is impaired by any accumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.

■ Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few minutes to allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during the operation of t air conditioner for maximum cooling efficiency.

■ Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-season to circulate its oil.

- Checking air conditioning system before summer season

Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions, and proper operation each spring. Have the air conditioning system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

Cooling and dehumidifying i high humidity and low tem-perature weather conditions

Under certain weather conditions (high relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed. This condition is normal and does not indicate any problem with the air conditioning system.

■ Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air conditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the accelerator is fully depressed such as during rapid acceleration or when driving on a steep upgrade.

■ Refrigerant for your climate control system

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant HFO-1234yf. Therefore, the method of adding, changing or checking the refrigerant is different from the method for CFC12 (freon) or HFC134a. Consult your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong refrigerant are not covered under warranty.

4-8. Air filtration system

Your vehicle's air conditioning system is equipped with an air filtration system. Replace the cabin air filter according to the replacement schedule found in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet." This schedule should be followed to maintain the filter's dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. Have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the following occurs, even if it is not time to change the filter:

• Reduction of the airflow through the vents.
• Windshield gets easily fogged or misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster performance if not properly maintained.

■ Replacing a cabin air filter

1. Remove the glove box.

NOTE

We recommend that you take measures to protect the center console with masking tape first, so that you avoid scratching the center console with the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

yet 402808

(2) Remove the damper shaft from the glove box.

Diagram of a car air intake system showing airflow direction and component placement (no text or symbols)

(3) Push in the stoppers located on both sides of the glove box and then pull down the glove box as far as it will go.

402824

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally and remove the hinge portion. When

doing this, be careful not to damage the hinge.

Diagram showing airflow or ventilation system inside a vehicle, with labeled components and directional arrows indicating flow direction.

1. Remove the cabin air filter according to the following procedure in order to prevent dust on the air cleaner from falling to the inside of its housing.

(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the filter cover.
(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).
(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.

402388

1. Replace the cabin air filter with a new one and then reinstall the cover.

to CAUTION e The arrow mark on the filter mu point UP.

402825

1. Reinstall the glove box, and connect the damper shaft.

2. Close the glove box.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Audio

5-1. Antenna 280

Printed antenna 280

Roof antenna.... 280

5-2. Audio set.....281

5-1. Antenna

■ Printed antenna

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of the window on which the antenna printed. Doing so may damage the antenna printed on the window.

Line drawing of a car rear view showing front and side panels (no text or symbols)

The antenna is printed on the inner surface of the rear window glass.

NOTE

Antenna performance will deteriorate significantly if you apply tinting film

any other material over the antenna portion of the rear window glass.

■ Roof antenna

Simple line drawing of a boat on water with a triangular hull, no text or symbols present

Shark fin type

Simple line drawing of a car roof and side lanes with a small vehicle on the roof (no text or symbols)

OMouse type

The roof antenna is installed on the roof.

5-2. Audio set

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine SUBARU navigation system or audio system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual for details.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Interior equipment

6-1. Interior lights.... 284

Map lights 284

Reading light 284

Cargo area light....285

OFF delay timer 285

6-2. Sun visors 285

Vanity mirror with light 286

6-3. Overhead console.... 286

Cabin view mirror 287

6-4. Storage compartment.... 287

Glove box.... 288

Center console 288

Cup holders....288

Bottle holders.... 289

6-5. Power outlets 290

12 V power outlet 290

Use with the cigarette lighter (dealer option) ....

120 V power outlet (if equipped).... 292

6-6. USB power supply.... 292

How to use the USB power supply.... 293

6-7. Ashtray (dealer option) 294

6-8. Floor mat....295

6-9. Assist grip....296

6-10. Coat hook....296

6-11. Shopping bag hook 297

6-12. Cargo area cover (if equipped) .....297

Using the cover.... 297

To remove the cover housing 298

Stowage of the cargo area cover 298

To install the cover housing 299

6-13. Cargo tie-down hooks (if equipped) .....

6-14. Under-floor storage compartment.....30

6-15. Front View Monitor (if equipped) 301

How to access the Front View Monitor.... 301

How to cancel the Front View Monitor 302

Range of image on screen.... 302

Guiding line 303

Handling of camera 303

6-1. Interior lights

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make sure the lights are turned off to avoid battery discharge.

■ Map lights

DOOR OFF 601983

1) Door interlock switch

To turn on the map light, push the lens. To turn it off, push the lens again.

▼ Automatic illumination

When the door interlock switch is in the "DOOR" position, the map lights illumina automatically in the following cases.

• Any of the doors other than the rear gate is opened.
• The doors are unlocked using the keyless access function (if equipped). Refer to "Locking and unlocking by hold the access key fob" P121.
• The doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry system. Refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P134.
• The ignition switch is turned from the "ON" or "ACC" position to the "LOCK"/ "OFF" position.

■ Reading light

Diagram of a car air intake system showing vent slots and a handle (no text or symbols)

To turn on the reading light, push the lens. To turn it off, push the lens again.

e▼ Automatic illumination

The reading lights illuminate automatically in the following cases, even if the door interlock switch on the map light is in any position.

• Any of the doors other than the rear gate is opened.
• The doors are unlocked using the keyless access function (if equipped). Refer to "Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob" P121.
• The doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry system. Refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P134.
• The ignition switch is turned from the "ON" or "ACC" position to the "LOCK"/ "OFF" position.

Cargo area light

601835

1) DOOR
2) OFF

DOOR: The light illuminates when the gate is opened. The light remains illuminated for several seconds and gradually turns off after the rear gate is closed.

OFF: The light remains off.

■ OFF delay timer

The following lights have an automatic illumination function.

• reading light
• map light
• cargo area light

When the interior light switch is set to the "DOOR" position (except the reading light), the light will automatically turn on and turn off depending on the locking and unlocking of the doors, the opening and closing of the doors including the rear gate as well as the position of the ignition switch.

NOTE

The setting for the period of time ins which the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. For models with the combination meter display, the setting can also be changed by operating the combination meter display. For details, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

6-2. Sun visors

e d ate, 601182

To block out glare, swing down the visor's. To use the sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it sideways.

ay bi- 601513

With the sun visor positioned over the side

- CONTINUED -

window, you can slide the sun visor tow the rear to prevent glare through the gap between the sun visor and center pillar. slide the sun visor, pull it toward the rear the vehicle. When you have finished sliding it, push it toward the front of the vehicle.

Top-down technical diagram of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

Do not slide the sun visor over windshield. The slid sun visor would obstruct your view of the rearview mirror.

a■ Vanity mirror with light

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed while the car is being driven to avoid being blinded by glare.

Diagram of a car interior showing a curved arrow inside the dashboard (no text or symbols)

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. The lights beside the vanity mirror illuminate when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a period of time while the engine is running can cause battery discharge.

6-3. Overhead console

oid 601875

To open the console, push up the lid lightly that is located on the "PUSH" mark and it will automatically open.

WARNING

Do not use the overhead console while driving. Doing so may distract you from the road conditions ahead and cause an accident that may result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

- When your vehicle is parked in the sun or on a warm day, the inside of the overhead console

heats up. Avoid storing plastic other heat vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter in the overhead console.

- Do not pull the lid when opening the overhead console.

There is the risk that the over-head console may be damaged.

Diagram of a car interior showing a door panel and air vent, with no visible text or symbols

Push the lid back up half way.

6-4. Storage compartment

CAUTION

● Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
- Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compartment.

■ Cabin view mirror

Interior view of a car showing the backrest panel and dashboard area, with no visible text or symbols

1) Cabin view mirror

To use the cabin view mirror, push up the "PUSH" mark located on the lid lightly and it will automatically open.

NOTE

When opening the overhead console while the cabin view mirror is in use, first close the lid and then push up the "PUSH" mark to open the console.

Glove box

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and directional arrows, including a magnified inset of the device.

1) Rotate the key clockwise to lock.
2) Rotate the key counterclockwise to unlock.

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To close it, push the lid firmly upward.

NOTE

• The emergency key is directional. If the key cannot be inserted, change t direction that the grooved side is fac and insert it again.
• For models with the "keyless access with push-button start system", use the emergency key to lock or unlock the glove box.

■ Center console

The center console box provides a storage space.

2 1 601838

1) Coin tray
2) Accessory tray

The top of the console can be used as armrest.

Cup holders

ing

CAUTION

• Do not pick up a cup from the holder or put a cup in the ho while you are driving, as this distract you and lead to an ad dent.
  • Take care to avoid spills. Bev-

erages, if hot, might scald you and/or your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery or carpets.

- When a cup in the rear passenger's cup holder contains a beverage, do not fold down the rear seatback. Otherwise, the beverage could spill and, if the beverage is hot, it could scald you and/or your passengers.

Interior view of a car air intake console with two seats and a hand mixer (no text or symbols)

Front passenger's cup holder

The cup holder is built into the center console.

Diagram showing car interior components with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

2nd-row seat's cup holder (2nd-row captain seat models)

The cup holder is built into the center console. To use the cup holder, pull the holder lid.

Line drawing of a car seat with rear seats and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

2nd-row seat's cup holder (2nd-row bench seat models)

The cup holder is built into the armrest.

Line drawing of a car interior showing hand positioning and seat arrangement (no text or symbols)

3rd-row seat's cup holder (left side)

cup 601982

3rd-row seat's cup holder (right side)

The cup holder is built into the rear side trim.

■ Bottle holders

CAUTION

• Do not pick up a bottle from the bottle holder or put a bottle in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.
• When placing a beverage in a bottle holder, make sure it is capped. Otherwise, the beverage could spill when opening/closing the door or while driving and, if the beverage is hot, it could be told you and/or your passengers.

Diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle and road (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a car interior showing the side door, seatbelt, and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Rear door bottle holder

The bottle holder equipped on each door trim can be used to hold beverage bottles and other items.

6-5. Power outlets

CAUTION

• Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones, such as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power outlet. That could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the accessory power outlet when it is not use.
• If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too tight for the accessory power outlet, this can result in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.
• Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a long period of time while the engine not running can cause battery discharge.
• Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the cord your electrical appliance will not interfere with shifting gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance while

driving.

■ 12 V power outlet

Electrical power (12 V DC) is available at any of the accessory power outlets when the ignition switch is in either the "ACC" or "ON" position. Accessory power outlets are located in the following places.

in 601827

isPower outlet below the climate control dials

Diagram of a car door panel with a close-up inset showing a button (no text or symbols)

Power outlet in the cargo area

You can use an in-vehicle electrical app ance by connecting it to an outlet. The maximum power rating of an appli- ance that can be connected is 120 W.

CAUTION

• Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory power outlets.
• Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12 V DC. The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120 W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.
• When using appliances con-

nected to two outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed 120 W. Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical appliance.

■ Use with the cigarette lighter (dealer option)

To use the accessory power outlet as a cigarette lighter socket, purchase the cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is available from your SUBARU dealer. The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACO" position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait a few moments. It will automatically spring up when ready for use.

WARNING

To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with the heating element. Doing so could result in injury and could also damage the heating element.

CAUTION

• Do not hold the lighter pushed because it will overheat.
• The electrical power socket is originally designed to use a genuine SUBARU cigarette lighter plug. Do not use a non-genuine cigarette lighter plug in the socket. Doing so may cause a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.
• If the socket is ever used for a plug-in accessory such as a cell phone, that may damage the portion of the socket's internal mechanism that causes a cigarette lighter plug to "pop out" after its lighter element is heated. Therefore, do not place a cigarette lighter plug in a socket that has been used, even once, to power a plug-in accessory. Doing

so may cause the plug to stick and overheat, creating a potential fire hazard.

■ 120 V power outlet (if equipped)

Electrical power (120 V AC) is available at any of the power outlets when the ignition switch is in either the "ACC" or "ON" position. Power outlets are located in the following places.

601846

Power outlet behind the center console The maximum power rating of an appli- ance that can be connected is 100 W.

CAUTION

• Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 120 V AC. The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 100 W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet. The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 100 W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.
• When using appliances connected to two outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed 100 W. Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical appliance.
• Remove the plug from the power outlet before operating the second-row seat slide. There is a that the 120 V power outlet or plug may be damaged.

6-6. USB power supply

CAUTION

• The specification of a USB terminal that can be used is the A-type. If a different specification of terminal is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible, or the device may malfunction.
• There is no guarantee when a connected device malfunctions or data is damaged. The connection of a device shall be performed at your responsibility.

• To avoid an electric shock or a malfunction, observe the following precautions.

• Do not connect a USB hub.

• Do not insert any metal or other foreign objects into the USB terminal.
• Do not spill water or other liquid on the USB terminal.

- When you have connected a cable, pay attention not to pull on it with your legs. Otherwise, it may result in injury to you by falling over, or a malfunction of

the connected device.

• If a device is connected for a long time when the engine is not running, it may cause a discharged battery. Even when the engine is running, we recommend that you do not connect device for an unnecessarily long time.
• Do not connect a malfunctioning device. Doing so may cause smoke and fire.
• Remove the USB electronic device from the console USB power supply before operating the second-row seat slide. There is a that the USB power supply or USB electronic device may be damaged.
• Put the cap on the USB terminal when it is not in use. If any objects get into the USB termin that could cause a short circuit

Before connecting a device, be sure read the instruction manual of the

device and check whether or not this specification of the output is supported by the device. If a device that requires power exceeding the maximum rating is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible. Even if charging could be completed, the time required for charging may be longer than when the genuine charger for that device is used.
- Depending on the device, charging may be possible only when a special cable is used. In this case, be sure connect the device using the special visible.
- When a device that communicates with a PC is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible.
- When connect a device for charging, disconnect the device promptly after charging is completed.

■ How to use the USB power supply

ed res ng g en s to 2.1A 601851

Front seat USB power supply (an audio device can be connected and used)

y , 2.1A 2.1A 601848

Console USB power supply (power supply function only)

NOTE

- The rated voltage of each USB terminal is 5 V. For details about a maximum rated power, refer to "How to use the USB power supply" P293.

- CONTINUED -

2.1A 601849

3rd-row seat USB power supply (if equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position and a USB electronic device is connected to the USB terminal, 5 V DC power can be supplied to the device. Use the USB terminal to use or charge an electronic device.

When using the terminal, open the USB power supply cover. After use, close the USB power supply cover.

NOTE

The maximum rated power charges depending on the number of the terminal.

Number of USB terminal	Maximum rated power
	DC 5 V/2.1 A*

*: The available electricity of the two USB terminals is a maximum of 4.

6-7. Ashtray (dealer option)

CAUTION

• Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This could cause a fire.
  • Always extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them into the ashtray, and then close

2 A the ashtray securely. If you keep the ashtray open, the fire of the cigarette may spread to another cigarette butt and start a fire.

• Do not put flammable material in the ashtray.
• Do not leave a lot of cigarette butts in the ashtray.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ash-tray's inner lid. Clean them off using a toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended implement.

Diagram of a mechanical device with an open lid and internal components, showing a rotational arrow (no text or symbols)

The portable ashtray can be installed in each cup holder or bottle holder. For the locations of the cup holders, refer to "Cu holders" P288. For the locations of the bottle holders, refer to "Bottle holders" P289.

When using the ashtray, open the lid of ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

6-8. Floor mat

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and foot (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it could cause an accident. Observe the following precautions to prevent the floor mat from slipping forward.

• Be sure to use a genuine SUBARU floor mat or an equivalent designed with grommets in the correct locations.
• Make sure that the driver's floor mat is placed in its proper location and is correctly secured on its retaining pins.

- Do not use more than one floor mat.

Diagram of a car's seatbelt mechanism with no text or symbols

Retaining pins are located on the driver's side floor.

The floor mat should be properly secured using the built-in grommets, by placing the grommets over the pins and pushing them downward.

6-9. Assist grip

3D diagram of a curved mechanical component with labeled parts (0 and 1), no text or symbols present

1) Assist grip

The assist grip is to be held to support the body of the passengers when they are in the seat and the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not hold the assist grip when getting up from the seat. Holding and pulling the assist grip in the wrong way could break the grip and possibly cause injury.

CAUTION

Do not attach heavy objects to the assist grip. Doing so could break it and damage the object.

6-10. Coat hook

Simple line drawing of a curved object with a small inset component, no text or symbols present

A coat hook is attached to the rear passenger's assist grip.

Line drawing of a hanger with handle and frame, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Obey the following instructions.

• Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects or the coat hooks. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.
• Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no pointed objects in the pockets.

If these instructions are ignored, following may occur in sudden stops or in a collision.

• serious injuries by the items thrown through the cabin.
• incorrect SRS curtain airbag deployment

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the driver's view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

6-11. Shopping bag hook

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) more.

Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing two internal compartments with no text or symbols

A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the cargo area.

6-12. Cargo area cover (if equipped)

The cargo area cover is provided for covering the cargo area and to protect its contents from direct sunlight. This cover is detachable to make room for additional cargo.

Using the cover

Technical diagram of a car interior showing structural components and a highlighted section (no text or symbols)

Interior equipment

To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of the housing, then insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To rewind it, unhook it from the catches and it will rewind automatically. You should hold on to the cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive weight on the extended cover can break it and an object on the co could tumble forward in the event a sudden stop or collision. This could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the rear gate stays while extending and re-winding the cover.

Scratches on the stays could cause2. Push the cover housing to the right, leakage of gas from the stays, which shorten the length of the cover. may result in their inability to hold 3. Remove it from the retainer. the rear gate open.

■ To remove the cover housing ■ Stowage of the cargo area cover 1. Rewind the cover

1. Rewind the cover.

er of 601853

1. Push the cover housing to the right, shorten the length of the cover.
2. Remove it from the retainer.

The cargo area cover can be stowed in under the cargo floor.

Interior view of a car showing the rear compartment with a numbered arrow indicating a specific area (no text or symbols present)

Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, seats, and exhaust grilles (no text or symbols)

1) Strap
1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo

floor board.

Technical line drawing of a car rear bumper with mounting brackets and structural details (no text or symbols)

1. Shorten the cargo area cover, then stow it under the cargo area floor.
2. Put the cargo floor board back.

NOTE

To stow, insert the right end of the and lengthen the cover housing. cover into the recess of floor. To take Shorten the cover housing. out, lift up the left end of the cover, then pull it out from the recess.

■ To install the cover housing

1 2 3 601890

1) Cargo cover inner housing
2) Cargo cover outer housing
3) Cargo cover button

1. Hold the cover inner housing and out housing. Press the cover housing button

Diagram of a car interior showing a seatbelt switch and a doorbell with an arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols present)

1. Insert both ends of the cover housin into the recesses of the retainers.

NOTE

Store the window-side seatbelt in the holder before using the cover housing.

6-13. Cargo tie-down hooks (if equipped)

Top-down diagram of a car's front and rear dashboard showing steering wheel, grille, and side panels (no text or symbols)

The cargo area is equipped with several tie-down hooks so that cargo can be secured with a cargo net or ropes. When using the front tie-down hooks, tu them down out of the storing recesses.

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are designed only for securing light carg. Never try to secure cargo that exceeds the capacity of the hooks, maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (kg) per hook.

6-14. Under-floor storage compartment

CAUTION

● Always keep the lid of the under-floor storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stop or an accident.
- Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the under-floor storage compartment.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle rear opening with labeled components (no text or symbols beyond basic labels)

1) Strap

The under-floor storage compartment is

located under the floor of the cargo area and can be used to store small items. To open the lid, pull the tab and keep the lid using the strap on the seatback.

6-15. Front View Monitor (if equipped)

Line drawing of a car front view with a close-up inset showing a camera lens (no text or symbols)

The image from the camera mounted inside the front grille is displayed in the multi-function display (color LCD).

WARNING

. Never rely on only the Front View Monitor when driving the vehicle. The image on the monitor screen may be different from the actual situation. If you drive the vehicle by viewing only the monitor image, a collision or an unexpected accident may occur. When driving the vehicle, always check the traffic around the vehicle directly

with your eyes and the mirrors.

. Always operate the vehicle as you would without the Front View Monitor.

. Do not use the Front View Monitor in the following situations.

- You are driving on a dirt road or a road covered in snow.

– The camera malfunctions (e.g. the lens or bracket is broken).

. If the outside temperature is low, the monitor screen may become dark or the image may become dim. In particular, the image of a moving object may be distorted or disappear from the screen. You must always check the traffic around the vehicle directly with your eyes when driving it.

& How to access the Front View Monitor

VIEW/J 1 601845

1) "VIEW/" button

To change over to the camera screen, perform either of the following operations when the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

. Press the "VIEW/ J" button . Shift the select lever from "R" to "D" (only when the Camera Shift Link is set to "On") (for details, refer to "Camera shift link setting" P217.)

■ How to cancel the Front View Range of image on screen Monitor

▼ Manual cancellation

Press the "VIEW/J" button again.

▼ Automatic cancellation

If any of the following conditions are met, the Front View Monitor is canceled automatically.

After accessing the Front View Monitor by pressing the "VIEW" button:

• Approximately 3 minutes have passed since the last operation.
  ● The vehicle speed becomes 12.5 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
• The select lever is shifted to the "P" position.
• The parking brake is applied.

After accessing the Front View Monitor using the select lever:

• Shift the select lever into the "P" position.
• The vehicle speed becomes 5 mph (8 km/h) or higher.
• Approximately 9 seconds have passed since the last operation.
• The parking brake is applied.

graph TD
    A["Top Left: Car Position 1"] --> B["Top Right: Car Position 2"]
    B --> C["Bottom Right: Car Position 2"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333

A) Traffic intersection with a poor visibility view

B) Parking facing a wall

1) Range of displayed image

2) Obstacles (e.g., buildings, fences or other vehicles)

WARNING

Because the range of the image captured by the camera is limited, always check the traffic around the vehicle directly with your eyes when driving the vehicle.

NOTE

• The range of the displayed image may differ depending on the vehicle status or the road surface status.
• Because the Front View Monitor system uses a specially designed lens, the sense of distance in the displayed image is different from the actual distance.

• The camera image may be difficult to view in the following situations. This is not a malfunction.

• Dark place (at night)

• High or low temperature around the lens
• Water contacts lens or in high humidity (rainy weather)
• There is foreign materials (such as mud) around the camera.
• Sunlight or headlight beam directly shines towards the camera lens.

• Under an artificial light such as a

fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lamp or mercury lamp, the lighted portion may look like it is flickering (flicker phenomenon).

- While the display has cooled down, the image may leave traces or be seen darker than usual, causing a difficulty in viewing the screen. Always check traffic around the vehicle directly with your eyes while driving the vehicle. - The following incidents should not be deemed a malfunction.

- The camera lens may become foggy when the humidity is high a rainy day.

- The light from a vehicle or bui ing located ahead may be reflected towards the camera image while driving at night.

- In a dark place or while driving night, the camera image may be adjusted to make noises less visible. Therefore, the image may look like a monochromatic image or the image colors may differ from the actual colors. The camera image may be deteriorated in regard to sharpness at the center and four corners of the screen. This is not malfunction.

■ Guiding line

ne the n Check surroundings directly 1 2 601785

1) Guiding line
2) Warning message

The guiding line that indicates the width and the front end of your vehicle is displayed on the display.

■ Handling of camera

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, the system may malfunction.

Do not apply any strong impact the camera such as banging it hitting it with an object. The mounting angle may change.

• The camera unit is a waterproof structure. Do not attempt to remove, disassemble or modify the unit.
• Do not rub strongly or polish the camera lens with a hard brush or abrasive compounds. The lens may be scratched resulting in an adverse effect to the camera image.
• The camera lens is made of glass or plastic. Do not allow any organic solvent, body wax, oil film remover or glass coating agent to become attached on the lens surface. If any becomes attached, remove it immediately.
• Do not expose the camera lens to any sudden temperature change, for example, spraying hot water on it in cold weather.
• Do not apply the water jet of a high pressure washer to the camera or the surrounding area when cleaning the vehicle. The impact by the strong water pressure may cause the camera to come off. Also, water may enter inside the camera and cause a malfunction.
• If the camera is exposed to any impact, it may lead to malfunction

of the camera. Have the camera inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
- Do not use a steam cleaner under any circumstances. Some types of steam cleaners inject hot steam.
- The camera surface may be damaged by a flying stone.

NOTE

If the camera lens is contaminated, no sharp image is available. When the camera is contaminated with water drops, snow or mud, wash it with water and wipe away any moisture with a soft cloth. If it heavily gets dirty, wash it with a neutral detergent.

Starting and operating

7-1. Fuel 307

Fuel requirements.... 307

Fuel filler lid and cap 308

7-2. State emission testing (U.S. only).... 311

7-3. Preparing to drive.... 313

7-4. Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system) 313

Starting engine 314

Stopping the engine 315

7-5. Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system).... 315

Safety precautions.... 315

Operating range for push-button start system ..... 315

Starting engine 315

Stopping engine 317

When access key fob does not operate properly.... 318

7-6. Remote engine start system (dealer option).... 318

Remote engine starter transceiver (fob) 318

Alternate operation method for models with "keyless access with push-button start system".... 322

Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote start.... 322

Entering the vehicle following remote engine start shutdown 323

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the vehicle 323

Remote transmitter program (Remote engine starter transceiver) 323

System maintenance 323

Certification for remote engine starter 325

7-7. Continuously variable transmission ....325

Continuously variable transmission features ..... 326

Select lever 326

Selection of manual mode 328

Shift lock function 329

Driving tips 331

7-8. Power steering....331

Power steering warning light 331

Power steering system features 331

7-9. Braking....332

Braking tips 332

Brake system 332

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ....

7-10. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 334

ABS self-check 334

ABS warning light 334

7-11. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system....335

If EBD system malfunctions 335

7-12. Vehicle Dynamics Control system ......336

Safety precautions 336

System features 336

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor...... 337

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch 337

7-13. X-MODE 339

To activate/deactivate the X-MODE 340

Hill descent control function 341

Starting and operating

7-14. Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) 342
7-15. Parking your vehicle.... 343 Electronic parking brake .... 343 Parking tips .... 348
7-16. Hill start assist system.... 350
7-17. BSD/RCTA (if equipped) 351 System features.... 352 System operation .... 354 BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer .... 355 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator .... 357 BSD/RCTA warning indicator.... 358 BSD/RCTA OFF switch.... 358

Certification for the BSD/RCTA 359

Handling of radar sensors 360

7-18. Reverse Automatic Braking System (if equipped) ....360 Reverse Automatic Braking System overview .... 361 Operating conditions.... 362 Reverse Automatic Braking System operation .... 364 Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking system operation .... 367 Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF setting .... 368 RAB warning indicator .... 369 Handling of the sonar sensors .... 369

7-1. Fuel

CAUTION

• Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate fuel additive may cause damage to the engine and/or fuel system
• Some gas stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, off fuels posted as regular octane gasoline with an octane rating below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of those fuels is not recommended

■ Fuel requirements

The engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline with an octane ratio of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

▼ Fuel octane rating

Using a gasoline with a lower octane r can cause persistent and heavy knocking which can damage the engine. Do not concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill when you accelerate. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

▽ RON This octane rating is the Research Octar Number.

AKI This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

▼ Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is design to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy

▼ Reformulated gasoline

SUBARU supports the use of reformulate gasoline when available. Reformulated gasoline has been blended to burn more cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.

tingMMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light may turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU dealer for service. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

▼ Gasoline for cleaner air

Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use a high-quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaners. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should contain no more than 15% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled, E30, E50 or E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

- CONTINUED -

now producing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contain you should ask your service station operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in the following description.

• Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specifie in this manual.
• Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.
• If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they may fuel related, try a different brand of gas line before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.

- Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Fuel filler lid and cap

▼ Locations of the fuel filler lid

fuel not be 702047

▼ Refueling

Only one person should be involved in refueling. Do not allow others to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions that are posted at the service station.

1. Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and turn off all the other electrical components.

2. To unlock the fuel filler lid, perform one of the operations below.

3. Press the unlock/disarm button on the key fob.

4. Press the unlock side of the power door locking switch.

5. Turn the ignition switch to "ACC" or "LOCK"/"OFF".

6. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.

7. The fuel filler lid will open slightly. Then, open it further by hand.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap, first touch the vehicle body or a metal portion of the fuel pump or similar object to discharge any static electricity that may be present on your body. If your body is carrying an electrostatic charge, there is a

possibility that an electric spark could ignite the fuel, which could burn you. To avoid acquiring a new static electric charge, do not get back into the vehicle while refueling is in progress.

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled components 1 and 2, likely illustrating a gear or cam mechanism.

702074

1) Open
2) Close

1. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

- Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position first and then close all vehicle doors and

windows. Make sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area. Only handle fuel outdoors. Quickly wipe up any spilled fuel.

- When opening the cap, grasp it firmly and turn it slowly to the Do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck, especially in hot weather. If you hear a hissing sound while you are removing the cap, wait for the sound to stop and then slowly open the cap to prevent fuel from spraying out and creating a fire hazard.

Mechanical diagram showing two connected components with a downward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

• When refueling, insert the fuel nozzle securely into the fuel filler pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not left. fully inserted, its automatic stopping mechanism may not function, causing fuel to overflow the tank and creating a fire hazard.
• Stop refueling when the automatic stop mechanism on the fuel nozzle activates. If you continue to add fuel, temperature changes or other conditions may cause fuel to overflow from the tank and create a fire hazard.
• Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump automatically stops. Do not add any more fuel.
• Put the cap back on and turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking noise. Being certain not to catch the tether under the cap while tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tighted until it clicks to prevent fuel spin in the event of an accident.

1. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION

If you spill any fuel on the pair surface, rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged.

NOTE

• You will see the “” sign in the fu gauge. This indicates that the fuel fill door (lid) is located on the right side the vehicle.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light” P175.
• To lock the fuel filler lid, perform of the operations below. However if these operations are performed when the fuel filler lid is open, the fuel fi

will not lock when it is subsequently closed.

d - Press the lock/arm button on the ge key fob.

- Press the lock side of the power door locking switch.

- When the doors are locked or unlocked using the automatic door lock system, the fuel filler lid will be locked or unlocked at the same time.

CAUTION

• Never add any cleaning agents the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
  fuel After refueling, turn the cap to the filler right until it clicks to ensure that de ofit is fully tightened. If the cap is not securely tightened, fuel may
  leak out while the vehicle is be driven or fuel spillage could occur in the event of an accident, creating a fire hazard.
• Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
  9
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  r
  n
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  1 + u1 - 1 = ( 1 + u) u1 < 1 = u
  [Non-Text]

• m = 311
  ;
  f
  •
  na
  17
  p
  q
  5
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  (1)
  r
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]

• Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting and your fuel tank and emission control system may be damaged. It could also lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

• Immediately put fuel in the tank ed whenever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine. Continuing to operate your vehicle at an extremely low fuel level may result in a reduction of engine performance.
  •
  •
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  e
  •
  [Non-Text]
• 17
  er
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  •
  e
  c
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]
  [Non-Text]

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened of the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to malfunction or a dead battery, it can be opened from the cargo area.

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

m = 311

m = 311

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

-

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

- • • e • r • e - ▼ f næ ip g • r

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

702077

1. Remove the access cover at the right side of the cargo area trim using a flat-head screwdriver.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled parts (no readable text or symbols)

1) Clip

1. Remove the orange knob from the clip.

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing a door, seat, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

-3. Pull the orange knob, then the fuel lid will be unlocked. 4. Push the rear side of the fuel filler 5. The fuel filler lid will open slightly. Then, open it further by hand.

7-2. State emission testing (U.S. only)

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometer when testing an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model.

Testing of an AWD model must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do so will result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.

CAUTION

- At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or service station in advance not place your SUBARU AWD vehi on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.

- Resultant vehicle damage due to improper testing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of the state inspection program or its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states have Inspection/Maintenance programs to inspect your vehicle's emission control system. If your vehicle does not pass the test, some states may deny renewal of your vehicle's registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a compute that monitors the performance of the engine's emission control system. Certified emission inspectors will inspect the On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as part of the state emission inspection process. The OBDII system is designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause the vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII inspections apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of Columbia have implemented emission inspection of the OBDII system.

- The inspection of the OBDII system consists of a visual operational check of the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light/mal-function indicator light (MIL) and an ex-

amination of the OBDII system with an electronic scan tool.

- A vehicle passes the OBDII system inspection if proper operation of the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light is observed, there are no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness monitors are all complete.

- A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light is properly operating (light is illuminated or not working due to faulty LED [Light Emitting Diode]) or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in the vehicle's computer.

- A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number OBDII system readiness monitors "NOT READY" is greater than one. If the vehicle's battery has been recently replaced or disconnected, the OBDII system inspection may indicate that the vehicle not ready for the emission test. Under t condition, the vehicle driver should be instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to reset the readiness monitor and return for an emission re-inspection.

- Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their SUBARU dealer for service.

Some states still use dynamometers in

their emission inspection program. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your vehicle's wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in one place. Prior to your vehicle being put on a dynamometer, tell your emission inspector not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emission testing program have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two-wheel dynamometer. There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing program. When properly used, this equipment should not damage a SUBARU AWD vehicle.

Is Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected in an attempt to bypass AWD for state emission testing. An AWD vehicle must be tested using an AWD dynamometer with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

7-3. Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day before you start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for proper inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign leaks.
4. Check that no small animals enter t engine compartment.
5. Check that the hood and rear gate fully closed.
6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
7. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors.
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
9. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the engine.

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cooling fan and belts of the engine m result in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment or under the vehicle before starting the engine.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid should be checked daily, weekly or fuel stops.

re When towing a trailer, refer to ler hitch (dealer option)" P386

7-4. Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than 10 seconds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for 5 to 10 seconds, wait for 10 seconds or more before trying again.

aNOTE

It may be difficult to start the engine when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically-controlled throttle's self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the "ON" position for approximately 10 seconds before starting the engine.

■ Starting engine

▼ General precautions when starting engine

WARNING

• Never start the engine from outside the vehicle (except when using the remote engine start system). It may result in an accident.
• Do not leave the engine running in locations with poor ventilation such as a garage and indoors. The exhaust gas may enter the vehicle or indoors, and it may result in carbon monoxide poisoning.
• Do not start the engine near dry foliage, paper, or other flammable substances. The exhaust pipe and exhaust emissions can create a fire hazard at high temperatures.

CAUTION

- If the engine is stopped while driving, the catalyst may overheat and burn.

- When starting the engine, be sit to sit in the driver's seat (exc) when using the remote engine start system).

NOTE

• Avoid rapid racing and rapid acceleration immediately after the engine has started.
  For a short time after the engine started, the engine speed is kept h. When the warm-up is completed, the engine speed lowers automatically.
• On rare occasions, it may be difficult to start the engine depending on the fuel and the usage condition (repeat

driving of a distance in which the engine has not warmed up sufficient

In such a case, it is recommended you change to a different brand of • On rare occasions, transient knock

ing may be heard from the engine the accelerator is operated rapidly as a rapid start-up and a rapid acceleration. This is not a malfunction.

• The engine starts more easily when the headlights, air conditioner and r window defogger are turned off.

• Do not shift the select lever while starter is cranking.

• Apply the parking brake.

• Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.

• Shift the select lever to the "P" or "N" position (preferably the "P" position). The starter motor will only operate when the select lever is at the "P" or "N" position.
• Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to "Warning and indicator" P172.
  has Turn the ignition switch to the "START" position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the "START" position while depressing the accelerator pedal slightly (approximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the "START" position. If the

engine starts, quickly release the accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the "LOCK" OFF" position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the "START" position without depressing the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still does not start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.

1. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have turned off after the engine h started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make sure that the select lever is in the "P" or "N" position and that the parking brake is applied.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the select lever into the "N" position. Do not attempt to place the select lever of a moving vehicle into the "P" position.

■ Stopping the engine

The ignition switch should be turned off ur Only when the vehicle is stopped and th engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is moving. This will cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster, making steering and braking more difficult. It has could also result in accidental activation of the "LOCK"/"OFF" position on the ignition switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.

7-5. Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)

■ Safety precautions

Refer to "Safety precautions" P119.

■ Operating range for push-button start system

Refer to "Operating range for push-button start system" P166.

■ Starting engine

WARNING

• There are some general precautions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in "Starting engine" P314.
• If the indicator on the push-butating ton ignition switch flashes in green after the engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering is still locked, and it may result in an accident.

CAUTION

• When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashing in orange, there may malfunction with the vehicle. Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
• If the indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in green after the engine has started, it means that the steer is still locked. Depress the brake pedal while moving the steering wheel to the right and left, and press the push-button ignition switch.
• Do not continue pushing the push-button ignition switch for more than 10 seconds. Doing s could cause a malfunction. If the engine does not start, stop pus ing the push-button ignition switch. Instead, press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal to switch the power status to "OFF". Wait 10 seconds, and the push the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.

NOTE

- For a short time after the engine started, the engine speed is kept hi isWhen the warm-up is completed, the be engine speed lowers automatically.

- When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the brake pedal, the engine starter operates for a maximum of 10 seconds. After starting the engine, the starter stops automatically.

ring. When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the brake pedal, the engine can be started regardless of the status of the push-button ignition switch.

- If the security indicator light illuminates when you attempt to start the engine but the engine does not start, press the push-button ignition switch to switch the power to "OFF" and try to start the engine again.

- If the engine does not start, press t push-button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal to switch the power to "OFF". Then, while de pressing the brake pedal more forcefully, press the push-button ignition switch.

- The engine start procedures may no function depending on the radio wave conditions around the vehicle. In such

a case, refer to "Starting engine" has P418. - Golf the vehicle battery is discharged, - the steering cannot be unlocked. - Charge the battery. - Do not shift the select lever while the starter is cranking.

1 ENGINE START STOP 2 304877

then Operation indicator

When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the brake pedal, the engine will start. The starting procedure for the engine is as follows.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the driver's seat.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift the select lever into the "P" position. The engine can also start when the select lever is in the "N" position,

2) Push-button ignition switch

however, for safety reasons, start in the position.

1. Depress the brake pedal until the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green. When starting with the select lever in the "N" position, indicator does not turn green.
2. While depressing the brake pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

• While pressing the select lever button in, the indicator on the push-button ignition switch will not turn green even when the select lever is in the "P" position.
• In case the engine does not start by the normal engine start procedure, move the select lever to the "P" position, and switch the power to "ACC". Depress the brake pedal, and press the push-button ignition switch for at least 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only use this engine start procedure in case of emergency.
• When the engine is not started, the brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a case, depress the brake pedal more forcefully than usual. Check that the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green, and press

the push-button ignition switch to

the engine.

■ Stopping engine

1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the "P" position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch. The engine will stop, and the power will switched off.

WARNING

ttonDo not touch the push-button ven ignition switch during driving. When the push-button ignition switch is operated as follows, by the engine will stop.

- The switch is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer. the - The switch is pressed briefly 3 times or more in succession.

Only When the engine stops, the brake base booster will not function. A greater foot pressure will be required on the brake pedal.

The power steering system will not operate either. A greater force will be required to steer, and it may result in an accident.

part If the engine stops during driving,

do not operate the push-button ignition switch or open any of the doors until the vehicle is stopped in a safe location. It is dangerous because the steering lock may be activated. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, and contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

• Do not stop the engine while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.
• If the engine is stopped while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position, the power will be in "ACC". If the vehicle is left in this condition, the battery may be discharged.

eNOTE

Although you can stop the engine by operating the push-button ignition switch, do not stop the engine during driving except in an emergency.

■ When access key fob does not operate properly

Refer to "Access key fob - if access key fob does not operate properly" P417.

7-6. Remote engine start system (dealer option)

WARNING

• There are some general precautions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in "General precautions when starting engine" F P314.
• Do not remote start a vehicle in enclosed environment (e.g. closed garage). Prolonged operation of a motor vehicle in an enclosed environment can cause a harmful build-up of carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is harmful to your health. Exposure to high levels of carbon monoxide can cause headaches, dizziness or in extreme cases unconsciousness and/or death.

The remote engine start system allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. In addition, the remote engine start system can activate the heater or air conditioner, providing you with a comfortable cabin upon entry. For more details, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the re-

mote engine start system.

NOTE

• The length of time for which it is acceptable to allow the engine to remain idling may be bound by local laws and regulations. Check the local rules when using the remote engine start system.
• When taking your vehicle in for service, it is recommended that you inform the service personnel that your vehicle is equipped with a remote engine start system.

■ Remote engine starter transceiver (fob)

Diagram of a mobile phone with labeled button and circular icon, marked with number 1

701909

1) Fob button

▼ Starting the engine

NOTE

All vehicle doors (including rear gate and the engine hood must be close prior to activating the remote engine start system. Any open entry point prevent starting or cause the engine stop. For models with push-button's system, doors must also be locked prior to remote engine start activation

The remote engine start system is activated by pressing the fob button on your remote engine starter transceiver (fob) twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is with operating range of the system and the request is received, the following will occur.

• The fob flashes and beeps once.
• The horn sounds once.
• The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.

The system will check certain safety preconditions before starting, and if all conditions are met, the engine will start within 5 seconds. After the engine starts the following will occur.

• The fob flashes and beeps twice.
  • The horn sounds once.
  ● The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remote engine start system, the following will occur.

● The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights remain illuminated.
- The fob button flashes once every 3 seconds.

The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not s (or starts and stalls) the remote engine start system will power off and then attempt to start the engine 3 additional times. The system will not attempt to

test start the engine if it determines a veh malfunction is preventing starting. If the engine does not start after 3 additional attempts, the remote engine start requests will be aborted.

▼ Stopping the engine

Press and hold the fob button for at least seconds to stop the engine. The fob will flash and beep three times, indicating the engine has stopped. If the stop request not received (for example, if the user is far away from the vehicle), the fob will continue to flash once every 3 seconds. The system will automatically stop the engine after 15 minutes.

▼ Remote start safety features

For safety and security reasons, the remote engine start system will prevent starting (or stop the engine if running) and sound the horn twice if any of the following conditions is detected. In addition, the fob will flash and beep 3 times.

• The total run-time has exceeded 20 minutes.
  • The brake pedal is depressed.
  A key is in the ignition switch.
• The engine hood is open.
• The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500 rpm.
  ● The security alarm is triggered.
• The select lever is not in the "P" position.

If the system detects any door (including the rear gate) open during operation, it will prevent starting or stop the engine (for models without push-button start systems and sound the horn and flash side manner lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.

In addition to the items above, if the vehicle's engine management system determines there is a safety risk due to a vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will power down and the horn will sound 3 times.

NOTE

• If the alarm system is armed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is flashing), the alarm system will remain armed throughout the remote start run cycle.
• If the alarm system is disarmed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is not flashing), the alarm system will remain disarmed throughout the remote start run cycle.

▼ Remote start operation - fob confirmation

Your remote engine starter fob is a bidirectional transceiver that can confirm system operation with several different visual and audible indications. The fob's LED-backlit button and internal piezo buzzer will indicate status of the system using the following flash and beep sequences, provided the fob is within operational range of the system.

Precondition	Fob Indication		Meaning
	Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed	Continuous while button is held down	— The fob is transmitting an RF signal
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob button twice within 3 sec	1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
	2 flashes 2 beeps Engine	started successfully
	1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
Engine idling by remote engine start operation	1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
	3 flashes 3 beeps		Engine stopped by system time-out or for sa reasons (see sections above)
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and holding fob button for at least 3 sec.	3 flashes 3 beeps Engine	stopped by user request
	1 flash every 3 sec —		Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

Alternate operation method for models with "keyless a cess with push-button start system"

1 701405

Access key fob

1) Lock button

An access key fob can be used as the remote engine start transmitter. Operate the lock button to start or stop the eng as follows.

▼ Before starting the engine

Before using the remote engine start system to start the engine, confirm the following conditions.

• The select lever is in the "P" position.
• All doors including the rear gate are closed.

- The engine hood is closed.

● The push-button ignition switch is in the "OFF" position.

▼ When starting the engine

To start the engine with remote engine start system, briefly press the lock but to twice within 2 seconds, then press and hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The hazard warning flashers then flash once and the keyless buzzer chirps once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button briefly again. The hazard warning flashe then flash once again, and the keyless buzzer chirps once again.
3. After step 2, immediately press and hold the lock button. The hazard warning flashers then flash three times, and the horn will honk once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3, release the lock button. The engine will then start successfully.

▼ When stopping the engine

Press and hold the lock button to stop engine with remote engine start system.

▼ Remote start safety features

For detailed information, refer to "Remote start safety features" P319.

■ Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote start

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the keyless access function (if equipped) or remote keyless entry system.
   If the vehicle's doors are unlocked manually using the key, the vehicle's alarm system will trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior to activating the remote engine start system) and the engine will turn off. Perform either of the following procedures to disarm the alarm system. Refer to "Alarm system" P141.

2. Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the "ON" position (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

3. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ACC" or "ON" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

4. Press any button on the access key fob/remote keyless entry transmitter.

5. Enter the vehicle.

6. The engine will shut down when any door or rear gate is opened. For models with push-button start system, the engine will continue to run.

7. Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn to the "START" position to restart the engine.

■ Entering the vehicle followin remote engine start shut-down

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle opened by the remote keyless entry transmitter within a few seconds immediately following remote engine start shutdown.

■ Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the vehicle

After the system starts the engine, the heater or air conditioning will activate an heat or cool the interior to a set interior temperature of 72^ F ( 22^ C), with automatic selected for all other settings.

■ Remote transmitter program (Remote engine starter transceiver)

New transmitters can be programmed to the remote engine start system in the event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, damaged or additional transmitters are desired (the system will accept up to e1 transmitters). New remote engine start transmitters can be programmed according to the following procedure.

1. Open the driver's door (the driver's door must remain open throughout the entire process).

Turn the ignition switch to "ON" then "LOCK"/"OFF", back to "ON" then "LOCK" OFF, back to "ON" then "LOCK"/"OFF", then back to "ON" again and leave the ignition "ON" throughout the programming process.

1. The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights and parking lights and honk the horn three times, indicating that the system has entered the transmitter learn mode.

2. Press and release the 📄 button on the transmitter that you want to program.

3. The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights and parking lights and honk the horn one time, indicating that the system has learned the transmitter. Upon successful programming, the remote start confirmation transmitter button will flash one time.

4. Repeat step 5 for any additional transmitters (the system will accept up to eight transmitters).

5. The system will exit the transmitter learn mode if the key is turned to the LOCK"/"OFF" position, the door is closed or after 2 minutes.

■ System maintenance NOTE

For remote engine starter transceiver: In the event that the vehicle's battery is replaced, discharged or disconnected, it will be necessary to start the vehicle minimum of one time using the key prior to activating the remote engine start system. This is required to allow the vehicle electronic systems to re-synchronize.

▼ Changing the battery

CAUTION

• Do not let dust, oil or water or in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.
• Be careful not to damage the printed circuit board in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.
• Be careful not to allow children touch the battery and any removed parts; children could swallow them.
• There is a danger of explosion an incorrect replacement battery is used. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of battery. - Battery should not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

Perform the procedure described in "Replacing battery of access key fob" P469.

For remote engine starter transceiver:

The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450) supplied in your remote engine start transmitter should last approximately one year, depending on usage. When the battery begin to weaken, you will notice a decrease in range (distance from the vehicle that your remote control operates). Follow the instructions below to change the remote engine start transmitter battery.

Line drawing of a car interior with a tool interacting with the lid (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the small phillips screw located on the back side lower left corner the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start transmitter halves apart using a small fl head screwdriver.

Line drawing of a device with two open compartments and a central circular component, no text or symbols present

CR-2450 701912

1. Remove the circuit board from the bottom half of the case and remove the battery and replace with new one. Be sure to observe the (+) sign on the old battery before removing it to ensure that the new battery is inserted properly (battery “+” should be pointed away from the transmitter circuit board on battery).
2. Carefully snap the case halves back together, reinstall the phillips screw and test the remote engine start system.

■ Certification for remote engine starter

▼ U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

▼ Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

7-7. Continuously variable transmission

WARNING

Do not shift from the "P" or "N" position into the "D" or "R" position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

- Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the transmission could be damaged.

• Shift into the "P" or "R" position only after the vehicle has completely stopped.
• Do not shift from the "D" position into the "R" position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely stopped.

- Do not race the engine for more than 5 seconds in any position except the "N" or "P" position when the brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

- CONTINUED -

• Never move the vehicle as follows. Doing so may result in a unexpected accident or malfunction.
• Moving rearward by inertia with the select lever set in forward driving position.
• Moving forward by inertia with the select lever set in the position.
• When parking the vehicle, first securely apply the parking brake and then place the select lever the "P" position. Do not park for long time with the select lever any other position as doing so could result in a dead battery.

■ Continuously variable transmission features

The continuously variable transmission is electronically controlled and provides an infinite number of forward speeds and 1 reverse speed. It also has a manual mo

NOTE

- When the engine coolant temperature is still low, the transmission w shift to higher engine speeds than when the coolant temperature is sut

ciently high in order to shorten the warm-up time and improve driveability. The gearshift timing will automatic shift to the normal timing after the engine has warmed up.
a • Immediately after transmission fluid is replaced, you may feel that the transmission operation is somewhat unusual. This results from invalidatio
"R" of data which the on-board compute has collected and stored in memory allow the transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition of your vehicle. Optimized for shifting will be restored as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.

- When driving under continuous heavy load conditions such as when towing a camper or climbing a long, steep hill, the engine speed or the vehicle speed may automatically be reduced. This is not a malfunction. This results from the engine control function maintaining the cooling performance of the vehicle. The engine and vehicle speed

will return to a normal speed when the engine is able to maintain the optimum cooling performance after the heavy load decreases. Driving under a heavy load must be performed with extreme care. Do not try to pass a vehicle in front when driving on an uphill slope while towing.

- The continuously variable transmis-syion is a chain type system that pro-vvides superior transmission efficiency for maximum fuel economy. At times, depending on varying driving conditions, a chain operating sound may be heard that is characteristic of this type of system.

r Select lever to

Select lever positions

Line drawing of a tool tip pressing down on a component (no text or symbols)

701374
Select lever button

graph TD
    P["Zone P"] --> R["Zone R"]
    R --> N["Zone N"]
    N --> M["Zone M-D"]
    M --> D["Zone D"]
    style P fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style R fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style N fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style M fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style D fill:#fff,stroke:#000

→: With the brake pedal depressed, shift while pressing the select lever button in.

→: Shift while pressing the select lever button in.

→: Shift without pressing the select lever button.

The select lever has four positions, "P", "R", "N", "D" and it also has a manual for using the manual mode.

NOTE

For some models, to protect the engine while the select lever is in the "P" position, the engine is controlled so that the engine speed may not be too high even if the accelerator peo depressed hard.

▼ P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle starting the engine. In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the parking brake firmly, then shift to the "P" position. Do not hold the vehicle with on the mechanical friction of the transmission

To shift the select lever from the "P" position to any other position, you should depress the brake pedal fully then move the select lever. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.

▼ R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle. Shift from the "N" to "R" position, stop the vehicle completely then move the lever to the "R" position while pressing the select gate lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, movement gine the select lever from the "N" to "R" position is possible for a limited time per by depressing the brake pedal, and then becomes impossible. For details, refer to a Shift lock function" P329.

▼ N (Neutral)

this position is for restarting a stalled engine. In this position, the transmission is neutral, meaning that the wheels and transmission are not locked. Therefore, the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in neutral. Engine braking has no effect in this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the select lever in the "N" position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.

NOTE

If the select lever is in the "N" position when you stop the engine for parking, you may not subsequently be able to move it to the "R" and "P" positions. This happens, turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. You will then be able to move the select lever to the "P" position.

▼ D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving. The transmission shifts automatically and continuously into a suitable gear according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require. Also, while driving up and down a hill, the transmission assists and controls the driving performance and engine braking while corresponding to the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in "position, depress the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. transmission will automatically downshift. In this case, the transmission will operate like a conventional automatic transmission. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original ge position.

If one of the shift paddles behind the steering wheel is operated while driving in the "D" position, the transmission will temporarily switch to the manual mode. In this mode, you can shift to any gear position using the shift paddles. For details about the manual mode, refer to "Selection of manual mode" P328. Once the vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission will switch from the manual mode back to the "D" position for normal driving.

■ Selection of manual mode

Line drawing of a hand inserting a small object into a device (no text or symbols)

The
701379

With the vehicle either moving or stationary, move the select lever from the "D" position to the "M" position to select the manual mode.

1 2 3 701769

1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator and upshift indicator and/or downshift indicator on the combination meter illuminate.

The gear position indicator shows the currently selected gear in the 1st-to-8th-gear range. The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gear shift is possible. When the upshift indicator "▲" illuminates, upshifting is possible. When the downshift indicator "▼" illuminates, downshifting is possible. When both indicators illuminate, upshifting and downshifting are both possible. When the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic signals) the gear will be automatically

shifted to the 1st position and the down shift indicator will turn off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

701787

To upshift to the next higher gear position, pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated on it. To downshift to the next lower gear position, pull the shift paddle that has “-” indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the select lever to the "D" position from the position.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on shift paddles. Doing so may result accidental gear shifting.

NOTE

Please read the following points can fully and bear them in mind when the manual mode.

- If you attempt to shift down when engine speed is too high, i.e., when downshift would push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone, beeps be emitted to warn you that the do shift is not possible.

- If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the transmission will not respond.

- You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from 4th to 2nd) by opera the shift paddle twice in rapid succession.

- The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle stops moving.

If the temperature of the transmission fluid becomes too high, the "AT OIL TEMP" warning light on the co

nation meter will illuminate. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe loc and let the engine idle until the wa light turns off.

■Shift lock function

The shift lock function helps prevent the improper operation of the select lever.

• The select lever cannot be operated unless the ignition switch is turned to the "using" position and the brake pedal is depressed.
  The select lever cannot be moved from the "P" position to any other position before the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the brake pedal first, and then operate the select lever.
• Only the "P" position allows you to turn the ignition switch from the "ACC" position is the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and remove the key from the ignition switch.
• If the ignition switch is turned to the "DCK"/"OFF" position while the select lever is in the "N" position, the select may not be moved to the "P" position a period of time. Therefore, move the select lever to the "P" position with the brake pedal depressed soon after the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.

▼ Shift lock release

The select lever cannot be operated, turn the ignition switch back to the "ON" position then move the select lever to the "P" position with the select lever button pressed and brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, perform

- CONTINUED -

the following steps.

- When the select lever cannot be shifted from "P" to "N":

Refer to "Shift lock release using the shift lock release button" P330.

- When the select lever cannot be shifted from "N" to "R" or "P":

Within 60 seconds after placing the ignition switch in the "ACC" position, move the select lever to the "P" position with the select lever button pressed and brake pedal depressed.

If you must perform the above procedure the shift lock system (or the vehicle con system) may be malfunctioning. Contact SUBARU dealer for an inspection as so as possible.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, refer to "Shift lock release using the shift lock release button" P330.

▼ Shift lock release using the shift lock release button

Perform the following procedure to release the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.

Line drawing of a hand inserting a small component into a car interior (no text or symbols)

e.2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to are remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock omelease button is located under the shift lock cover.

Illustration of a screwdriver with a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the grip portion of the screw-driver.

Diagram of a hand using a tool to adjust a car interior (no text or symbols visible)

1. While depressing the brake pedal, insert a screwdriver into the hole, move it right and left while pushing the shift lock release button using a screwdriver, and then move the select lever.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, the shift lock system may be malfunctioning. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

■ Driving tips

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, driving torque may be restrained. This is not a malfunction.

• Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in the "D" "R" position.
  ● Always apply the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the mechanical friction of the transmission.
• Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade using the "D" position. Use the brake instead.
• The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standst. This does not indicate a malfunction.

7-8. Power steering

■ Power steering warning light

702055

■ Power steering system features

The vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering system. When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the power steering warning light on the combination meter illuminates to inform the driver that the warning system is functioning properly. Then, if the engine started, the warning light turns off to inform the driver that the steering power assist is operational.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering wheel is operated. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent the system components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from overheating.

• The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low speeds, such as while frequently turning the steering wheel during parallel parking.
  The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period time.

At this time, there will be more resistance when steering. However, this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steering

- CONTINUED -

wheel is not operated for a while: the power steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However, if the power steering is operated in non-standard way which causes power assist limitation to occur too frequent, this may result in a malfunction of power steering control system.

and-9. Braking

Braking tips WARNING

the Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads.

▼ When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the veh at a safe speed while lightly depressing brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

▼ Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake pads. To prevent this, shift to a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.

▼ Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

■ Brake system

▼ Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake systems. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system should fail, the other half of the system still works. If one circuit fails, the brake pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual and you will need to press it down much harder. A much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehicle.

the Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster completely stops functioning. However, if this happens, you will have to depress the pedal much harder than during normal braking, and the braking distance will increase.

▼ Supplemental booster function when vacuum pressure fails

While the ignition switch is turned "ON" and the engine is running, the supplemental booster function operates when a brake booster performance is decreased due to insufficient vacuum boost.

When the brake pedal is depressed with the supplemental booster function is operating, an operation sound and brake pe vibration may be generated. This is not malfunction.

▼ Brake assist system

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the brake assist. It is not a system that brings more braking ability to the vehicle beyond its braking capability. Always use the utmost care when driving regarding vehicle speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly, continue depressing the brake pedal strongly to bring the effect of the brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system. It assists the brake power when the driver cannot depress the brake pedal strongly and the brake power is insufficient. Brake assist generates the brake power according to the speed at which the driver depresses the brake pedal.

eNOTE

When you depress the brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the following will occur. However, even though these occur, they do not indicate any malfunctions, and the brake assist system is operating properly.

- You might feel that the brake pedal applied by lighter force and generates greater braking force.

• You might hear an ABS operating noise from the engine compartment.

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators

Pure technical line drawing of a mechanical component without any text, numbers, or symbols

The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer.

7-10. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with the ABS could easily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

- The ABS does not always decrease stopping distance. You should always maintain a safe

following distance from other vehicles.

- When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy roads, over deep newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS one without. Therefore, when driving under these conditions, reduce your speed and leave ample distance from other vehicles.

When tire chains are installed, stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS than one without. Be sure to reduce your speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.

- When you feel the ABS operating, you should maintain constant brake pedal pressure. Do not pump the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS.

■ ABS self-check

Just after the vehicle is started, you may feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar to when the ABS operates, and you may also hear the sound of the ABS working

from the engine compartment. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS being carried out and does not indicate a malfunction.

ABS warning light

thRefer to "ABS warning light" P179.

7-11. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of braking force. It functions by adjusting the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels in accordance with the vehicle's loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS and uses some of the ABS components to perform its function of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components used by the EBD system malfunction, the EBD system also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slide vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

■ If EBD system malfunctions

ABS / (ABS) BRAKE / (!) 701756

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the system stops working and the following warning lights illuminate simultaneously.

• Brake system warning light
  ●ABS warning light
  Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

If the both warning light remains on even though the parking brake is released, the brake fluid level may be low or there could be a problem with the EBD system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact a Subaru dealer.

WARNING

• Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains illuminated, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.
• If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

7-12. Vehicle Dynamics Control system

■ Safety precautions

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system could easily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

• Even if your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, winter tires should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having a Vehicle Dynamics Control system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.
• Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is an indication that the road on which the vehicle is traveling has a slippery surface; since having

Vehicle Dynamics Control is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times an under all conditions, its activation should be seen as a sign to the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.

• Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle, have an inspection of that system performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
• The following precautions should be observed in order to ensure that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating properly:

- All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear should be the same for all fo tires.

- Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's side door pillar.

- Use only the spare tire that is shown on the tire placard to replace a flat tire. With a temporary spare tire, the ef-

and that

fectiveness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is reduced and this should be taken into account when driving the vehicle in such a condition.

• If non-matching tires are used, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may not operate correctly.
• The Vehicle Dynamics Control system helps prevent unstable vehicle motion such as skidding using control of the brakes and engine power. Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unless it is absolutely necessary. If you must turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, drive very carefully according to the road surface conditions.

■ System features

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding on a slippery road surface and/or during cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system adjusts the engine's output and the wheels' respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

• Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to prevent spinning of the driving wheels on slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to maintain traction and directional control. Activation of this function is shown by flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.

- Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional stability by suppressing the wheels' tendency to slide sideways during steering operations. Activation of this function is shown by flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.

NOTE

- The Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.

- Slight twitching of the brake pedal is felt.

- The vehicle or steering wheel shakes to a small degree.

- An operating sound from the engine compartment is heard briefly when starting the engine and when driving off after starting the engine.

- The brake pedal seems to jolt

when driving off after starting the engine.

- In the circumstances shown in the following list, the vehicle may be stable than it feels to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system may therefore operate. Such operation do not indicate a system malfunction.

- On gravel-covered or rutted roads

- On unfinished roads

- When the vehicle is towing a trailer

- When the vehicle is fitted with snow tires or winter tires

Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will cause operation of the steering wheel to feel slightly different compared to that for normal conditions.

- It is always important to reduce speed when approaching a corner, even if your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

- Always turn off the engine before replacing a tire. Failure to do so m render the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unable to operate correctly.

■ Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor

Refer to "Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light" P183 and "Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light" P184.

■ Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

of 702050

Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Creating adequate driving wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may help to recover from the loss of traction. Use the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as necessary.

- CONTINUED -

• A standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or otherwise slippery surface
• Extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

OFF 701757

When the switch is pressed with the ignition switch in the "ON" position, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated and the vehicle will behave like a model not equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system. When the switch is pressed again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off. With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system deactivated, traction and stability enhancement offered by the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is unavailable. Therefore, you should not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except under the above-mentioned situations.

NOTE

- When the switch has been pressed to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system automatically reactivates itself the next time the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and the engine is restarted. - If the switch is held down for 30 seconds or longer, the indicator light turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is activated, and the system ignores any further pressing of the switch. To make the switch usable again, turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and restart the engine.

When the switch is pressed to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the vehicle's running performance is comparable to that of a vehicle that does not have a Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except when absolutely necessary.

- Even when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is deactivated, components of the brake control system may still activate. When the brake control system is activated, the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light flashes.

7-13. X-MODE

WARNING

• Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with X-MODE could easily lead a serious accident.
• Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with hill descent control function could easily lead to a serious accident. Be especially careful, and depress the brake pedal if necessary when driving on extremely steep downhill, frozen, muddy or sandy roads. Failure to control the vehicle's speed may cause a loss of control and result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

- Even if your vehicle is equipped with X-MODE, winter tires should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having X-

MODE does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.

- Activate the X-MODE when you encounter a very slippery surface at low speed. However, having X-MODE is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions. When activating X-MODE, the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.

- Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle, have the system inspected by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

- Observe the following precautions in order to ensure that X-MODE is operating properly:

• All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Further more, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires.
• Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the label attached to the vehicle's door pillar.

- Use only the spare tire that shown in tire placard to replace a flat tire. With a normal temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of the X-MODE is reduced and this should be taken into account when driving the vehicle in such a condition.

- If the hill descent control function has operated continuously for a long time, the temperature of the brake disc may increase and the hill descent control function may be temporarily disabled. In this case, the hill descent control indicator will disappear. When the hill descent control indicator disappears, the hill descent control function is disabled.

X-MODE is the integrated control system of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics Control system, etc. for driving with back road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can drive more comfortably even in slippery road conditions including uphill and downhill.

X-MODE has the following functions.

- Hill descent control function:

Using the hill descent control function, you can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is likely to increase, the brake control system will be activated to adjust the vehicle speed.

- Driving ability control:

This mode increases the hill-climbing ability and driving ability as well as enabling smooth application of torque for easier control of the steering wheel.

■ To activate/deactivate the X-MODE

X-MODE 702051

X-MODE switch

u ed m 701933

To activate:

Press the X-MODE switch. While the X-MODE is activated, the X-MODE indicator appears.

To deactivate:

Press the X-MODE switch again. The X-MODE indicator will disappear when the MODE is deactivated.

NOTE

- Even if you try to activate the X-tem MODE by pressing the X-MODE switch when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, the X-MODE request will not be accepted. At this time, a buzzer will sound twice.

- If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h) or more while the X-MODE is activated, a buzzer will sound once and the X-MODE will be canceled.

- While the engine is running, if any of the following conditions is met, the X-MODE will be canceled. In this case, it is not possible to activate the X-MODE.

- The CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illuminates.

- The AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes.

- The ABS warning light illuminates.

- The Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light illuminates.

- If the engine could overheat because of a temperature increase of the engine coolant, it may not be possible to activate the X-MODE. Even while the X-MODE is activated, the X-MODE will be deactivated when the engine coolant temperature increases.

■ Hill descent control function

The hill descent control function will be standby mode when the X-MODE is activated and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

The function will operate when the vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less than approximately 10%.

The function will turn off when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 18 mph (30 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is depressed.

CAUTION

The braking power of the hill descent control function may not be sufficient when strong braking power is needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

• Even while the hill descent control function is operating, you can vary vehicle speed using the brake pedal accelerator pedal.
• During braking by the hill descent control function, the hill descent control indicator will flash.
  • The hill descent control function is

operable regardless of the gradient in the road.
• The hill descent control function may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.
- An operating sound is heard briefly from the engine compartment while the hill descent contr function is operating.
- The sensation of depressing the brake pedal is different, (harder than usual etc.) when the brake pedal is depressed during hill descent control function operation.

▼ Hill descent control indicator

the or 701931

This indicator appears while the hill descent control function is in the standby mode. It flashes while the function is

operating. It will disappear when the function is in the disabled mode. When this function is changed from operational to non-operational, it will disappear when the vehicle speed reaches more than approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

The status of hill descent control is shown on the multi-function display. For details, refer to "Prevention safety screen" a P208.

7-14. Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

Diagram of a car tire safety system with two circular components and a warning symbol (no text or labels)

The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

WARNING

- If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise, an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe location.
(3) Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the door pillar on the driver's side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a very short distance, the tires get warm and their pressures increase accordingly. Be sure to let the tires cool thoroughly before adjusting their pressures to the standard values shown on the tire placard. Refer to "Tires and wheels" P447. The tire pressure monitoring system does

not function when the vehicle is stationary. After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS rechecking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

- When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

- When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your near SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel, there is no damage to it and if sealant residue is properly cleaned off. Do not inject any liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

dNOTE

ingThis device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This de-restice may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

if FCC CAUTION

if Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal parts in the cargo area. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly.

7-15. Parking your vehicle

Electronic parking brake

t 1 2 3 4 702071

1) Parking brake switch
2) Indicator light
3) Release the electronic parking brake
4) Apply the electronic parking brake

WARNING

• Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that you turn off the engine. Otherwise, the parking brake may be released and an accident may occur.
• If the brake system warning light turns on, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your

- CONTINUED -

vehicle in a safe location, use stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving and contact your SUBARU dealer.
- If you operate the electronic parking brake when the brake is over heated or the vehicle is on a slope, the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash. In this case, the vehicle may sit to move and it may lead to an accident. Always use the tire stops.

ire function" P329.
- Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.
● Never drive with the parking brake applied. Doing so will cause unnecessary wear on the brake pads. Before driving off, always make sure that the parking brake has been released and the brake system warning light has turned off.

CAUTION

- When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction and the parking brake cannot be applied, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection. If you have to park your vehicle in such conditions, perform the following procedure.

• Stop your vehicle in a flat location.
• Shift the select lever in the "position. When the select lever cannot be shifted into the "P" position, you must release shift lock. Refer to "Shift lock

Your vehicle is equipped with an electric parking brake. You can apply/release the parking brake by operating the parking brake switch.

To apply: Depress the brake pedal and pull up the parking brake switch.

To release: Press the parking brake switch firmly while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position and the brake pedal is depressed.

When the parking brake is applied while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch illuminate. Refer to "Brake system warning light (red)" P179.

NOTE

- If you press the parking brake switch under the following conditions, the parking brake will not be released.

- The ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "LOCK"/"OFF" position. - You are not depressing the brake pedal.

- The electronic parking brake system uses motors to apply the parking brake. Therefore, operating sounds from the motors will be heard when applying or releasing the parking brake. Make sure that the motor sounds are heard when applying or releasing the parking brake.

- If you operate the parking brake switch under the following conditions, a chirp will sound and the electronic parking brake indicator light will flash. - When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction. - When the electronic parking brake operation is prohibited temporarily.

- When you cannot release the parking brake due to, for example, a system malfunction, contact your SUBARU dealer and have your SUBARU dealer release the parking brake.

- If you stop operating the electronic parking brake switch midway or oper-

ate extremely slowly, the system may applied after the ignition switch detect an error and turn on the brake turned OFF.

system warning light. However, this does not indicate a malfunction if the brake system warning light turns off after operating the switch. This is a normal operating sound any of these conditions. Automatic release function by

- When the electronic parking brake has not been used for a long period of time, the electronic parking brake may operate automatically after the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position. This occurs due to checking the proper operation of the electronic accelerator pedal. The parking brake will be automatically released by depressing the accelerator pedal. However, the automatic release function does not operate under the following conditions.

parking brake and does not indicate a Any door (other than the trunk lid) is malfunction. Open.

- If you cannot release the electronic. The driver's seatbelt is not fastened. parking brake due to the switch malfunction, refer to the instructions described in "Automatic release function by accelerator pedal" P345. If the parking brake is automatically released, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch turn off

After activating the electronic parking brake, you may hear a short sound several minutes after the electronic parking brake indicator light illuminates as the system confirms proper engagement. This sound is different from the apply and release sound. This can occur:

- If the brakes are extremely hot. Depressing the accelerator pedal - If the car is parked on a steep. Depressing the brake pedal again incline.

- If the electronic parking brake is

WARNING

• Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold function on a steep hill or slippery road. The vehicle may move even when using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, causing serious injury or accidents.

- Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold function to park the vehicle. The vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents. Make sure to shift the select lever to the "P" position and apply the electronic parking brake in the following cases.

- When you are going to park your vehicle

- When passengers are getting in or out of the vehicle

- When you are loading or un loading

- When using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, do not release the brake pedal before the Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator illuminates. The vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents.

- Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold function in the following cases.

- CONTINUED -

Otherwise, the vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents.

• When washing your vehicle in an automatic car wash
• When being towed

CAUTION

• When stopping on a steep slope with the Auto Vehicle Hold function turned on, the electronic parking brake may be automatically applied. Then the electronic parking brake indicator light will flash. In such a case, depress a hold the brake pedal while stopping. Otherwise, the vehicle may move.
• When being towed, turn off the Auto Vehicle Hold function.

NOTE

We recommend turning on the Auto Vehicle Hold function when stopping on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned off, the vehicle may roll backward when driving off.

∇ To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle Hold function

AVH 702052

Auto Vehicle Hold switch

and

AVH

702057
Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light

To turn on:

Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch when the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light is off. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will illuminate.

To turn off:

Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch when the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light illuminates. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will turn off.

NOTE

• When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction while the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned on, a chirp will sound, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will turn off and the brake system warning light will turn on.
• If you press and hold the Auto Vehicle Hold switch for more than 30 seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will turn off, and the system will ignore any further pressing of the switch. To activate the switch again, restart the engine.
• When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is deactivated while the Auto Vehicle Hold function has a malfunction, if you press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch, a chirp will sound.

To operate the Auto Vehicle Hold To release the Auto Vehicle function

Stop the vehicle by depressing the brakePerform any of the following operations pedal when all of the following conditionsrelease the Auto Vehicle Hold function.

are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold function will operate.

• All doors are closed.
• The driver's seatbelt is fastened.
• The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

Diagram of a car dashboard with two circular gauges and a control panel (no text or symbols)

Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator While the vehicle is kept held by the A Vehicle Hold function, the Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light will illuminate.

• Depress the accelerator pedal.
• Depress the brake pedal again.
• Apply the electronic parking brake.
• Shift the select lever to the "P" position with the brake pedal pressed.
• Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch with the brake pedal pressed.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is released, the Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light will turn off.

Under any of the following conditions, the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be automatically released and the electronic parking brake will be automatically applied.

• The Auto Vehicle Hold function has been in operation for 10 minutes.
• The driver's seatbelt is unfastened.

light The ignition switch is turned to the AutoLOCK"/"OFF" position.

• The vehicle is stopped on a steep slope.
• The Auto Vehicle Hold function is malfunctioning.

In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold

operation indicator light will turn off and the electronic parking brake indicator light will illuminate.

Tips

- When the electronic parking brake is automatically applied with the vehicle kept held by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, release the electronic parking brake by either of the following operations before starting off. Then make sure that the electronic parking brake indicator light is off.

- Depress the accelerator pedal with the driver's seatbelt fastened and with the doors closed.

• Press the electronic parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.
• Under certain conditions, including a malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning message will appear on the combination meter display (color LCD). All warning messages should be strictly observed.
• On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot be kept held by the Auto Vehicle Hold function. In such a case, depress and hold the brake pedal.
• When holding on a steep slope with the Auto Vehicle Hold function activated, the electronic parking brake may automatically applied after stopping, then the

electronic parking brake indicator light may flash. In such a case, depress and hold the brake pedal while held. Otherwise, the vehicle may move. When getting out of the vehicle, stop the vehicle on a surface, then apply the electronic parking brake.

• If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light does not illuminates even after pressing the Auto Vehicle Hold switch with the operating conditions met, the function may have a malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
• You may hear a sound while the Auto Vehicle Hold function is keeping your vehicle held. This is normal, and does not represent a malfunction.
• While the vehicle is kept held by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not malfunction.
• When using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, depress the brake pedal firmly. Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold may not operate.
• When the Auto Vehicle Hold switch is pressed and held for more than 30 seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will turn off and further operation of the switch will be ignored. To make the switch usable again, turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and

then turn it to the "ON" position.

▼ Emergency brake

Use the emergency brake only in case of an emergency. If the emergency brake is excessively used, the brake parts will wear down faster than the brake may not work sufficiently due to brake overheating.

NOTE

While using the emergency brake: of The electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on parking brake switch illuminate and chirp sounds.

A sound may be heard from the engine compartment. This is the operating sound of the brake that is activated by the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, and does not indicate a malfunction.

If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can stop the vehicle by pulling the parking brake switch continuously.

While applying the emergency brake, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.

▼ Electronic parking brake system warning

If the brake system warning light turns on, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in the nearest safe location and contact your SUBARU dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the electronic parking brake system, the brake system warning light turns on. Refer to "Electronic parking brake light" P180.

the a ■ Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always perform the following items.

Apply the parking brake firmly. Put the select lever in the "P" position.

Never rely on the mechanical friction of the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

Top-down line drawing of a car parked on a tree next to a road with a brick wall and a vehicle (no text or symbols)

When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the curb.

Top-down line drawing of a car parked on a tree-lined road next to a brick wall and a car (no text or symbols)

When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb.

WARNING

• Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people.
• Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come near hot engine or exhaust system parts.
• Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION

- If your vehicle has a bumper under guard (optional), pay attention to blocks and other obstruc-

tions on the ground when parking. The underspoiler could be damaged by contact with them.

d. The braking power of the parking brake may not be sufficient when stronger braking power is needed (e.g., when parking on a steep slope while towing a trailer).

7-16. Hill start assist system

WARNING

• The Hill start assist system is a device only for helping the driver to START the vehicle on an uphill grade. To prevent accidents when the vehicle is parked on a slope, be sure to firmly set the parking brake. When setting the parking brake, make sure that the vehicle remains stationary when the brake pedal is released.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position while the Hill start assist system is operating. The Hill start assist system will be deactivated and may lead to an accident.

The Hill start assist system is a device make the following vehicle operations easier.

1 A 2 701994

1) Starting forward facing uphill
2) Starting backward facing downhill
A) Brake pedal

When the vehicle has stopped with the brake pedal depressed, the Hill start assist system operates under the following con-

ditions.

Braking power is maintained temporarily (for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill start assist system after the brake pedal is released. The driver is therefore able to start the vehicle in the same way as on a level grade, just using the accelerator pedal.

If the braking power of the Hill start assist system is insufficient after the brake pedal is released, apply more braking power by depressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may not operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill start assist system does not operate in the following cases.

Two identical illustrations of a car on a slope with trees, showing motion direction (no text or symbols)

- When starting backward facing uphill

- When starting forward facing downhill

● While the parking brake is applied

- While the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "LOCK"/"OFF" position

• While the Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light is illuminated. Refer to "Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light" P183.

When using the Hill start assist system, braking effect may be felt even after the brake pedal has been released.

CAUTION

The braking power of the Hill start assist system may not be sufficient when strong braking power is needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle begins to move forward after being reversed.

7-17. BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross Traffic Alert.

These functions enable the system to detect objects or vehicles to the rear, drawing attention to the driver when changing a lane or when driving in reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving safely. Always be sure to check the surroundings when changing lanes or reversing the vehicle. The system is designed to assist the driver to change lanes or reverse safely by monitoring the rear and side areas of the vehicle. However, you cannot rely on this system alone in assuring the safety during a lane change or reversing. Overconfidence in this system could result in an accident and lead to serious injury or death. Since the system operation has various limitations, the flashing or illumination of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may be delayed or it may not operate at all even when a vehicle is present

- CONTINUED -

in a neighboring lane or approaching from either side.

The driver is responsible for paying attention to the rear and side areas of the vehicle.

■ System features

BSD/RCTA consists of the following functions.

• To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on a adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at high speeds (Blind Spot Detection)
• To detect a vehicle approaching from the right or left while reversing the vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses radar sensors for the above functions.

NOTE

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been certified by the radio wave related laws of the U.S., Canada and Mexico. When driving in other countries, certification of the country where the vehicle is driven must be obtained. For certification in the U.S., Canada and Mexico, refer to "Certification for the BSD/RCTA" P359.

▼ Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

graph TD
    A["Top Lane"] --> B["Left Lane"]
    A --> C["Right Lane"]
    D["Left Lane"] --> E["Left Lane"]
    D --> F["Right Lane"]
    G["Left Lane"] --> H["Left Lane"]
    G --> I["Right Lane"]
    J["Top Lane"] --> K["Left Lane"]
    J --> L["Right Lane"]
    M["Left Lane"] --> N["Left Lane"]
    M --> O["Right Lane"]
    P["Left Lane"] --> Q["Left Lane"]
    P --> R["Right Lane"]
    S["Left Lane"] --> T["Left Lane"]
    S --> U["Right Lane"]
    V["Left Lane"] --> W["Left Lane"]
    V --> X["Right Lane"]
    Y["Left Lane"] --> Z["Left Lane"]
    Y --> AA["Right Lane"]
    AB["Left Lane"] --> AC["Left Lane"]
    AB --> AD["Right Lane"]
    AE["Left Lane"] --> AF["Left Lane"]
    AE --> AG["Right Lane"]
    AH["Left Lane"] --> AI["Left Lane"]
    AH --> AJ["Right Lane"]
    AK["Left Lane"] --> AL["Left Lane"]
    AK --> AM["Right Lane"]
    AN["Left Lane"] --> AO["Left Lane"]
    AN --> AP["Right Lane"]
    AQ["Left Lane"] --> AR["Left Lane"]
    AQ --> AS["Right Lane"]
    AT["Left Lane"] --> AU["Left Lane"]
    AT --> AV["Right Lane"]
    AW["Left Lane"] --> AX["Left Lane"]
    AW --> AY["Right Lane"]
    AZ["Left Lane"] --> BA["Left Lane"]
    AZ --> BB["Right Lane"]
    BC["Left Lane"] --> BD["Left Lane"]
    BC --> BE["Right Lane"]
    BF["Left Lane"] --> BG["Left Lane"]
    BF --> BH["Right Lane"]
    BI["Left Lane"] --> BJ["Left Lane"]
    BI --> BK["Right Lane"]
    BL["Left Lane"] --> BM["Left Lane"]
    BL --> BN["Right Lane"]
    BO["Left Lane"] --> BP["Left Lane"]
    BO --> BQ["Right Lane"]
    BR["Left Lane"] --> BS["Left Lane"]
    BR --> BT["Right Lane"]
    BU["Left Lane"] --> BV["Left Lane"]
    BU --> BW["Right Lane"]
    BX["Left Lane"] --> BY["Left Lane"]
    BX --> BZ["Right Lane"]

1) Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers follows.

- If the system detects a vehicle in the blind spot, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will illuminate.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and dashboard components with no text or symbols

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

- If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will flash.

▽ Lane Change Assist (LCA)

701406

1) Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers follows.

• If the system detects a vehicle approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will illuminate.
• If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction which the BSD/RC7 approach indicator light is illuminating, the corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will flash.

▼ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

701460

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another vehicle approaching from either side when driving in reverse. This feature helps the driver check the rear and side areas of t vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side while moving backward, it warns the driver of dangers in the following way.

• The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
● A warning buzzer sounds.
- An icon appears on the rear view camera screen (audio/navigation monitor)

Limitations of the detectability of RCTA

Since the detectability of RCTA is limited, the RCTA may not operate properly in angled parking.

A B 1 2 701818

Example 1

1) The detection range of the radar sensors 2) Area out of detection range of the radar sensors
A) Vehicle that may not be detected
B) Parked vehicle

WARNING

An approaching vehicle (A) may not be detected because the detection range is limited by the parked vehicle (B). Always be sure to check surroundings when reversing the vehicle.

C 1 701819

Example 2

1) The detection range of the radar sensors
C) Vehicle that may be detected

NOTE

The system may detect that a vehicle have your vehicle inspected at a (C) is passing in front of your vehicle. SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Always be sure to check the surround- - When a malfunction occurs in things when reversing the vehicle. system, including the BSD/RCTA

■ System operation

t▼ Operating conditions

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of following conditions are met.

theThe ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

• The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
  ● The vehicle is driven at speeds above mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
• The select lever is in the "R" position (RCTA only).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the following situations.

● The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on.
- The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10

km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator remains off (except when rever-sing).

NOTE

• In the following case, the BSD/RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will appear. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears,
  have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

- When a malfunction occurs in system, including the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

- In the following cases, the BSD/RCTA will temporarily stop operating (or may stop operating) and the BSD/RECTA OFF indicator will appear.

• When the radar sensor becomes significantly misaligned (If the orientation of the radar sensor is shifted for any reason, readjustment is required. Have the sensor adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)
• When a large amount of snow or ice sticks to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensors
• When the vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road or in an environment in which there are no objects around (such as in a desert) for a long time
• When the temperature around the radar sensors increased excessively due to long driving on uphill grades in summer, etc.
• When the temperature around the radar sensors becomes extremely low
• When the vehicle battery voltage lowers
• When the vehicle battery becomes overvoltage

When the above conditions are corrected, the BSD/RCTA will resume op-

eration and the BSD/RCTA OFF indica- with a low body height such as tor will disappear. However, if the BSD/sports cars or a trailer with no RCTA OFF indicator has appeared for acargo)

prolonged time, have the system in- spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon possible.

- The detectability of the radar sensors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA detection may be impaired and the system may not operate properly under the following conditions.

- When the rear bumper around radar sensors is distorted

- When ice, snow or mud adheres to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensors

- When stickers, etc. are affixed on the areas of the radar sensors on the rear bumper

– During adverse weather conditions such as rain, snow or fog

- When driving on wet roads such as snow-covered roads or through puddles

- The radar sensors may not detect may have difficulty detecting the following.

- Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, stationary objects on the road or road side, etc.

- Vehicles with body shapes that the radar may not reflect (vehicles

- Vehicles that are not approach on your vehicle even though they are the detection area (either on a neighboring lane to the rear or side your vehicle when reversing) system(The system determines the presence of approaching vehicles based on data detected by the sensors.)

- Vehicles traveling at significantly different speeds

- Vehicles driving parallel to your vehicle at almost the same speed for a prolonged time

- Oncoming vehicles

- Vehicles in a lane beyond the neighboring lane

- Vehicles travelling at a significantly lower speed that you are trying to overtake

- On a road with extremely narrow lanes, the system may detect vehicles driving in a lane next to the neighborhood.

- When the 8-inch audio/navigation system is performing a software update, the RCTA warning icons may be displayed on the audio/navigation screen until the update is complete.

■ BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer

When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will operate to alert the driver when there are vehicles in the neighboring lanes. When reversing the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and warning buzzer will operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is approaching from the left or right side.

▼ BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

701784

Starting and operating

or RSD/RCTA approach indicator light It is mounted in each side of the outside mirrors.

The indicator light will illuminate when a vehicle approaching from behind is detected.

The indicator light will flash to warn the driver of dangers under the following conditions.

• While the indicator light illuminates, if you operate the turn signal lever toward the side in which this light turned on.
• When reversing the vehicle while the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side.

▼ BSD/RCTA approach indicator light dimming function

When the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

• You may have difficulty recognizing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light under the following conditions.
• When affected by direct sunlight
• When affected by the headlight beams from the vehicles behind
• While the illumination brightness control dial is in the fully upward position, even if the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will not be reduced. For details about the illumination brightness control dial, refer to “illumination brightness control” P171.

▼ BSD/RCTA approach warning buzzer (only when reversing)

A warning buzzer sounds along with flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume can be changed by operating the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

▼ Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCT approach indicator light/warning buzzer

- In the following cases, operation of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings.

• When a vehicle moves to the neighboring lane from a lane next to the neighboring lane
• When driving on a steep incline or on repeated sharp uphill and downhill grades
• When going beyond a pass
• When both your vehicle and a vehicle driving on a neighboring lane are driving on the far side of each
• When several narrowly-spaced vehicles are approaching in a row

• In low radius bends (tight bends or when making turns at an intersection)

• When there is a difference in height between your lane and the neighboring lane

• Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA OFF switch
• Immediately after the select lever is shifted to the "R" position
• When extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the cargo area

During reversing, operation of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings under the following conditions.

- When backing out of an angled parking space

- When a large-sized vehicle is parked next to your vehicle (That vehicle prevents the propagation of radar waves.)

- When reversing on sloped roads

- When reversing at a high speed

Line drawing of a car on an elevated track with an inset showing a close-up of the front wheel (no text or symbols)

• The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may illuminate when driving close solid objects on the road or road side as guardrails, tunnels or sidewalls).
• The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash when turning at an inter section in urban areas or a multilane intersection.
• The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash and the warning buzzer may sound if a building or a wall exists the reversing direction.
• In the following cases, the system may detect a vehicle driving two lanes away from your vehicle.

- When you are driving on the near side of its lane from the correspond vehicle

- When the vehicle driving two lanes

0

away is driving on the near side of lane from your vehicle

■ BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

▼ System temporary stops

MPG 1 BSD/RCTA Disabled OFF 2 uch OFF R 图 842.0 7452 mi 702219

1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the system used under the following conditions.

Extremely high or low temperatures
- When abnormal voltage exists for the vehicle battery
- When the radar sensor is significantly misaligned

Once the above conditions are corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will dis-

appear. If the indicator remains displayed for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

▼ System temporary stops due to reduced radar sensitivity

MPG 1 BSD/RCTA Disabled Sensor Blocked OFF 2 OFF R 图 842.0 7452 mi 702220

1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due to reduced radar sensitivity 2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the detectability of the radar sensors is reduced. Once the condition is corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will disappear. If the indicator remains displayed for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

■ BSD/RCTA warning indicator

▼ System malfunction

MPG 1 2 BSD/RCTA Disabled Check 3 Owner's Manual 4 R 图 842.0 7452 mi 702221

1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message
2) At first, this message will appear
3) Then this message will appear
4) BSD/RCTA warning indicator

This display appears when a malfunction occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

■ BSD/RCTA OFF switch

OFF 702053

BSD/RCTA OFF switch

OFF 701821

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on the combination meter, and the BSD/

RCTA is deactivated.

Press the switch again to activate the BSD/RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will disappear.

When this occurs, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light on the side of the rearview mirror illuminates for a few seconds and then turns off.

NOTE

- In the following cases, the system may not operate properly due to blocked radar waves. Press the BSD/RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the system.

• When towing a trailer
• When a bicycle carrier or other carrier item is fitted to the rear of the vehicle
• When using a chassis dynamometer or free roller device, etc.
• When running the engine and making the wheels rotate while lifting up the vehicle

- If the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the last known status of the system is maintained. For example, if the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position with the BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA will remain deactivated the next time the ignition switch is turned to the "ON"

position.

■ Certification for the BSD/RCTA

▼ U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

▼ Canada-spec. models

NOTE

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 - 24.25 GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

702021

REMARQUE

Droit applicable: Canada 310

▼ Mexico-spec. models

Certificado de homologacion: RLVCOSR15-0442

Continental SRR3-A

■ Handling of radar sensors

Line drawing of a car rear view showing roof, side panels, and exhaust components (no text or symbols)

1) Sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of vehicle, are mounted inside the rear bumper.

To ensure correct operation of the BSD RCTA, observe the following precautions

● Always keep the bumper surface near the radar sensors clean.
- Do not affix any stickers or other item on the bumper surface near the radar sensors.
- Do not modify the bumper near the radar sensors.
- Do not paint the bumper near the rad sensors.
- Do not expose the bumper near the radar sensors to strong impacts. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may occur, including the inability to detect vehicles entering the detection areas. If any strong shock is applied to the bumper, be sure to contain your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
- Do not disassemble the radar sensors

NOTE

If the radar sensors require repair or replacement, or the bumper area around the radar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

the

7-18. Reverse Automatic Braking System (if equipped)

Reverse Automatic Braking is a system designed to help avoid collisions or reduce collision damage when reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected in the reversing direction, the system will notify the driver with a warning sound and may activate the vehicle's brakes automatically.

WARNING

• Reverse Automatic Braking is not a system intended to replace the driver's responsibility to check surrounding areas for vehicles or obstacles to avoid a collision.
• The driver is responsible for driving safely. Before reversing, be sure to first depress the brake pedal and visually check the surroundings.

• There are some cases in which the vehicle cannot avoid collision, because the system operation has limitations. The warning sound or automatic braking may be delayed or may not operate at all even when an obstacle is present.

• The system is not designed to detect people (including children), animals or other moving objects.

• Depending on the vehicle condition or the surrounding environment, the sonar sensor's ability to detect objects may be compromised.

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking System records and stores the following data when automatic braking operates. It does not record conversations, personal information or other audio data.

• Distance from the object
- Vehicle speed
- Accelerator pedal operation status
- Brake pedal operation status
- Select lever position
• Outside temperature
- The sensitivity setting of the sonar sensors

SUBARU and third parties contracted co by SUBARU may acquire and use the recorded data for the purpose of vehicle research and development.

SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU will not disclose or provide

the acquired data to any other third party except under the following conditions.

• The vehicle owner has given his/her consent.
• The disclosure/provision is based on a court order or other legally enforceable request.
• Data that has been modified so that the user and vehicle cannot be identified is provided to a research institution for statistical processing or similar purposes.

■ Reverse Automatic Braking System overview

The system detects objects using sonar sensors installed in the rear bumper.

• If the system determines a possible collision with an object in the reversing direction, automatic deceleration will be activated. Also, beeping sounds will activate.
• If the vehicle is further reversed, automatic hard braking will be applied and a continuous beeping sound will activate.

▼ Detecting range

1 2 3 701721

1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6 in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

2) Range that the system cannot detect: Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the rear of the vehicle

3) Detecting range (length): Approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

If your vehicle is trapped on a railroad crossing and you are trying to escape by reversing through the crossing gate, the system may recognize the crossing gate as an obstacle and the brake may activate. In this case, remain calm and either continue to depress the accelerator pedal or cancel the system. To

- CONTINUED -

cancel the system, refer to "Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking system operation" P367.

■ Operating conditions

The Reverse Automatic Braking system will operate when all of the following conditions are met.

graph TD
    A["Eye Sight Off Check Manual"] --> B["RAB OFF"]
    A --> C["RAB"]
    A --> D["1 Eye Sight"]

1) EyeSight warning indicator
2) RAB warning indicator
3) RAB OFF indicator

• The ignition switch is in the "ON" position
• The EyeSight warning indicator is off
• The RAB warning indicator is off
• HALT (RAB OFF) indicator is off
• The Reverse Automatic Braking sys-

Item is set to on

• The select lever is in the "R" position
  ● The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9 mph (1.5 to 15 km/h)

NOTE

- In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic braking system will not operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected

- The EyeSight warning indicator is illuminated

- The Reverse Automatic Braking fail indicator is illuminated

• When the Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF indicator is illuminated, the Reverse Automatic braking system cannot be operated.
• In the following cases, the system may not be able to properly detect obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBAR dealer to have the system inspected

- A sticker, paint, or a chemical applied to the sonar sensor or t rear bumper near the sonar sens

• The rear bumper is modified
• The rear bumper has been re- moved and reattached
• The ground clearance is change due to the vehicle's loading condition or modification
• The sonar sensor and the area

near the sonar sensor are being damaged.

- The rear bumper is exposed to strong impact, or the rear bumper is deformed

- When the 8-inch audio/navigation system is performing a software update, the Reverse Automatic Braking System may not display the following items on the audio/navigation screen until the update is complete.

- Display Icon on/off Function

– Distance Indicator Image

- Warning Message

- On a steep hill, the system's automatic braking ability will be reduced.

- The system is designed to avoid collisions by automatic hard braking when the vehicle's reversing speed is less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

However, the system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid collisions in any situation.

If the vehicle is reversed at an extremely slow speed, the driver's operation may be prioritized. In this case, automatic braking will not operate.

The system may not be able to detect the following objects

- Sharp or thin objects such as poles, fences and ropes which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor
- Objects that are too close to the rear bumper when the select lever set to the "R" position
- Objects with a surface which may not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor such as a chain link fence.
- Objects the system is not designed to detect
- Pedestrians
- Moving objects including moving vehicles
- Objects which absorb sound waves such as cloth or snow
- Objects whose surface has a diagonal angle
- Objects that are low to the ground such as parking blocks
- Objects that are high above the ground such as objects hanging from above
- The system may not be able to properly detect objects or may cause a system malfunction when the following conditions exist
High frequency sound from other sources are nearby
- Horn sounds from other vehicles

• Engine sounds from other vehicles
• Sounds of air brakes
  s- Vehicle detection equipment or sonar from other vehicles
• A sound wave with a frequency similar to the vehicle's system is transmitted nearby
• A vehicle equipped with the same system is reversing toward your reversing direction

Weather conditions

- Extremely high or extremely low temperatures in which the area near the sonar sensor becomes too hot or too cold to operate

- The sonar sensor or the rear bumper near the sonar sensors is exposed to heavy rain or a significant amount of water

- Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.

- Air is moving rapidly such as when a strong wind is blowing

Parts attached to the rear bumper near the sonar sensor

- Commercial electronic parts (fog light, fender pole, radio antenna) or commercial attachment parts (trailer hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper guard) are attached

- Parts that emit high frequency sound, such as a horn or speaker, are attached

Vehicle conditions

- Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the rear bumper near the sonar sensor

- The vehicle is significantly inclined

- The ground clearance is significantly reduced due to the vehicle's loading condition, etc.

- When the sonar sensor is mis-aligned due to a collision or an accident

Surrounding environment

- A cloth banner, flag, hanging branch or railroad crossing bars are present in the reversing direction

- When reversing on a gravel of grassy area

- When reversing in an area where objects or walls are adjacent to the vehicle such as narrow tunnels, narrow bridges, narrow roads or narrow garages

- Wheel tracks or a hole is present in the ground of the reversing direction

- When reversing over a drainage cover (grate cover)

Diagram showing a car approaching a ramp with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a car on an inclined plane with a downward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

- The path of the reversing direc- tion is inclined such as on a steep formed using a puncture repair kit. uphill - The suspension was modified.

• A curb is present in the reversing- Vehicle driving is unstable due to direction accident or malfunction.
• When reversing downhill

Diagram of a car on a road with a right-pointing arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

- When reversing on an uneven road

- In circumstances such as the following, it may not be possible to avoid a collision even when the system operates normally.

• The tire air pressure is not correct.
• The tires have become worn.
• Tires which are not the designated size are installed.

- - Emergency repairs were per-
eep formed using a puncture repair kit.

• The suspension was modified.
• Tire chains are installed.

- The brake warning light is illuminated.

■ Reverse Automatic Braking System operation

When the Reverse Automatic Braking System is in operation, the range between the vehicle and the detected object will be indicated on the audio/navigation monitor. Also, warning sounds will activate in 3 levels to warn the driver of a potential collision.

While the RAB is operating, a warning message is displayed on the audio/navigation monitor and the combination meter display (color LCD).

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern
Long proximity (object detected)	35 inches (90 cm) or more Green No warning	sound
Medium proximity alert (approaching the object)	28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm)	Yellow Short beeps
Short proximity alert (approaching closer to the object)	20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm)	Orange Rapid short beeps
Closest proximity alert (too close to the object)	20 inches (50 cm) or less Red	Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

▼ Obstacle detected and alert level

1 RAB Check Surroundings Before Backing Up 701825

Long proximity alert (object detected) 1) Green: 35 inches (90 cm) or more

1 RAB ON Check Surroundings Before Backing Up 701826

Starting and operating
Medium proximity alert (approaching the object) 1) Yellow: 28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm)

1 RAB ON Check Surroundings Before Backing Up P ON 701827

Short proximity alert (approaching the object closer)
1) Orange: 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm)

1 RAB ON Check Surroundings Before Backing Up 701921

Closest proximity alert (too close to object)
1) Red: 20 inches (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the reversing direction, the range of detected object will be shown on the audio/navigation monitor.

A warning alarm will sound and, depending on the speed, either torque control to generate engine braking or automatic braking will be applied.

▼ Object close behind warning

RAB Object Close Behind PwL 701828

Automatic braking warning
1) Warning message

If the vehicle continues to go in reverse, the system may determine the risk of collision with the object. In this case, sh warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound and either strong automatic braking or torque control will be applied to prevent collision.

act RAB ON Apply Brake To Hold Position 1 P### ON 701923

Depress brake pedal warning
1) Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedal once the vehicle has been stopped by automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is depressed, a message will be displayed on the audio/navigation monitor and the continuous beep will remain sounding.

At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD).

WARNING

When the vehicle was stopped by automatic braking, be sure to depress the brake pedal right away. There is the risk that the vehicle may start moving.

▼ After the vehicle is stopped by system

MPG RAB OFF R 842.0 7452 mi 702064

After the brake pedal is depressed, the Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF indicator will illuminate and the system temporarily stop operating. The Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF indicator will turn off when the select lever is shift to a position other than the "R" position. The system will operate again the next time the select lever is shifted to "R" position.

In circumstances such as the following, Reverse Automatic Braking system automatically stops operating and the Revers Automatic Braking system OFF indicator illuminates.

- There is ice, snow, mud, or other substance on the sonar sensors.

The select lever was shifted to R whe there is an obstacle located close to the rear bumper.

- A sound with a frequency close to that of the sonar used by the Reverse Automatic Braking system was detected.

NOTE

- In the following cases, after the vehicle has been stopped by the Reverse Automatic Braking system, brake control is released and the electronic parking brake operates. For details about releasing the parking brake, re to "Electronic parking brake" P343.

- When 2 minutes pass after the vehicle is stopped.

will - When any door is opened.

- When the EyeSight system mal functions.

ifted - When the EyeSight system stop temporarily.

- When the Reverse Automatic Braking system stops temporarily.

- The message/warning message will not display for approximately 8 seconds after turning the ignition switch the "ON" position.

■ Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking system operation

The Reverse Automatic Braking system can be temporarily canceled by any of the following operations.

- While the vehicle is stopped by the operation of automatic braking, the brake pedal is depressed.

While the vehicle is stopped by the operation of automatic braking, the accelerator pedal is depressed.

The accelerator pedal is kept depressed (In this case, limited acceleration will be canceled and the vehicle will continue reversing.)

- The select lever is shifted to a position: other than the "R" position.

NOTE

The system will be canceled if the object is no longer detected.

■ Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF setting

While the select lever is shifted to the position, the below functions of the Reverse Automatic Braking system can be set by operating the audio/navigation monitor.

graph TD
    A["1 RAB ON"] --> B["+"]
    C["2 RAB OFF"] --> B
    D["3 PON"] --> E["+"]
    F["4 POFF"] --> E
    G["Check Surroundings Before Backing Up"] --> H["701831"]

1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic Braking
2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic Braking
3) ON setting key of the object detection warning beeping sound
4) OFF setting key of the object detection warning beeping sound

When the ON setting key is shown, the corresponding setting is ON.

Touch and hold the ON setting key to the setting OFF.

When the OFF setting is shown, the corresponding setting is OFF. Touch and hold the OFF setting key to the setting ON.

When the Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned OFF, the following indicator will illuminate.

MPG RAB OFF R 图 842.0 7452 mi

RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned OFF.

RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned ON.

NOTE

• When the settings cannot be changed, the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed out.
  • The ON/OFF setting key may be

greyed out if the Reverse Automatic Braking system malfunctions, etc. In this case, turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and then turn it to the "ON" position again. If the setting cannot be changed even after turning the ignition switch to the "ON" position again, consult your SUBARU dealer.

- The settings will be restored as follows when the select lever is shifted to the "R" position next time.

- Reverse Automatic Braking system settings: default (ON setting) - Object detection warning beeping sound: the setting selected by operating the combination meter display (color LCD)

Also, the following settings can be changed by operating the combination meter display (color LCD).

• Warning volume
• Sonar audible alarm ON/OFF

For details, refer to "Menu screens" P197.

■ RAB warning indicator

MPG RAB R 842.0 7452 ml 702065

If the Reverse Automatic Braking System malfunctions, the above indicator illuminates on the combination meter. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Handling of the sonar sensors

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the bumper. To ensure the proper operation the Reverse Automatic Braking system, observe the following precautions.

Line drawing of a car rear view showing side profile and front panel (no text or symbols)

• Do not affix any stickers or other items on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface near the sonar sensors.
  ● Always keep the rear bumper surface near the sonar sensors clean.
• Do not modify the rear bumper.
• Do not paint the bumper near the sonar sensors.

Do not apply strong impacts to the rear bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may occur, including inability to detect objects in the reversing direction. If any strong impact is applied to the rear bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

- Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

NOTE

If the sonar sensors require repair or replacement, or if the area of the rear bumper near the sonar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Driving tips

8-1. New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) 372

8-2. Fuel economy hints.... 372

8-3. Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)..... 372

8-4. Catalytic converter 373

8-5. Periodic inspections.... 374

8-6. Driving in foreign countries.... 374

8-7. Driving tips for AWD models 3

8-8. On-road and off-road driving.... 376

Before driving.... 376

During driving 377

After driving 377

8-9. Winter driving 378

Operation during cold weather 378

Driving on snowy and icy roads.... 379

Corrosion protection....380

Snow tires 380

Tire chains.... 381

Rocking the vehicle.... 382

8-10. Loading your vehicle 382

Vehicle capacity weight 383

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating).... 383

Roof rails 384

Roof tent.... 385

8-11. Trailer hitch (dealer option) 386

Connecting a trailer.... 388

If not towing a trailer 390

8-12. Trailer towing 390

Warranties and maintenance 390

Maximum load limits 390

Trailer Hitches 394

When you do not tow a trailer ....

Connecting a trailer.... 394

Trailer towing tips 396

8-1. New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 m (1,600 km)

The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you hand and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):

• Do not race the engine or allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in a emergency.
• Do not drive at one constant engine of vehicle speed, either fast or slow.
• Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emergency.
• Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads are replaced with new ones.

8-2. Fuel economy hints es

The following suggestions will help to sa fuel.

• Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions.
• Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possible.
• Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.
• Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
• Keep the engine properly tuned.
• Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the driver's side. Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption.
• Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
• Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.

8-3. Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

• Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
• Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
• Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
• Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
• Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.
• If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully ope

- Keep the rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear crackling sound coming from the ex- Thehaust system for a short time after the engine has been shut off. This sounds normal.

8-4. Catalytic converter

Technical diagram of an internal combustion engine assembly (no text or labels visible)

The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to deduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:

• Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter.
• Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle.
• Avoid racing the engine.
• Never turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position while the vehicle is moving.
• Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine running rough (misfiring, back-firing or incomplete combustion), have

your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

• Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treatment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust system.
• Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level.

WARNING

• Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials (e.g., grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the catalytic converter operates at very high temperatures.
• Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.

8-5. Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condit at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet" performed at the specified time or mileage intervals.

8-6. Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in another country:

• Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. Refer to "Fuel requirements" P307.
• Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.

8-7. Driving tips for AWD models

WARNING

• Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
• Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving an All-Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
• When replacing or installing tire(s), all four tires must be the same for following items.

(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (c), you may obey the specification that is printed on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver's door pillar.

If all of four tires are not the s for items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could occur to the drivetrain of your car, and affect the following.

• Ride
• Handling
• Braking
• Speedometer/Odometer calibration
• Clearance between the body and tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire replace a flat tire, be sure to use original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes result in severe mechanical damage to the drivetrain of your vehicle.

must same - 800004

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD models provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand shifting power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceleration and added engine braking force during deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains these features unique to AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system, you should keep the following tips in mind.

- An AWD model is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in handling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sudden braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.

• Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the driver's side.
• Never attempt to drive through pools and puddles, or roads flooded with water. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall.
  There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle. For detailed information, refer to "Towing P414."

8-8. On-road and off-road driving

WARNING

• Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
• Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving an All-Wheel Drive model could easily lead to a serious accident.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. The driver and a passengers should fasten their seatbelts before starting to drive in order to minimize the chance of serious injury or death.
• Do not make sharp turns or quick maneuvers unless absolutely unavoidable. Such actions are dangerous, as you may lose control, possibly resulting in a rollover which could cause death or ser-

ious injury.

- Whenever strong crosswinds are present, slow down sufficiently to maintain control of your vehicle. Remember that your vehicle, with its higher profile and center of gravity, is more likely to be affected by crosswinds than ordinary passenger cars.

CAUTION

Frequent driving of an AWD mode under hard-driving conditions such as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of the following items than specified in the maintenance schedule described in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

alP Engine oil

- Brake fluid

Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while operating it off-road and not using common sense precautions such as those listed here is not eligible for warranty coverage.

Your vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher

ground clearance which enables them to be used for wide applications including off-road driving. However, please keep in mind that your vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A higher center of gravity in relation to the tread width as compared with ordinary passenger cars makes vehicles of this type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. The high ground clearance of this vehicle is a real advantage, giving you a better view of the road and allowing you to anticipate problems earlier. However, remember that your utility vehicle is not designed for high-speed cornering comparable to ordinary passenger cars and that your vehicle could roll over if you make a sharp turn at a high speed.

If you take your SUBARU off-road, certain common sense precautions such as those in the following list should be taken.

■ Before driving

• Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seatbelts.
• Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or citizens band radio.
• Secure all cargo carried inside the

vehicle and make certain that it is not higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the Those loads raise the vehicle's center of gravity and make it more prone to tip o

- Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those specified in this manual

■ During driving

General precautions:

• Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous areas over rough terrain.
• Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and the like.
• Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much me easily tip over sideways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or do slopes that are too steep.
• Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.
• Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk a wheel and injure your hands. Instead,

with your fingers and thumbs on outside of the rim.

- Do not drive or park over or near flammable materials such as dry grass pollen leaves, as they may burn easily. Exhaust system is very hot while the engine is running and right after the stops. This could create a fire hazard.

^1 Precautions when driving under especially dangerous situations:

• If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firmness and ensure that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slow and cross the stream without stopping. The water should be shallow enough that does not reach the vehicle's undercarriage. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never attempt drive through rushing water; regardless of its depth, it can wash away the ground from under your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.
• If you must rock the vehicle to free it
  from sand or mud, depress the accelera pedal slightly and move the select lever back and forth between "D" and "R" repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning

the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

- When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by or starting the vehicle with the transmission in T2nd than 1st. Refer to "Selection of manual mode" P328.

■ After driving

● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the brake discs and brake pads.
After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is a large grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.
- Wash the vehicle's underbody after off-road driving. Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they need to be washed thoroughly.

tor

8-9. Winter driving

■ Operation during cold weather

▼ Maintenance

Carry some emergency equipment, such as a window scraper, a bag of sand, fla a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce battery capacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough power for cold winter starts.

It normally takes longer to start the eng in very cold weather conditions. Use an engine oil of a proper grade and viscos for cold weather. Using heavy summer will make it harder to start the engine. Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, hot water to melt the ice, and afterward thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies according to how much diluted, as indicated in the following tab

Washer Fluid Concentration	Freezing Temperature
30%	10.4°F (-12°C)
50%	-4°F (-20°C)
100%	-49°F (-45°C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid check the freezing temperatures in the nable above when adjusting the fluid concentration to the outside temperature if you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid vila different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

• Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside side temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the reservoir tank.
• State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer anti-freeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be used with only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle's paint, wiper blades or washer system.

^f ▼ Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and driving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to avoid making steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe, do so and check under the fenders periodically.

▼ Parking in cold weather

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle if you p the vehicle in snow with the engine running.

CAUTION

• Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods cold weather since it could from that position.
• When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.
• When the vehicle has been left parked after use on roads he covered with snow, or has be left parked during a snowstorm

When parking for long periods in cold weather, you should observe the following tips.

e1. Place the select lever in the "P" position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.

▼ Refueling in cold weather

In To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk of its freeze use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weather. Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. When an antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used an extended period, it is best to have the

fuel tank filled to capacity.

▼ Opening rear gate (models with power rear gate)

CAUTION

Before operating the power rear gate, check that there is no frost or snow between the power rear gate and the vehicle body. If you notice frost or snow on the power rear gate remove it. If you forcibly operate the power rear gate with frost or snow, it may cause a malfunction.

■ Driving on snowy and icy roads

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads. Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking. To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.) Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.

- CONTINUED -

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehicle's braking performance on snowy and icy roads. For information on braking on slippery surfaces, refer to "ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)" P334 and "Vehicle Dynamics Control system" P336.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving in snowstorms. Snow will enter the engine's intake system and may hinder the airflow, which could result in engine shutdown or even breakdown.

▼ Wiper operation when snowing Before driving in cold weather, make su the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to windshield or rear window, perform the following procedure.

- To thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers, use the defroster with the airflo selection in "W" and the temperature set for maximum warmth until the wiper black rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to "Climate control" P263.

- If your vehicle is equipped with a wipe deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to "Defogger and deicer" P259.

To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers, use the rear window defogger. Refer to "Defogger and deicer" P259.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow st to stick on the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroste with the airflow selection in" and the temperature set for maximum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it a using the windshield washer. Refer to "Windshield washer" -P236.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road a safe place, then remove it. If you stop vehicle at road side, use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer the "Hazard warning flasher" ∞P168.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

wiper blades (winter blades) during the seasons you could have snow and freezing temperatures. Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non-freezing type wiper blades may not perform as well as standard wiper blades. If this happens, reduce the vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freezing type wiper blades is over, replace them with standard wiper blades. way

Corrosion protection

Refer to "Corrosion protection" P426.

Snow tires

to

the

WARNING

- When replacing or installing winter tire(s), all four tires must be the same for following items. (a) Size

(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (c), you obey the specification that is printed on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver's door pillar.

If all of four winter tires are n the same for items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could occur to the drivetrain of your car, and affect the following

• Ride
• Handling
• Braking
• Speedometer/Odometer calibration
  – Clearance between the body and tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

- Do not use a combination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with "all season tires" as original equipment, which are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions.

When you choose to install winter tires of your vehicle, be sure to use the correct size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, construction, brand and load range and you should never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.

Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your vehicle.

■ Tire chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle because of the lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body.

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use of another type of traction device (such as spring chains) may be acceptable if used by the your vehicle is recommended by the device manufacturer, taking into account tire size and road conditions. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions, especially regarding maximum vehicle speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. Damage caused to your vehicle by use of a traction device is not covered under warranty.

Make certain that any traction device you use is an SAE class S device, and use it on the front wheels only. Always use the utmost care when driving with traction device. Overconfidence be-

- CONTINUED -

cause you are using a traction device 8-10. Loading your vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.

■ Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the select lever back and forth between "D" and "R" repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For t best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission 2nd than 1st.

For information about holding the transmission in the 2nd position, refer to "Selection of manual mode" P328.

WARNING

from Never allow passengers to ride on a folded rear seatback in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury.
the Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo low, as close to the floor as possible.

Simple line drawing of a person sitting on the floor next to stacked boxes, with a no-smoking symbol overlay (no text or symbols present)

100094

WARNING

• When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.
• Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the vehicle's center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
• Secure lengthy items properly to prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop.
• Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
• Do not place anything on the extended cargo area cover. Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a collision. This could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.

Vehicle capacity weight

Line drawing of a car with two people inside, showing driver and passenger (no text or symbols)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's side door pillar. It includes the total weight of the driver and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

■ GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Diagram of a car interior showing structural components and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the bottom of driver's side door pillar shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle – including standard equipment, fluids, emergency tools and spare tire

- CONTINUED -

assembly) plus the vehicle capacity weight.

In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage inside the vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, should confirm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a veh scale, found at a commercial weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a low load range than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher lo range than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

■ Roof rails

1 801157

1) Roof rails

yargo can be carried on the roof after securing the roof crossbars to the roof and installing the appropriate carrying attachments. When installing the roof crossbars and the carrying attachments follow the manufacturer's instructions. T roof rail system is designed to carry lo (cargo, roof crossbars and carrying attachments) of no more than 176 lbs (80 sure not to exceed your vehicle's GVW and GAWR.

CAUTION

- When using the carrying attachments, make sure that the total carrying load of the cargo, roof

crossbars and carrying attachments does not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle. Read the manufacturer's instructions and pay attention to not exceed the load limit of the parts.

- For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rails must be used together with the SUBARU recommended roof crossbars and any appropriate carrying attachment that may be needed. The roof rails must never be used alone to carry cargo. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint, or a dangerous road is hazard due to loss of cargo could result.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity is altered with the weight of the page on the roof, thus affecting driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.

■ Roof tent

Line drawing of a car rear view with roof and window (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Adding weight to the vehicle's roof can adversely affect handling, braking, and rollover resistance. The vehicle must never be driven with total roof rail load in excess of 1 lbs (80 kg).

CAUTION

- The roof rail load limit for stationary vehicles (700 lbs (317 applies only when the vehicle parked and the load is evenly distributed left/right and front/rear and the roof crossbars a

roof tent are tightly secured to the vehicle. If these conditions are not met, the load limit will lower.

- The maximum load limit of the roof crossbars must be obtained from the manufacturer or retailer of the roof rack. When driving a vehicle, the maximum roof rail load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the crossbar load limit (whichever is lower).

Roof tents may be used under certain conditions at your own risk.

▼ When driving the vehicle

The total weight on the roof rails, including the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not exceed the vehicle's roof rail load of 176 abs (80 kg), evenly distributed.

176

kg)) is

be

Technical line drawing of two mechanical components with mounting holes, labeled B (no text or symbols present)

Line drawing of a car with a roof and side panel, labeled 'A' (no text or symbols on the car itself)

801173

A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg)

▼ When the vehicle is parked on ground

D C B A 801174

A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
D: Occupants in the roof tent

The total weight on the roof rails – including the roof crossbars, roof tent, and all occupants and contents in the tent – must not exceed either the veh roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), distributed, or the load limit of the roo crossbars, whichever is lower.

Load limit of the roof rail (A). B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)

Exceeding this load limit could cause damage to the vehicle or racking system. The vehicle must never be driven with occupants in the roof tent. Before the vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo must be removed from the roof tent and the roof rail load must be restored to wit the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg). Refer to the user manual that accompanied the roof tent for important safety information and instructions on the proper installation and use of the tent.

8-11. Trailer hitch (dealer option)

WARNING

• Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight changes depending on the situation. For possible recommendations and limitations, refer to "Trailer towing" P390.
  Trailer brakes are required when the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that each chain will hold the trailer's maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.
• Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch receiver, the trailer could

get loose and create a traffic safety hazard.

- Although towing regulations for trailer or caravan vehicles vary by state/region, all regulations agree that specifications such as the maximum gross trailer weight must not exceed the lesser of the following:

• Maximum gross trailer weight
• Maximum gross tongue weight
• GVWR

• GAWR

• Failure to comply with the procedures set forth will not only compromise your safety, but will also negate your insurance coverage and/or may violate the staroad and traffic acts and regulations.

• Use only the ball mount supplied with this hitch. Use the hitch or as a weight carrying hitch. Do r use with any type of weight distributing hitch.
• The standard bumper beam must be installed after you remove the trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU dealer for purchase of a standard

bumper beam if you do not have the original.

• Safety performance is decreased and there is increased risk of injury to passengers in the case of an accident if the trailer hitch or a standard bumper beam is n installed. One of them must always be installed on the vehicle.
• If a trailer hitch is installed, it is not possible to install the rear towing hook.

The maximum gross trailer weight and maximum gross tongue weight are indicated in the following table. Models with air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooled:

Maximum gross trai-ler weight

Maximum gross ton-gue weight

5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)

500 lbs (227 kg)

Models without air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler:

Maximum gross trai-der weight	Maximum gross ton-gue weight
2,000 lbs (907 kg)	200 lbs (91 kg)

*1: Continuously variable transmission type TR690SXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to "Vehicle identification")

P489.)

*2: Continuously variable transmission type TR690GXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to "Vehicle identification" P489.)

When towing a trailer, refer to "Trailer towing" P390.

■ Connecting a trailer

801175

801176

1. Remove the 2 clips from the bottom of the cover.

NOTE

Looking under the cover from bottom,

there are 2 clips fixed under the fastened on each side. Remove the clips one by one that fastened under the vehicle.

Diagram of a car's side profile showing airflow or flow direction with arrows, no text or symbols present

1. Remove the cover.

NOTE

Pull the bottom of the cover from the triangle mark▲“▲▲” is located remove it.

cover are 3 A 2 1 where to 801163

1) Ball mount
2) Hitch pin
3) Safety clip
A) Hitch receiver tube

1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole lo on the hitch receiver tube so that the passes through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety clip to the groove the hitch pin securely.
4. Check the ball mount assembly by pulling on it to make sure it does not off the hitch receiver.

1 2 801164

1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains

1. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely installed on the ball mount.

2. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

3. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains that will hold the trailer's maximum gross weight. The chains should

atedoss under the trailer tongue to prevent pirthe tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it should disconnect from the hitch on ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag the ground. come

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to any part of the vehicle other than the safety chain hooks.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Hitch harness connector (7-pin type)

Technical line drawing of a vehicle chassis with mounting bracket and structural components (no text or symbols)

Hitch harness connector (4-pin type)

1. Connect the hitch wire harness's black 4-pin or 7-pin wire connector to the towing trailer's wire harness.
2. Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness by individually activating the brake, stop and turn signal lights on the trailer.
   _Degving

tips

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before launching or retrieving a watercraft.

■ If not towing a trailer

• Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube and insert the receiver co onto the hitch receiver tube and/or insta bumper cover.
• Place the dust cap over the 4-pin or pin connector of the hitch wire harness protect against possible damage.
• Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
  4-pin or 7-pin connector using terminal grease.

8-12. Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drivetrain brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your s and satisfaction depend upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious operation of your vehicle. Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchasing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment appropriate for your vehicle. Do not use towing equipment other than genuine SUBARU towing equipment. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions for proper installation and use provided by the trailer or caravan's manufacturer.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment, or from any errors or omissions in the instructions accompanying such equipment or for your failure to follow the proper instructions. Regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tightened securely.

■ Warranties and maintenance SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load. (Refer to "Maintenance schedule under severe driving conditions" in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".)

Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving.

■ Maximum load limits

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load limits explained in the following. Exceeding the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or vehicle damage.

CAUTION

- Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

- Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle and trailer are acceptable

▼ Total trailer weight

Simple line drawing of a vehicle on a platform with a scale, no text or symbols present

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never exceed the maximum total trailer weight in the following table.

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000	Ibs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes.	Models with air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler*.5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)Models without air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler*.2,000 lbs (907 kg)

*1: Continuously variable transmission type TR690SXXXX (To check the model number label for continuously variable transmission type, refer Vehicle identification" P489.)
*2: Continuously variable transmission type TR690GXXXX (To check the model number label for continuously variable transmission type, refer Vehicle identification" or P489.)

▼ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

Diagram showing a car on a platform connected to a vehicle via a speedometer, with no visible text or symbols.

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Diagram of a car interior showing structural elements and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Certification label

GVWR of your vehicle that is given by SUBARU is shown on the certification label located at the bottom of driver's door pillar of your vehicle.

▼ Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

800369

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front and rear GAWR of your vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also shown on the certification label located at the bottom of driver's side door pillar.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

▼ Tongue load

800214

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 11 percent of the total trailer weight does not exceed the maximum value of 500 lbs (227 kg).

1 2 800370

1) Jack
2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in the illustrati above. When weighing the tongue load, sure to position the towing coupler at the height at which it would be during actua towing, using a jack as shown.

F 60% 40% 50% 50% 800216

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution of the load in the trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the stack than in the front; approximately 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the front and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as possible on both the left and right sides. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailer's axle than in the front, the load is taken of the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

- CONTINUED -

This may cause the rear wheels to skid, especially during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced during cornering, resulting in over-steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

■ Trailer Hitches

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body of your vehicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drilling the frame or under-body of your vehicle could cause deterioration of strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion around the drilled hole.

CAUTION

- Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or other systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing

equipment.

- Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause damage to axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.

Do not use a trailer hitch other than a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer.

When you do not tow a

CAUTION

• The housing should be kept dirt and corrosion-free at the points of contact. The surfaces only require cleaning with a cloth. Grease or other lubricants should never be used.
• If the ball is not installed, the plastic insert and/or bumper cover should then be installed for protection and to prevent it from getting dirty.

When the ball is not used, place the cap and store securely.

■ Connecting a trailer

▼ Trailer brakes

WARNING

• Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.
• Do not directly connect your trailer's hydraulic brake system to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause the vehicle's brake performance to deteriorate and could lead to an accident.

If your trailer's total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg), the trailer is required to be equipped with its own brake system. Electric brakes or surge brakes are recommended, and must be installed properly. Check that your trailer's brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations. Your SUBARU's brake system is not designed to be tapped into the trailer's hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU dealer and professional trailer supplier for more information about the trailer's brake system.

▼ Trailer safety chains

WARNING

Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. Towing trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Two chains should be used in total, one to the right side and the other the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chain crossing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue

should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however be careful not to let them drag on the ground.

▼ Side mirrors

Top-down diagram of a car with a vehicle-mounted sensor array, showing light rays from the center (no text or symbols)

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicle's standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations.

▼ Trailer lights

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction your vehicle's lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle's electrical system requires modifications to the vehicle's lighting circuit to increase its capacity and accommodate wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper operation of the turn signals and the brake lights each time you connect a trailer to your vehicle.

▼ Tires

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated. Refer to "Tires" P480.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer manufacturer's specifications. Also check federal, state, province and/or other applicable regulations.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer, ask a commercial road service representative or professional to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in vehicle or trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare is firmly secured.

■ Trailer towing tips

CAUTION

• For models equipped with the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) driving support systems, when towing a trailer, press the BSD/RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the system. The system may no operate properly due to the blocked radar waves. For details about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch refer to "BSD/RCTA OFF switch" P358.
• For models equipped with RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking) system, consult your SUBARU dealer for additional information about towing a trailer.
• Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

when towing a trailer in hilly country on hot days.

• When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and our braking performance will be different when compared to normal operation. For safety's sake, you should employ extra caution when towing a trailer and you should never drive at excessive speeds. You should also keep the following tips in mind:
• When parking on a steep slope with a trailer attached to your vehicle, the braking power of the electronic parking brake may not be sufficient since strong braking power is needed.

▼ Before starting out on a trip

• Check the towing regulations for trailer or caravan vehicles that vary by state/region. Failure to comply with the procedures set forth will not only compromise your safety, but will also negate your insurance coverage and/or may violate the state road and traffic acts and regulations.
• Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mounting are in good condition. If problems are apparent, do not tow the

trailer.

• Check that the vehicle rests horizontally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear, check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then confirm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.
• Check that the tire rating and pressures are correct.

the Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected properly. Confirm that:

• The trailer tongue is connected properly to the hitch ball.
• The trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailer's brake lights illuminate when the vehicle's brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailer's turn signal lights flash when the vehicle's turn signal lever is operated.
• The safety chains are connected properly.
• All cargo in the trailer is secured safely in position.
• The side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without a significant blind spot.

- Sufficient time should be taken to learn the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination, before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping and

backing up.

▼ Driving with a trailer

• You should allow for considerably more stopping distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of control.
• Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes.
• Slow down before turning. Make a longer than normal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle
• Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and promptly begin decelerating your vehicle at a gradual pace.
• When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required because of the added weight and length caused by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
• Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can be difficult and requires experience. Never accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and steering wheel assembly with directional arrows indicating rotation or movement.

n a e. n 801099

To reverse around a corner, perform the following procedure.
29. Reverse slowly and steer in the opposite site direction to the way you want to turn 2. Once the trailer begins to swing around, straighten the steering wheel.

1. Turn the wheel in the opposite direction.
2. Steer the vehicle around to be in line with the trailer, then straighten the steering again.

- If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed immediately by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

▼ Driving on grades

- Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheating of your vehicle's brakes. Do not make sudden downshifts.

• When driving uphill in hot weather, the air conditioner may turn off automatically to protect the engine from overheating.
• When driving uphill in hot weather, pass attention to the following items because the engine and transmission are relatively prone to overheating.

Temperature gauge

AT OIL TEMP warning light

Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if equipped)

If any of the following conditions occur,

- CONTINUED -

immediately turn off the air conditioner a stop the vehicle in the nearest safe location. For further instructions and additional information, refer to the following sections.

• "If you park your vehicle in case an emergency" P400
• "Engine overheating" P413
• Temperature gauge needle approaches the OVERHEAT zone. Refer to "Engine coolant temperature gauge" P170
• AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates. Refer to "AT OIL TEMP warning light" P177

- Avoid using the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

▼ Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.
4. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

and. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes slowly until the i-blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the parking brake; slowly release the regular brakes.
5. Shift into "P" position and shut off the engine.

Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the following steps:

In case of emergency

9-1. If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency.... 400
9-2. Maintenance tools .... 400 Jack and jack handle .... 401
9-3. Spare tire.... 401 Removing the spare tire....401 Re-storage of spare tire ....404
9-4. Temporary spare tire 405
9-5. Flat tires .... 406 Changing a flat tire .... 406 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models).... 409
9-6. Jump starting.... 410 How to jump start .... 411
9-7. Engine overheating .... 413 If steam is coming from the engine compartment .... 413 If no steam is coming from the engine compartment .... 413

9-8. Towing....414 Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes .... 414 Using a flat-bed truck.... 416 Towing with all wheels on the ground.... 416
9-9. Electronic parking brake - if the electronic parking brake cannot be released ....417
9-10. Access key fob - if access key fob does not operate properly....417 Locking and unlocking.... 418 Switching power status .... 418 Starting engine .... 418
9-11. Rear gate - if the rear gate cannot be opened 419
9-12. Moonroof (if equipped) - if the moonroof does not close....420
9-13. If your vehicle is involved in an accident ...4 To restart the engine when involved in an accident .... 420 Auto lock/unlock operation when involved in an accident .... 421

9-1. If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency NOTE When the tur

305592

The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be activated regardless of the ignition switch position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again.

When the hazard warning flasher is the turn signals do not work.

9-2. Maintenance tools on,

1 2 3 1 4 5 6 900967

Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools.

1. Extension
2. Wheel nut wrench

3. Jack handle

4. Jack

5. Screwdriver
6. Towing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)

Jack and jack handle

Interior view of a car showing the door, vent, and side panel with a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The jack and jack handle is stored under the cargo area.

For how to use the jack, refer to "Flat P406.

9-3. Spare tire

Line drawing of a car rear view and side profile details (no text or symbols)

The spare tire is stored in the spare tire holder located under the cargo area.

The spare tire holder has a hoist mechanism that can lower and raise the spare tire easily.

time" The spare tire holder is designed to carry only the following kinds of tires.

● The temporary spare tire that came with your vehicle
- A full-size flat tire

A full size flat tire should be stowed in the spare tire holder in an emergency only. After having the full-size flat tire repaired, immediately swap it with the temporary spare tire.

Before using the temporary spare tire,

carefully read "Temporary spare tire" P405 for instructions and precautions.

■ Removing the spare tire

1. Take the wheel nut wrench, screwdriver, and extension out of the tool box. Refer to "Maintenance tools" P400.

Diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle's side panel with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

1. Remove the subfloor storage lid in cargo area.
2. Take out the jack.

Diagram of a square clamp with a rod inserted, against a grid background (no text or symbols)

1. Open the cover located at the center the luggage floor by screwdriver.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle engine compartment with a central shaft (no text or symbols)

6f Fit the two extensions onto the hex-head hoist shaft end.

Diagram of a vehicle interior showing a circular component with an arrow pointing to it, no text or symbols present.

1. Remove the rubber cap.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle engine compartment with no visible text or symbols

1. Fit the wheel nut wrench onto the extension.
2. Turn the hoist shaft end counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench until the

cable is extracted fully.

CAUTION

• Be sure to remove (not simply keep it open) the subfloor storage lid before turning the wheel nut wrench, otherwise the lid may be damaged.
• Do not put your fingers into the center hole of the temporary spare tire while pulling it out, because they might be pinched in between the wheel and the retainer.

Technical illustration showing car wheel assembly and tire treading technique (no text or symbols)

1. Tilt up the spare tire, then remove the tire retainer as showing in the figure.
2. After the temporary spare tire is removed from the cable, the cable must be wound up completely by turning the hoist nut shaft clockwise until you hear a clickin

sound. Also visually inspect the cable to make certain that there is no longer any slack present.

Mechanical diagram showing a wheel assembly with a tool, no text or symbols present

WARNING

• Do not use the extension when turning the wheel nuts. If you did, you would not be able to achieve sufficient tightening torque. The wheel nuts could then come loose, resulting in a serious accident.
• When using the spare tire hoist: After the temporary spare tire is removed from the cable, wind the cable up completely until the retainer at end of the cable sits against the underside of the ve-

hicle. Driving with the cable not retracted fully could result in damage to the adjacent under floor parts and lead to a serious accident.

- The spare tire holder is designed to carry only the following kinds of tires.

• The temporary spare tire that came with your vehicle
• A full-size flat tire

A full size flat tire should be stowed in the spare tire holder in an emergency only. After having the full-size flat tire repaired, immediately swap it with the temporary spare tire.

Never stow a full-size tire that is not flat in the spare tire holder. Doing so can result in damage to adjacent under floor parts and can lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

When using the spare tire hoist: Do not use air tools or power tools turn the spare tire hoist shaft end. you do, it could result in severe mechanical damage to the spare tire hoist.

■ Re-storage of spare tire

1. Turn the spare tire hoist shaft end counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench to loosen the cable sufficiently enough to allow the cable end retainer go through center hole of the temporary spare tire.

s to If e o re 901015

1. Insert the retainer through the center hole of the temporary tire as showing in figure.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle engine compartment with a tool inserted, showing structural details (no text or symbols)

1. Turn the hoist shaft end clockwise with the wheel nut wrench to wind the cable up completely until you hear a few clicking sounds. Confirm that the temporary spare tire holding cable has been wound up completely by shaking the temporary tire.

CAUTION

If the temporary spare tire is not stored securely, it could damage adjacent areas of the vehicle and make an abnormal noise.

4the install the rubber cap.

1. Install the cover.

2. Store the wheel nut wrench, two extensions, jack and jack handle in their storage locations.

3. Fit the lid of the cargo area.

CAUTION

• When stowing a flat tire in the spare tire holder, turn the hoist shaft end only slowly. If it is turned quickly, the wheel disc of the flat tire could be damaged.
• A full-size flat tire should be stowed in the spare tire holder in an emergency only. After having the flat tire repaired, immediately swap it with the temporary spare tire.
• Remember that the tread width of a flat tire is wider than that of temporary spare tire. When carrying a flat tire stowed in the spare tire holder, make sure the tire does not touch any obstacles.

9-4. Temporary spare tire

WARNING

• Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead to an accident.
• When a spare tire is mounted or wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and or system resetting.

CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drivetrain of your vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire and is designed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and re-install the conventional tire as soon as possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use. The correct pressure is 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm

When using the temporary spare tire, note the following.

• Drive with caution when the temporary spare tire is installed. Avoid hard acceleration and braking, or fast cornering, as control of the vehicle may be lost.
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly.
• Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time.
• Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so road clearance is reduced.

- CONTINUED -

1 2 900231

1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark

• When the wear indicator appears on the tread, replace the tire.
• The temporary spare tire must be used only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire gets punctured, replace the wheel with a rear wheel and install the temporary spare tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

9-5. Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, new brake suddenly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

■ Changing a flat tire

WARNING

• Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road surface. The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the ground and this can result in a severe accident.
• Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never get under the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.

- Always turn off the engine before raising the flat tire off the ground using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle supported with the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point due to a jolt and this can result in a severe acci-

dent.

er1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and shift the select lever to the "P" (Park) position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have everyone get out of the vehicle.

Diagram of a car with wheels and a foot, showing motion direction (no text or symbols)

1. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

1 2 3 900973

1) Wheel nut wrench
2) Jack handle
3) Jack

1. Take out the jack, jack handle and wheel nut wrench.

The tools are stored under the cargo area. Refer to "Maintenance tools" P400.

NOTE

Make sure that the jack is well lubricated before using it.

1. Remove the spare tire.

Refer to "Removing the spare tire" P401 and strictly follow the instructions.

NOTE

If the spare tire provided in your is a temporary spare tire, carefully

"Temporary spare tire" P405 and strictly follow the instructions.

Diagram of a car wheel with spokes and a central shaft, showing no text or symbols

1. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove the nuts

a. 900635

vehicle Jack-up points read

1. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat tire.

Mechanical linkage diagram with no visible text or symbols

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

Line drawing of a car tire being adjusted with a tool, no text or symbols present

1. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

- CONTINUED -

screw, and turn the handle until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the veh higher than necessary.

1. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.

Line drawing of a hand turning a brake disc with a car body (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a hand fastening a car tire with a ball partially visible (no text or symbols)

1. Before putting the spare tire on, cle

the mounting surface of the wheel and cloth with a cloth.

1. Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the w studs or nuts when the spare tire installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an accident.

1. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.

600192

1. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration.

the wheel nut tightening torque, refer to "Tires" P480. Never use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed the specified torque. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility.

wheel

Technical illustration of a bicycle wheel assembly with a tool, showing no text or symbols

WARNING

Do not use the extension when turning the wheel nuts. If you did, you would not be able to achieve sufficient tightening torque. The wheel nuts could then come loose, resulting in a serious accident.

the 15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire holder.

Refer to "Removing the spare tire" P40 for its location, instructions and precautions.

1. Store the jack, jack handle and whee nut wrench in their storage locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury. Store the tire and all tools the proper place.

■ Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

in 702056

The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with the warning message indicated by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused running over a sharp object).

WARNING

- If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe place. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.
(3) Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the vehicle placard on the door pillar on the driver's side.

If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace with a spare tire as soon as possible.

- When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/trans-

- CONTINUED -

mitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is una to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

- When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel if there is no damage to it and if a sealant residue is properly cleaned off.

If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

9-6. Jump starting

WARNING

- Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area with water immediately. Get medical help if the fluid has entered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical help.

Keep everyone including children away from the battery.

• The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke light a match while jump starting

- Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to burst or explode.

- Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings, bands or other metal jewelry.

• Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have loose or missing insulation. Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are available.
• A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.
• Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.

■ How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.

Technical diagram showing car engine wiring connections with labeled components and a battery terminal

A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other cable to the negative (−) terminal of the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.

1. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle that has the discharged battery.

2. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order.

9-7. Engine overheating

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radial cap until the engine has been shot off and has fully cooled down. With the engine is hot, the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very seriously.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off road and stop the vehicle in a safe location.

■ If steam is coming from the engine compartment

• Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" "OFF" position and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down.
• Contact an authorized SUBARU dealer.

■ If no steam is coming from engine compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idling speed.

2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the down and turning it. engine compartment. Refer to "Engine hood" P435.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, immediately turn off the engine and contact an authorized tSUBARU dealer for repair.

en After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the engine. If the temperature gauge stays in the overheated zone, turn off the engine.

1. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If the coolant level is below the "LOW" mark, add coolant up to the "FULL" mark.

NOTE

For details about how to check the coolant level or how to add coolant, Refer to "Engine coolant" P441.

1. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the cap by pressing

9-8. Towing

If towing is necessary, it is best done your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service. Observe the following procedures for safety.

Three identical line-drawn car illustrations on a road with a diagonal no-interference symbol (no text or labels)

WARNING

Never tow AWD models with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels are on the ground. This would cause the vehicle to spin away due to the operation or deterioration of the center differential.

■ Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes

byThe towing hooks should be used only an emergency.

CAUTION

Use only the specified towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes. Never use suspension parts or other parts of the body for towing or tie-down purposes.

▼ Front towing hook

The front towing hook is located on the bottom of the body on the front left side the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car's front and rear suspension components (no text or symbols)

▼ Rear towing hook

1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver input of the tool bucket. Take the jack handle out of the cargo area.

Diagram of a car's side panel showing a lever mechanism (no text or symbols present)

1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not scratch the bumper. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and you will find a threaded hole for attaching the towing hook.

Diagram of a car door handle with a lever and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

1. Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
   

Illustration of a car being adjusted for a tool, showing hands using a wrench to adjust the component (no text or symbols present)

1. Tighten the towing hook securely using the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket ▼ Rear tie-down holes Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

• Do not use the towing hook except when towing your vehicle.
• Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehicle could interfere with proper operation of the fuel pump shut off function when the vehicle is struck from behind.

▼ Front tie-down hooks

Technical diagram of a car chassis frame with two inset views showing internal components (no text or symbols)

The front tie-down hooks are located between each of the front tires and the front bumper.

Technical diagram showing car assembly with labeled components and a numbered reference number

1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near each of the jack-up reinforcements. There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole. To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the

- CONTINUED -

plugs. After using the rear tie-down hole return the plugs to their original places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only downward anchoring. If they are used to anchor the vehicle in any other direction, cables may slip out of the holes, possibly causing a dangerous situation.

■ Using a flat-bed truck

Line drawing of a flatbed truck with a car on top, no text or symbols present

This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the following procedures to ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the select lever into the "P" position.
2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

es3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally tightened and must be taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out. for

CAUTION

• If your vehicle has a bumper under guard (optional), be careful not to scrape it when placing the vehicle on the carrier and when removing the vehicle from the carrier.
• Transport by flat-bed truck may cause the headlights to become misaligned. In such a case, have the headlight alignment checked by a SUBARU dealer after transporting the vehicle by flat-bed truck.

■ Towing with all wheels on the ground

Line drawing of a truck and a car on a road, no text or symbols present

1. Release the parking brake and put the transmission in the neutral position.
2. The ignition switch should be in the "ON" position while the vehicle is being towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

- Never turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position while the vehicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the direction of the wheels will be locked.

- Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel.

CAUTION

• If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
• The traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (32 km/h) and the traveling distance to less than 31 miles (50 km). greater speeds and distances, transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

9-9. Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released

Contact your SUBARU dealer and have your SUBARU dealer release the electronic parking brake.

For

9-10. Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic sources and signal transmitters away from the area between the access key fob and the push-button ignition switch. They may interfere with the communication between the access key fob and the push-button ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperable because of strong radio signals in the surrounding area or a low battery condition of the access key fob.

• Locking/unlocking doors (including the rear gate)
• Switching power status
• Starting engine

In such cases, perform the following procedure. When the battery of the access key fob is discharged, replace it with a new one. Refer to "Replacing battery of access key fob" P469.

■ Locking and unlocking

1 2 202500

1) Release button 2) Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the access key fob, take out the emergency key.

Lock or unlock the driver's door with the emergency key in the procedure described in "Locking and unlocking from the outside" P138.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure attach the emergency key back to access key fob.

■ Switching power status

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever to the "P" (Park position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.

Line drawing of a car interior showing a hand holding a handheld device, no text or symbols present

1. Hold the access key fob with the buttons facing you, and touch the push-button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle is completed, a chime (ding) will sound. At the same time, the status of the push-button ignition switch changes to either of the following.

- When the keyless access with push-button start system is deactivated: "ACC" - Under other conditions: "ON"

1. When the keyless access with push-button start system is deactivated, press the push-button ignition switch with the brake pedal released. The status of the push-button ignition switch then changes to "ON".

NOTE

If the power does not switch even though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

■ Starting engine

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever to the "P" (Park) position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.

Line drawing of a car interior showing a hand holding a remote control panel (no text or symbols)

1. Hold the access key fob with the buttons facing you, and touch the push-button ignition switch with it.
   When the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle is completed, a chime (ding) will sound. At the same time, the push-button ignition switch turns to the "ACC" or "ON" position.
2. After the push-button ignition switch turns to the "ACC" or "ON" position, while depressing the brake pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

If the engine does not start even to the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU deal

9-11. Rear gate – if the re gate cannot be opened

In the event that you cannot open the gate by operating the rear gate opener button, you can open it from inside the cargo area.

e rough er. 900949

1. Remove the access cover at the bottom-center of the rear gate trim using a flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl tape or a cloth.
2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind the rear gate trim.

CAUTION

Never operate the rear gate open lever with fingers because doing may cause an injury. Always use flat-head screwdriver or a similar tool.

so a

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a clamp inserted into a housing component (no text or symbols)

Models without power rear gate

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with no visible text or symbols

Models with power rear gate

1. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to the right position.

9-12. Moonroof (if equipped) 9-13. If your vehicle is in- - if the moonroof does notvolved in an accident close

If the moonroof does not close, we recommend that you have the system checked by a SUBARU dealer.

■ To restart the engine when involved in an accident

CAUTION

If your vehicle is involved in an accident, be sure to inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that fuel has leaked on the ground, do not try to restart the engine. The fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Immediately contact the nearest automotive service facility. We recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off system. When the vehicle sustains an impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying the fuel in order to minimize fuel leakage. However, depending on the impact conditions at the time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off system may not operate. Perform the following procedures to restart the engine after the system is activated.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position.
2. Restart the engine.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch the "ACC" or "OFF" position.
2. Restart the engine.

■ Auto lock/unlock operation when involved in an accider

When the auto lock/unlock function is Of all the doors will be locked automatically while driving. For further details, refer to "Automatic door locking/unlocking" P140.

When the vehicle sustains a strong impact which may trigger the airbags to deploy, the door locks may be unlocked automatically to enable emergency escape. Generally, an impact sustained from a rear e collision does not trigger the airbags to deploy. However if the impact is strong enough to deploy the airbags, it can also trigger the unlocking function.

Under such circumstance, the auto unlock lock function will be suspended and the doors will remain unlocked.

Confirm the safety of the surroundings first and carry out the following to retrieve the 'auto door lock function.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ON" position.

NOTE

Depending on the severity of the impact, the emergency unlocking may not function.

CAUTION

If the following occur, there may malfunction in the system.

Have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer.

- The doors unlock automatically while driving.

With all doors shut, the doors unlock when pressing the lock side of the power door locking switch.
- The auto door lock function does not operate.

be a

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Appearance care

10-1. Exterior care.... 424

Washing 424

Waxing and polishing 425

Cleaning alloy wheels 426

10-2. Corrosion protection 426

Most common causes of corrosion 426

To help prevent corrosion ....426

10-3. Cleaning the interior 427

Seat fabric 427

Leather seat materials 427

Synthetic leather upholstery.... 428

Water repellent seat material (if equipped) 428

Seatbelt 428

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, and switches 428

Monitor 428

10-1. Exterior care

■ Washing

CAUTION

• When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
• Do not wash the engine compartment and area adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air intake or electrical parts, it will cause engine trouble or a malfunction of electrical equipment.
• When washing inner fenders, underbody, bumpers and protruding objects such as exhaust pipes and exhaust finishers, be careful to prevent injuries from contacting sharp ends.
• Do not use any organic solvents when washing the surface of the bulb assembly cover. However, it a detergent with organic solvents is used to wash the cover surface, completely rinse off the detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be damaged. - Since your vehicle is equipped with a rear wiper, automatic carwash brushes could become tangled around it, damaging the wiper arm and other components. Ask the automatic carwash operator not to let the brushes touch the wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm on the rear window glass with adhesive tape before operating the machine.

NOTE

- When having your vehicle washed an automatic car wash, make sure beforehand that the car wash is of suitable type. - The rear view camera lens has a coating to help prevent scratches. However, when washing the vehicle cleaning the camera lens, be careful to scratch the camera lens. Do not washing brush directly on the came lens. The image quality of the rear camera may deteriorate.

The best way to preserve your vehicle's beauty is frequent washing. Wash the vehicle at least once a month to avoid contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap, and bird droppings should be washed off using a light detergent, as required. If you use a light detergent, make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a chamois or soft cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand brush when washing down underbody, inner fenders and suspension to effectively remove mud and dirt off.

hard Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deicing road surfaces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, view pan and fenders, and suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody leak into the vehicle. components may accelerate their corrosion. ■ Waxing and

After driving off-road or on muddy or sand roads, wash the mud and sand off the underbody. Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts, as they are particularly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud

CAUTION

• Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor harnesses, and other parts when washing suspension components.
• Be careful not to flush the engine bottom for a long time. It may cause damage of some electrical parts.

▼ Using a warm water washer

• Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm or more between the washer nozzle and the vehicle.
• Do not wash the same area continuously.
• If a stain will not come out easily, was by hand. Some warm water washers are the high temperature, high pressure type and they can damage or deform the res parts such as moldings, or cause water

■ Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them according to the manufacturer's instructions. Wax or polish when the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss the original luster and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the luster or to cannot be restored, lightly polish the surface with a fine-grained compound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the surrounding area as well. Always polish in only one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-grained compounds have a smaller grain

size number and could damage the pain. After polishing with a compound, coat w wax to restore the original luster. Freque polishing with a compound or an incorre

polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer and exposing the under-coat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic solvents on the surface of the bulb assembly cover. However, if a polish or wax with organic solvents is applied to the cover surface, completely wipe off the polish or wax. Otherwise, the cover surface may be damaged.

NOTE

• Be careful not to block the wind-shield washer nozzles with wax when waxing the vehicle.
• Do not wipe the rear view camera with alcohol, benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To remove contamination, wipe the camera with a cloth moistened with diluted neutral detergent and then wipe it with soft, dry cloth.
  When waxing the vehicle, be careful not to apply the wax to the rear view camera. If it comes in contact with the camera, moisten a clean cloth with

diluted neutral detergent to remove wax.

■ Cleaning alloy wheels

• Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left too long, it may be difficult to clean off.
• Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with stiff brush or expose them to a high-spe washing device.
• Clean the vehicle (including the alloy wheels) with water as soon as possible when it has been splashed with sea was exposed to sea breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.

theP0-2. Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes have been used most parts of the vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable operation.

■ Most common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion are:

• The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
• Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone cl or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:

- It is exposed to road salt or dust cont chemicals, or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial pollution.

• It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially when temperatures range just above freezing.
• Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.
- High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

■ To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent corrosion of the body and suspension components. Also, wash the vehicle promptly after driving on any of the following surfaces.

● roads that have been salted to prevent them from freezing in winter
- mud, sand, or gravel
- coastal roads

ps. After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the recondition of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropriate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under the floor mat because that could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. In such a garage, corrosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in areas where road salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hot latch should be inspected and lubricated periodically.

10-3. Cleaning the interior

as

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the clir control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches. (Do not use organic solvents.)

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may damage the conductors printed on the window.

Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly w/ cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a sol of mild soap and lukewarm water then thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and

make sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Use the cleaner according to its instructions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, paint thinner, or any similar materials. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color to deteriorate.

■ Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural product which will retain its distinctive appearance and feel for many years with proper care. Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can cause the material to become brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber cloth should be performed monthly, taking care not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the stitched seams. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woolen fabrics may be used to remove difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in bright sunlight, it is recommended that the seats and head restraints be

covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading or shrinkage.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treated with a commercial leather spray lacquer. You will discover that each leather seat section will develop soft fold or wrinkles, which is characteristic of genuine leather.

■ Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and w off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when necessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window cleaner or fuel must never be used on leather or synthetic interior materials. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color to deteriorate.

■ Water repellent seat material (if equipped)

The water repellency of the seat fabric decrease over time. Do not apply additional water repellent coating.

Seatbelt

For details about how to clean the seat refer to "Seatbelt maintenance" P61.

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument panel, console panel, and switches

wire a soft, damp cloth to clean the clin control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

• Do not use organic solvents such as paint thinners or fuel, or strong cleaning agents that contain those solvents. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color to deteriorate.
• Do not use chemical solvents that contain silicone on the vehicle audio system, electrical components of the air-conditioner or any switches. If silicone adheres

to these parts, it may cause damage to electrical components.

Monitor

To clean the audio/navigation/multi-function display monitor, wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with neutral detergent then carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

• Do not spray neutral detergent directly onto the monitor. Doing so could damage the monitor's components.
• Do not wipe the monitor with a hard cloth. Doing so could scratch the monitor.
• Do not use cleaning fluid that contains thinner, fuel, or any other volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid could erase the lettering on the switches at the bottom of the monitor.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Maintenance and service

11-1. Maintenance schedule.... 433
11-2. Maintenance precautions 438

Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment 434

When checking or servicing in the engine compartment 434

When checking or servicing in the engine compartment while the engine is running.... 435

11-3. Engine hood 435
11-4. Engine compartment overview 437
11-5. Engine oil.... 438

Engine oil consumption 438

Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap and oil filter 438

Checking the oil level 438

Changing the oil and oil filter.... 439

Recommended grade and viscosity.... 440

Synthetic oil 440

11-6. Cooling system 440
Safety precautions.... 440
Cooling fan, hose and connections 441
Engine coolant 441
11-7. Air cleaner element.... 442
Replacing the air cleaner element 44\$
11-8. Spark plugs 444
Recommended spark plugs.... 444
11-9. Drive belts 444

11-10. Continuously variable transmission fluid 444
11-11. Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil....445 Recommended grade and viscosity .... 445
11-12. Brake fluid....445 Checking the fluid level....445 Recommended brake fluid....446
11-13. Brake booster ....446
11-14. Brake pedal 446
11-15. Replacement of brake pad ....447 Breaking-in of new brake pads .... 447
11-16. Tires and wheels....447

Types of tires 447
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if equipped) 448
Tire inspection 449
Tire pressures and wear.... 450
Wheel balance 451
Wear indicators 452
Rotational direction of tires 452
Tire rotation 453
Tire replacement 453
Wheel replacement.... 454

11-17. Alloy wheels....455

11-18. Windshield washer fluid....455 Adding the windshield washer fluid .... 45

Windshield washer fluid 455

Maintenance and service

11-19. Replacement of wiper blades.... 456

Windshield wiper blade assembly 457

Window wiper blade rubber 458

Rear window wiper blade assembly 458

Rear window wiper blade rubber.... 459

11-20. Battery 460

11-21. Fuses 461

11-22. Installation of accessories 462

11-23. Replacing bulbs 463

Headlights (models with LED headlights) 463

Headlights (models with halogen headlights) ..... 463

Front turn signal light 464

Rear combination lights 465

License plate light 467

Map light 467

Vanity mirror light 467

Door step light 467

Rear reading light 467

Cargo area light 468

Other bulbs.... 468

11-24. Replacing key battery 468

Safety precautions 468

Replacing battery of access key fob 469

Replacing transmitter battery 470

11-1. Maintenance schedule

U.S. models

The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". For details, read the separate "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

Canada models

The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the "Warranty and Service Booklet". For details, read the separate "Warranty and Service Booklet".

Except for U.S. and Canada models Some items of your vehicle are required be serviced at scheduled intervals. For details about your maintenance schedule read the separate "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

NOTE

For models with a multi-function display (color LCD), you can set a reminder to be displayed when a scheduled maintenance item is almost due. For details, refer to "Maintenance settings" P218.

11-2. Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all work done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service yourself, you should familiarize yourself with the information provided in this section on general maintenance and service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage

TO WARNING

• Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on your vehicle.
- Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of the materials in the vehicle may be hazardous if improperly used or handled, for example, battery acid.
- Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent to do so. Serious personal injury may result to persons not experienced in servicing vehicles.
be • Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are well maintained.
by. Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use safety stands to support the vehicle.
- Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area, such as a garage or other closed areas.
- Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery. This will cause a fire.
- Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer.
- Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or fluids in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes, thoroughly wash them out with clean water.
- Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS airbag system or seat-belt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors

apart, as this may activate the system or render it inoperative. NEVER use a circuit tester for this wiring. If your SRS airbag seatbelt pretensioner needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of non-SUBARU approved flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU approved flushing systems use chemicals and/or solvents which have not been tested or approved by SUBARU. SUBARU warranties do not cover any part of the vehicle which is damaged adding or applying chemicals and/or solvents other than those approved or recommended by SUBARU.

■ Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment

WARNING

• Always stop the engine and apply the parking brake firmly to prevent the vehicle from moving.

- Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time after engine has stopped.

- Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire.

of When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly even when the engine is stopped. If your body or clothes come into contact with a rotating fan, that could result in serious injury. To avoid risk of injury, perform the following precautions.

by- Models with push-button start system:

Always turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position and confirm that the operation indicator on the switch is turned off. Then take the access key fob out from the vehicle.

- Models without push-button start system:

Always remove the key from the ignition switch.

- Before performing any servicing on a vehicle equipped with a remote engine start system (a dealer option), temporarily place the remote engine start system in service mode to prevent it from unexpectedly starting the engine.

■ When checking or servicing in the engine compartment

Engine bay diagram showing engine components and structural parts (no text or labels)

CAUTION

- Do not contact the drive belt cover while checking the components in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause your hand to slip off the cover and result in an

unexpected injury.

- Do not touch the oil filter until the engine has cooled down completely. Doing so may result in a b or other injury. Note that the oil filter becomes very hot when the engine is running and remains hot for some time after the engine has stopped.

■ When checking or servicing in the engine compartment while the engine is running

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, drive belt and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.

11-3. Engine hood

the

burn

CAUTION

• Be extremely careful not to catch fingers or other objects when closing the engine hood.
• Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the me
• Be extremely careful opening the engine hood when the wind is strong. The engine hood could close suddenly, possibly causing injuries from slamming.
• Do not install accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts to the engine hood. If the engine hood becomes too heavy, the stay may not be able to support holding it open.

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield, return them to their original position.

al. B01800

1. Pull the hood release knob under instrument panel.

Diagram of a car showing engine compartment and structural change, with no visible text or symbols

1. Release the secondary hood release by moving the lever between the front grille and the hood toward the left.

B01815

1. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and put the end of the hood prop into the slot in the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approximately 11.8 in (30 cm) above its closed position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is properly locked before you start driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious bodily injury.

11-4. Engine compartment overview

1 2 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 B01798

1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 445)
2) Fuse box (page 461)
3) Windshield washer tank (page 455)
4) Battery (page 460)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 438)
6) Radiator cap (page 441)
7) Engine coolant reservoir (page 441)
8) Engine oil filter (page 439)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 438)
10) Air cleaner case (page 442)

11-5. Engine oil

CAUTION

• If the level gauge cannot be pulled out easily, twist the level gauge right and left, then gently pull it out. Otherwise, you may injured accidentally straining yourself.
• Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
• Be careful not to spill engine o when adding it. If oil touches exhaust pipe, it may cause a smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

■ Engine oil consumption

Some engine oil will be consumed while driving. The rate of consumption can be affected by such factors as transmission type, driving style, terrain and temperature. Under the following conditions, oil consumption can be increased and may require refilling between maintenance intervals.

- When the engine is new and within the

break-in period

• When the engine oil is of lower quality
• When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
• When engine braking is employed (repeatedly)

• When the engine is operated at high engine speeds (for extended periods of time)

• When the engine is operated under heavy loads (for extended periods of time)

• When towing a trailer
• When the engine idles for extended periods of time
• When the vehicle is operated in stop-and-go and/or heavy traffic situations
  bad When the vehicle is used under severe thermal conditions

- When the vehicle accelerates and decelerates frequently

Under these or similar conditions, you should check your oil at least every 2nd fuel fill-up and change your engine oil frequently. Different drivers in the same car may experience different results. If your oil consumption rate is greater than expected, contact your authorized SUBARU dealer who may perform a test under controlled conditions.

■ Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap and oil filter

1 2 3 B01804

1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
3) Oil filter

■ Checking the oil level

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/

"OFF" position. If you check the oil level just after turning the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level.

CAUTION

If the level gauge cannot be pull out easily, twist the level gauge and left, then gently pull it out. Otherwise, you may be injured a dentally straining yourself.

1. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean and insert it again.
2. Be sure the level gauge is correctly inserted until it stops.

1 2 3 B01175

1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 qt) from low level to full level

1. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
2. Check the oil levels on both sides level gauge. The engine oil level must

judged by the lowest of the two levels. the oil level is below the low level mark add oil so that the full level is reached.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to touch the eng oil filter when removing the oil filler cap. Doing so may result burn, a pinched finger, or may cause some other injury.
• Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
• Be careful not to spill engine when adding it. If oil touches exhaust pipe, it may cause a smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil filler cap and slowly pour engine oil through the filler neck. After pouring oil into the engine, you must use the level gauge to confirm that the oil level is correct.

NOTE

- To prevent overfilling the engine oil do not add any additional oil above upper level when the engine is cold.

If The engine low oil level warning light, may stay illuminated when the engine is started straight after topping up or changing the engine oil. In such cases, park the vehicle on a level surface and wait for more than a minute until the level settles, after which the warning light will turn off. Refer to "Engine low oil level warning light" P176.

■ Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequently made, or when driving in extremely cold weather.

NOTE

- Changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a well-trained expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer for changing the engine oil and oil filter Fully trained mechanics are on standby at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the special tools, spare parts and recommended oil for this work, and also, use oils are properly disposed of. - If performing oil replacement your-

- CONTINUED -

self, observe the local regulations dispose of waste oil properly.

■ Recommended grade and viscosity

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.

Refer to "Engine oil" P476.

NOTE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine.

■ Synthetic oil

You should use synthetic engine oil that meets the same requirements given for conventional engine oil. When using synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same classification, viscosity and grade shown in this Owner's Manual. Refer to "Engine oil" P476. Also, you must follow the oil and filter changing intervals shown in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscos noted in chapter 12 is the recommended engine oil for optimum engine performance. Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

11-6. Cooling system

■ Safety precautions

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.

CAUTION

- Vehicles are filled at the factory with SUBARU Super Coolant that does not require the first change for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 years/220,000 km). This coolant should not be mixed with any other brand or type of coolant during this period. Mixing with a different coolant will reduce the life of the coolant. Should it be necessary to add the coolant for any reason, use only SUBARU Super Coolant. If the SUBARU Super Coolant is diluted with another brand or

type, the maintenance interval is shortened to that of the mixing coolant.

- Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

■ Cooling fan, hose and connections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific temperature.

H C 1 C 305605

1) Normal operating range

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating range, the cooling fan circuit may be defective. Refer to "Engine coolant temperature gauge" P170.

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary Refer to "Fuses" P461 and "Fuse panel located in the engine compartment" P484.

If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the engine cool system. It is recommended that the cooling system and connections be checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

■ Engine coolant

▼ Checking the coolant level

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure you may suffer serious burns from spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.

1 2 B01805

1) "FULL" level mark
2) "LOW" level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel step. 1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reservoir while the engine is cool. 2. If the level is close to or lower than the "LOW" level mark, add coolant up to the "FULL" level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, remove the radiator cap and refel coolant up to just below the filler neck as shown in the following illustration.

1 B01806

1) Fill up to this level.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with concentric layers and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

1. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, reinstall the cap and check that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are in the proper position.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to spill engine coolant when adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine coolant gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
• Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

▼ Changing the coolant

It may be difficult to change the coolant. Have the coolant changed by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

11-7. Air cleaner element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed. The air ecleaner element not only filters in-take air but also stops flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner element, use a genuine SUBARU air cleaner element. If it is not used, it will cause a negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen. When the element is perforated or removed, engine wear will be excessive and engine life shortened.

It is not necessary to clean or wash the air cleaner element.

■ Replacing the air cleaner element

Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Under extremely dusty conditions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

B01816

1) Clip

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air cleaner case (rear).
2. Open the air cleaner case and pull cover rearward while lifting it up.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing hands installing a component with arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

1. Remove the air cleaner element.
2. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case (both front and rear) with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner element.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

1. To install the air cleaner case (rear), insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air cleaner case (front).

1. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE

Install the air cleaner element so that the surface with "UPR" printed on it faces upward.

11-8. Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is recommended that you have spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Book let".

CAUTION

Make sure the cables are replaced the correct order.

■ Recommended spark plugs

For the recommended spark plugs, refer "Electrical system" P480.

11-9. Drive belts

It is unnecessary to check the deflection the drive belt periodically because your engine is equipped with an automatic be tension adjuster. However, replacement of the belt should be done according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement. If the drive belt is loose, cracked or wo contact your SUBARU dealer.

in

to

11-10. Continuously variable transmission fluid

It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. Check that there are no cracks, damage or leakage. However, the fluid inspection should be performed according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. n,

11-11. Front differential gear 11-12. Brake fluid oil and rear differential gear ■ Checking the flui

It is not necessary to check the gear oil level. Check that there are no cracks, damage or leakage. However, the oil inspection should be performed according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Recommended grade and viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different brands together. For details, refer to "Fr differential and rear differential gear oil" P478.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil other than the specified oil may cause decline in vehicle performance.

■ Checking the fluid level

WARNING

• Never let brake fluid contact your eyes because brake fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.
• Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance.
• If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.

a

CAUTION

• When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir.
• Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts

Alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them.

- Be careful not to spill brake fluid when adding it. If brake fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If brake fluid gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

1 A 2 B01807

1) "MAX" level line
2) "MIN" level line
A) The brake fluid level must be checked in this area.

re- Check the fluid level monthly.

the Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level for the brake system at the shaded area in its. the illustration.

- CONTINUED -

If the fluid level is below "MIN", add the recommended brake fluid to "MAX". Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.

■ Recommended brake fluid Refer to "Fluids" P479.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake fluid together. Also, avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even they are the same brand.

11-13. Brake booster

The brake booster utilizes the vacuum produced by the engine manifold to red the force required to depress the brake pedal.

The vacuum in the brake booster may be insufficient if the brake pedal is depressed when the engine is stopped or after the vehicle has been parked for a long period of time. It such cases, it is necessary to depress the brake pedal using greater force than usual.

11-14. Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

11-15. Replacement of brake pad

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with internal components and motion lines (no text or symbols)

The disc brakes have audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indicator, it will result in the need for costly brake rotor repair or replacement.

■ Breaking-in of new brake pads

When replacing the brake pad, use only genuine SUBARU parts. After replacement, the new parts must be broken in. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details

11-16. Tires and wheels

■ Types of tires

You should be familiar with the type of tires present on your vehicle.

▼ All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving including snowy and icy road conditions. However, all season tires do not offer as much traction performance in winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by "ALL SEASON" and/or "M+S" (Mud & Snow) on the tire sidewall.

▼ Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suited for highway driving under dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads, we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

▼ Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving o snow-covered and icy roads. However, winter tires do not perform as well as summer tires and all season tires on ro other than snow-covered and icy roads.

■ Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if equipped)

The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven. Also, this system may react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a war garage and will then drive the vehicle in cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire pressures may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. To avoid this problem when adjusting the tire pressure in a warm garage, inflate the tires to pressures higher than those shown on the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kg) from every difference of 10°F (5.6°C) between the temperature in the garage and the temperature outside. By way of example the following table shows the required tip pressures that correspond to various out side temperatures when the temperature in the garage is 60°F (15.6°C).

Example:

Tire size: 245/50R20 102H
Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kg/cm Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kg/cm

Garage temperature: 60°F (15.6°C)

Outside temperature	Adjusted pressure [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
	Front Rear
^30F (-1°C) 36 (250, 2.5)
^10F (-12°C)	38 (265, 2.65)
-10°F (-23°C)	41 (280, 2.8)

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates when you drive the vehicle in cold outside air after adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tire pressures using the method describe above. Then, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check see that the low tire pressure warning light turns off a few minutes later. If the low pressure warning light does not turn off, the tire pressure monitoring system may not be functioning normally. In this even go to a SUBARU dealer to have the , system inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction between tires and the road surface causes the tires to warm up. After illumination of the low tire pressure warning light, any increase in the tire pressures caused by an increase in the outside air temperature or by an increase in the temperature in the tires can cause the low tire pressure warning light to turn off.

System resetting is necessary when the wheels are changed (for example, a switch to snow tires) and new TPMS valves are installed on the newly fitted wheels. Have this work performed by a SUBARU dealer following wheel replacement.

It may not be possible to install TPMS valves on certain wheels that are on the market. Therefore, if you change the wheels (for example, a switch to snow tires), use wheels that have the same part number as the standard-equipment wheels. Without four operational TPMS valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS will not fully function and the warning light on the combination meter will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments are necessary to ensure continued normal

operation of the tire pressure monitoring system. Therefore, as with wheel replacement, you should have the work performed by a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light does not illuminate briefly after the ignition switch is turned ON or the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute, you should have your tire pressure monitoring system checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving never brake suddenly and keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place. Otherwise, an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you a flat tire, replace it with a spare as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or

wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting. If the light illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute, promptly contact SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

■ Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the t are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same tin check the tires for abnormal wear Contact your SUBARU dealer im- mediately if you find any problems

NOTE

When the wheels and tires have strike curbs or are subjected to the harsh treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a rough

surface, they can suffer damage that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This type of damage does not become evident until time has passed. Try not to drive over curbs, potholes or on other rough surfaces. If doing so is unavoidable, keep the vehicle's speed down to a walking pace of less, and approach the curbs as squarely as possible. Also, make sure the tires are not pressed against the curb when you park the vehicle.

- If you feel unusual vibration is while driving or find it difficult to steer the vehicle in a straight line one of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle in-spected.

■ Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maximize the tires' service lives and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare - if equipped) at least once month (for example, during a fuel stop) and before any long journey

Diagram of car interior showing cable routing and a switch mechanism (no text or symbols)

Tire placard

Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the door pillar on the driver's side.

Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.

NOTE

- The air pressure in a tire increases by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm ^2 ) when the tire becomes warm.

- The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or has been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pressure. Doing so will result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnormally.

1 2 3 B01703

1) Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering is responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also lower.

2) Under inflated tire (tread worn on shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.

3) Over inflated (tread worn in the center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the effects of road-surface bumps and dips, possibly resulting in vehicle damage.

If the tire placard shows tire pressures for the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the tire pressures to the values that match the loading conditions.

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly heat up. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss

vehicle control could lead to an accident.

■ Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle's straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly balanced, have them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also have them adjusted after tire repairs and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel alignment causes the tires to wear on one side and reduces the vehicle's running stability.

- CONTINUED -

Contact your SUBARU dealer if you notice abnormal tire wear.

NOTE

The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the road) optimum straight-line stability and cornering performance.

■ Wear indicators

1 3 2 B00327

1) New tread
2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

When a tire's tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators

become visible.

■ Rotational direction of tires

S 1 ROTATION B00550

this Example of rotational direction marked on the sidewall

1) Front

If the tires have specific rotational direction, refer to the arrow marked an on the side wall.

The arrow should be pointing forward direction when the wheels are fitted.

graph TD
    A["Tire rotation"] --> B["1"]
    B --> C["X"]
    C --> D["2"]
    D --> E["B00546"]

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirectional tires 1) Front

graph TD
    A["Process Step 1"] --> B["Process Step 2"]
    B --> C["End"]

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires 1) Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. Move the tires to the positions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated. For the tire rotation schedule, refer to the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tires at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the whe nuts are correctly tightened.

After driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again and retighten any nut that has become loose.

For handling alloy wheels, refer to "Alloy wheels" = P455.

■ Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and integral parts of your vehicle's design; they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires fitted as standard equipment are optimally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and were selected to give the best possible combination of running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It is essential for every tire to have a size and construction matching those shown on the tire placard and to have a speed symbol and load index matching those shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from controllability, ride comfort, braking performance, speedometer accuracy and odometer accuracy. It also creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropriately changes the vehicle's ground clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to

- CONTINUED -

replace the tires with new ones that are identical to those fitted as standard equipment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends replacing all four tires at the same time.

WARNING

- When replacing or installing tire(s), all four tires must be the same for following items.

(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degree of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver's door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same for items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could occur to the drivetrain of your car, and

affect the following.

• Ride
• Handling
• Braking
• Speedometer/Odometer calibration
• Clearance between the body and tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

- Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires together with belted bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. Doing so can dangerously reduce controllability, resulting in an accident.

■ Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage, make sure the replacement wheels match the specifications of the wheels that are fitted as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available at your SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle. Wheels not meeting specifications could interfere with brake caliper operation and may cause the tires to rub against the wheel well housing during turns. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

NOTE

When any of the wheels are removed and replaced for tire rotation or for any other reason, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the specified torque.

11-17. Alloy wheels

Alloy wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety.

• When any of the wheels are removed and replaced for tire rotation or to change flat tire, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the specified torque.
• Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the wheel.
• Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs.
• When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap are replaced, be sure to replace them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for alloy wheels.
• When stacking and storing removed tires, place shock-absorbing material between the tires to protect the wheels from becoming scratched.

11-18. Windshield washer fluid

e a B01704

When there is only a small amount of washer fluid remaining, the windshield washer fluid warning light will illuminate. When this occurs, refill the washer fluid

■ Adding the windshield washer fluid

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as wash fluid because it could cause paint damage.

Technical diagram showing engine compartment with a mechanical component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then add windshield washer fluid.

■ Windshield washer fluid

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable, use clean water. In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-freeze type windshield washer fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% surfactant by volume. Its freezing temperature varies according to how much it is diluted, as indicated in the following table.

Washer Fluid Concentration	Freezing Temperature
30%	10.4°F (-12°C)
50% -4°F (-20°C)
100% -49°F (-45°C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid check the freezing temperatures in the table above when adjusting the fluid concentration to the outside temperature. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

• Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze the reservoir tank.
  • State or local regulations on

fluid,

volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer anti-freeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle's paint, wiper blade or washer system.

with

in

11-19. Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on the windshield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield (or rear window) and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.

CAUTION

• Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzine. This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades.
• While removing the wiper blades from the wiper arms, do not return the wiper arms to the original positions. Otherwise, the windshield surface may be scratched.
• When returning the raised wiper

arms to the original positions, carefully return the wiper arms on the windshield by hand. You should not return the wiper arms to the windshield only by the return spring. Otherwise, the wiper arms may be deformed and/or the windshield surface may be scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this method, replace the wiper blades using the following procedures.

■ Windshield wiper blade assembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

Diagram of a car with a hand adjusting the dashboard, no text or symbols present

CAUTION

Hold the wiper arm when replacing the wiper blade. Holding the wiper blade, may result in blade deformation.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with directional arrows and labeled part '1', no readable text or symbols present.

1) Lock knob

1. Hold the wiper blade connection by hand, push the lock knob to release the lock, and then pull out the wiper blade assembly.

NOTE

Do not use a hard object to push the lock knob. The lock knob may be scratched.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with a downward arrow indicating a force or adjustment (no text or symbols present)

1. When installing the wiper blade assembly, align it with the wiper arm connection part and then slide it in the opposite direction of removal to install. After installing the wiper blade assembly, check that the connection part is locked completely and 4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

■ Window wiper blade rubber

Two-step diagram showing a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present.

Replace the wiper blade rubber according to the following procedure.

1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit on the underside of the wiper blade is in the removal position, as shown in the

illustration, so that it can be removed. 2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber through the slit to remove it. 3. To install a new wiper blade rubber, perform the removal procedure in the reverse order. After installation, check that the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the end of the cap.

NOTE

It may be difficult to perform the wiper blade rubber replacement. We recommend that you contact your SUBARU _2 dealer for wiper blade rubber replacement if necessary.

■ Rear window wiper blade assembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear window.

the ber B00061

1. Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.

Diagram showing a mechanical or structural component with an arrow indicating rotational motion (no text or symbols present)

1. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward you to remove it from the wiper arm.

2. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

3. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slo lower it in position.

■ Rear window wiper blade rubber

Diagram showing a curved object with an arrow pointing to it, labeled '700017' (no text or symbols on the object itself)

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber assembly to unlock it from the plastic support.

Diagram showing a curved mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction, labeled 'B00064' (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

1. Pull the blade rubber assembly out the plastic support.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts and directional arrows (no text or symbols beyond labels)

1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and install

them in the new blade rubber.

Diagram showing a curved mechanical component with a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Align the claws of the plastic support with the grooves in the blade rubber assembly, then slide the blade rubber assembly into place.

Pure technical line drawing of a mechanical component without any text or symbols

B00067

Securely retain both ends of the rubber with the stoppers on the plastic support ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper may scratch the rear window glass.

1. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
2. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

11-20. Battery

WARNING

• Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas which is highly flammable and explosive.
• For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean over a battery.
• Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediately.

• To lessen the risk of sparks,

remove rings, metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of the vehicle because a short circuit will result.

• Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
• Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.
  ● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery because it will shorten battery life.

It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

For "SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security" without the navigation system:

When the vehicle battery is discharged, replaced, certain internal settings can be restored only by pairing the vehicle to a smartphone via Bluetooth or by visiting a SUBARU dealer. Until those internal settings are restored, certain convenience features, including the "Service Appointment Scheduler", may be unavailable.

11-21. Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

B01801

One is located under the instrument panel behind the fuse box cover on the driver's seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

B01802

1) Spare fuses
2) Fuse puller

The other one (main fuse box) is housed in the engine compartment. Also, the spare fuses and fuse puller are stored in the fuse box cover.

Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller when removing it from the main fuse box.

Two mechanical component diagrams labeled 1 and 2, showing internal structures with no visible text or symbols.

1) Good
2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electr controls do not operate, inspect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, rep it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" OFF position and turn off all electrical accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown. Look at the back side of each fuse box cover and refer to "Fuses and circuits" P482.

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

1. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
2. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the same rating.

If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a problem.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

11-22. Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing fog lights or any other electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such accessories may cause the electronic system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle.

11-23. Replacing bulbs

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, turn off the lights and wait until bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there a risk of sustaining a burn.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire. For the specified wattage of each bulb, refer to "Be chart" P486.

NOTE

For models with type B combination meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF indicator appears on the combination meter when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. It indicates that SRH has been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for inspection.

■ Headlights (models with LED headlights)

the is B01697

The LED headlight warning light illuminates if the LED headlights malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBA dealer as soon as possible.

■ Headlights (models with halogen headlights)

CAUTION

Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while in use. If you tou the bulb surface with bare hands greasy gloves, fingerprints or grease on the bulb surface will develop into hot spots, causing the bulb to break. If there are finger-

LED

prints or grease on the bulb surface, wipe them away with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.

NOTE

- If headlight aiming is required, consult your SUBARU dealer for proper adjustment of the headlight aim. - It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Perform the following steps to replace bulbs.

Technical line drawing of an engine compartment with two black arrows pointing to structural components (no text or symbols present)

Maintenance and service

or Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on the air intake duct, then remove it.

Technical line drawings of mechanical components and a valve assembly (no text or symbols)

Left-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to remove the secured clip of the washer tank. To make it easy to access the bulb, turn the need the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated.

1 2 B01818

Models with halogen headlights

1) Low beam bulb
2) High beam bulb

1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb and remove the bulb from the headlight assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Replace the bulb with new one. At this time, use care not to touch the bulb surface.
3. To install the bulb to the headlight assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
4. Reconnect the electrical connector.
5. Install the air intake duct with clips (right-hand side).

8ofSet the washer fluid filler pipe to the original place and secure it by clip (left-hand side).

■ Front turn signal light

Technical diagram of an automotive engine compartment with two black arrows indicating specific parts (no text or symbols present)

Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on the air intake duct, then remove it.

Technical line drawings of mechanical components and a valve assembly (no text or symbols)

Left-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to remove the secured clip of the washer tank. To make it easy to access the bulb, turn the neck the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with gears and shafts (no text or symbols)

Models with LED headlights

Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and housing (no text or labels)

Models with halogen headlights

1. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Replace the bulb with a new one. At this time, use care not to touch the bulb

surface.

1. To install the bulb to the headlight assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
2. Install the air intake duct with clips (right-hand side).
3. Set the washer tank to the original place and secure it with a clip (left-hand side).

■ Rear combination lights

Diagram of a car door panel with a curved arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols present)

1. Remove the covers.

B01820

1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the upper and lower screws that secure rear combination light assembly.
   

Diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle seat, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

1. Slide the rear combination light assembly rearward and remove it from the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
   

B01822

the1) Backup light
2) Rear side marker light
3) Rear turn signal light
5. Remove the bulb socket from the rea combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket replace it with a new one.
7. Set the bulb socket into the rear combination light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.

1 2 3 B01831

1. Put the rear combination light assembly into place while aligning the guide pins and a catch with the guide holes and a clip on the vehicle.

and

B01820

1. Tighten the upper and lower screws
2. Reinstall the covers.

■ License plate light

Diagram showing two car interior compartments with directional arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present

1. The license plate lights must be

pushed inside, and then pulled out to be removed.

Diagram of a connector with a curved arrow indicating rotation, no text or symbols present

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out the socket.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb socket and the license plate light cover.

■ Map light

CAUTION Replacing the bulb could cause burns since the bulb may be ve hot. Have the bulb replaced by y SUBARU dealer.

■ Vanity mirror light

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause burns since the bulb may be very hot. Have the bulb replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Door step light

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause a short circuit. Have the bulb replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Rear reading light

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause a short circuit. Have the bulb replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Cargo area light

Diagram of a device with a grid pattern and a small inset device, being pointed by a tool (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.

■ Other bulbs

It may be difficult to replace the b Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

11-24. Replacing key battery

The access key fob/transmitter battery may be discharged under the following conditions.

• The operation of the keyless access function is unstable.
• The operating distance of the remote keyless entry system is unstable.
• The transmitter does not operate properly when used within the standard distance.

Replace the battery with a new one. of

■ Safety precautions

CAUTION

• Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the access key fob/transmitter when replacing the battery.
  Before replacing the battery, remove any static electricity.
• Be careful not to touch or damage the printed circuit board in the access key fob/transmitter when replacing the battery.
• Be careful not to allow children to touch the battery and any removed parts; children could

swallow them.

• There is a danger of an explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type of the battery.
• Batteries should not be exposed to excessive heat such as bright sunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE

• Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery recommended by the manufacturer.
• Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
• Mount the battery in the correct orientation to prevent fluid leakage. Be careful not to bend the terminals. It may result in a malfunction.
• It is recommended that the battery be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.
• Use a new battery.
• After replacing the battery, confirm that the transmitter functions properly.

■ Replacing battery of access key fob

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling the access key fob cover, make sure to the plastic part does not come off become misaligned.

Battery: Button battery CR2032 or equivalent

1 2 202500

1) Release button
2) Emergency key

1. Take out the emergency key.

that f or

Line drawing of a car door handle with a handle and clasp (no text or symbols)

B01538

Diagram of a device interior showing a hand holding a button, with no visible text or symbols.

1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vintape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap remove the cover.

B01568

1. Take out the battery using a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

2. Insert a new battery with its positive (+) side facing upward as shown in the figure.
   

Technical line drawing of a device casing with internal components and mounting holes (no text or symbols)

1. Attach the cover to the access key fob by fitting the projections and recesses together.

■ Replacing transmitter battery Battery: Button battery CR1620 or equivalent

Diagram of a car intake manifold with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth. Open the key head using a flat-head screwdriver.

Line drawing of a hand holding a key inserted into a car key (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the transmitter case from the key head.

g a 201639

1. Open the transmitter case by releasing the hooks.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts (1 and 201640), no readable text or symbols beyond labels

1) Negative (−) side facing up

1. Replace the old battery with a new battery making sure to install the new battery with the negative (-) side facing up.
2. Put together the transmitter case by fitting the hooks on the case.
3. Reinstall the transmitter case in the key head.
4. Refit the removed half of the key head.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Specifications

12-1. Specifications 474

Dimensions 474

Engine 475

Fuel 475

Engine oil 476

Front differential and rear differential gear oil .....

Fluids 479

Engine coolant 479

Electrical system 480

Tires.... 480

Temporary spare tires.... 480

Brake pedal 481

Brake disc 481

Brake pad 481

12-2. Fuses and circuits....482

Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment.... 482

Fuse panel located in the engine compartment... 484

12-3. Bulb chart 486

Safety precautions 486

Bulb chart.... 487

12-4. Vehicle identification....489

12-1. Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

■ Dimensions
in (mm)

Item
Overall length 196.8 (4,998)
Overall width 76.0 (1,930)
Overall height 71.6 (1,819)
Wheel base 113.8 (2,890)
Tread	Front 64.4 (1,635)
	Rear 64.2 (1,630)
Ground clearance*		8.7 (220)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

■ Engine

Engine model	FA24(2.4 L, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 146 (2,387)
Bore × Stroke in (mm)	3.70 × 3.39 (94.0 × 86.0)
Compression ratio 10.6 : 1
Firing order	1 - 3 - 2 - 4

Fuel

Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher	19.3 US gal (73 liters, 16.1 Imp gal)

For more details, refer fouel" P307.

■ Engine oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to "Engine oil" P438.

NOTE

The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

▼ Approved engine oil

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer. If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

▼ Alternative engine oil

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors.

Oil grade			SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature	Engine oil capacity
	or		0W-20 synthetic oil is the required for optimum engine performance and protection. Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available, 5W-30 conventional oil may be used if replenishment is needed but should be changed to 0W-20 synthetic oil at the next oil change.ZOM0294	Adding the oil from low level to full level:1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)- Changing the oil and oil filter:4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)
API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”		ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee) GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)

■ Front differential and rear differential gear oil

Oil Front differential gear oil Rear	differential gear oil
Oil grade	SUBARU Extra MT*3API classification GL-5 (75W-90)
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature	ZOM0661
Oil capacity*1	1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Remarks*2	“Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil” P-P445

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.

Fluids

Fluid	Fluid type*1	Fluid capacity2	Remarks*3
Continuously variable transmission fluid	Consult your SUBARU dealer	Models with air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler: 12.7 US qt (12.0 liters, 10.6 Imp qt)*Models without air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler: 12.3 US qt (11.6 liters, 10.2 Imp qt)*	“Continuously variable transmission fluid” ↗P444
Brake fluid	FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid	-	“Brake fluid” ↗P445

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors.

*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*4: Continuously variable transmission type TR690SXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to "Vehicle identification" P489.)

*5: Continuously variable transmission type TR690GXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to "Vehicle identification" P489.)

■ Engine coolant

Coolant capacity Coolant type
11.7 US qt (11.1 liters, 9.8 Imp qt)	SUBARU Super Coolant

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refacing system" P440.

■ Electrical system

Battery type	75D23L
Alternator 12 V - 190 A
Spark plugs	SILKFR8A6 (NGK)

Tires

Tire size 245/60R18 105H 245/50R20 102H
Wheel size		18 × 7.5 J 20 × 7.5 J
Pressure Front		35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm)	2)
	Rear	35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm)	2)
Wheel nut tightening torque		89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to Changing a flat tire" P406.

■ Temporary spare tires

Temporary spare tire size T165/90 D18
Temporary spare tire inflation pressure(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)	60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf Å )m

■ Brake pedal

in (mm)

Pedal clearance	2.68 (68)*
Pedal free play	0.016 - 0.07 (0.4 - 1.8)

*1: Minimum value when pedal is operated with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf)

- Brake disc

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer.

■ Brake pad

in (mm)

Brake pad wear limit	Front 0.063 (1.6)
	Rear	0.059 (1.5)

12-2. Fuses and circuits

■ Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment

C00317

Fuse panel	Fuse rating	Circuit
1 Empty
2 20 A CIGAR
3 7.5 A	IG A-1
4 15 A	AUDIO NAVI
5 15 A	IG B-2
6 Empty
7 Empty
8 15 A	A/C IG
9 7.5 A	ACC
10 7.5 A	IG B-1
11 Empty
12 Empty
13 7.5 A	IG A-3
14 10 A	UNIT +B
15 7.5 A METER IG
16 Empty
17 7.5 A	MIRROR
18 7.5 A	LAMP IG
19 10 A	IG A-2
20 10 A	SRS AIR BAG
21	Empty
22	15 A	STRG/H
23	10 A	DRL
24	Empty
25	Empty
26	10 A	BACK UP
27	15 A	SEAT HTR F
28	15 A	TRAIL
29	Empty
30	Empty
31	Empty
32	7.5 A	ILLUMI
33	7.5 A	KEY SW A
34	Empty
35	Empty
36	7.5 A	KEY SW B
37	7.5 A	STOP
38	7.5 A	EYE SIGHT

■ Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

A 39 C00354

A) Main fuse

Fuse panel	Fuse rating	Circuit
1 7.5 A		HORN HI
2 7.5 A		HORN LO
3 15 A		H/L LO RH
4 15 A		H/L LO LH
5 10 A	DCM
6 10 A		H/L HI RH
7 10 A		H/L HI LH
8 10 A		TAIL
9 30 A		JB-B
10 25 A		FUEL
11 7.5 A		OBD
12 10 A		ODS
13 7.5 A		PU B/UP
14 15 A		HAZARD
15 Empty
16 10 A		MB-B
17 20 A		SOCKET
18 20 A		D/L
19 15 A		ETC
20 10 A		E/G2
21 7.5 A		CVT SSR
22 20 A	DI
23 Empty
24 20 A	O2 HTR
25 Empty
26 20 A	TCU
27 15 A	IG COIL
28 15 A	E/G1
29 30 A	BACKUP
30 15 A	R_S/H
31 30 A	VDC SOL
32 15 A	F. FOG
33 30 A	R. DEF
34 20 A	AUDIO
35 15 A	DEICER
36 Empty
37 20 A	BLOWER
38 20 A	BLOWER
39 Empty
40 15 A	R. WIPER
41 15 A	F. WASH
42 30 A	F. WIPER
43 Empty
44 Empty

12-3. Bulb chart

■ Safety precautions

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, turn off the lights and wait until the bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire.

Bulb chart

1 2 A 3 4 5 6 4 6 B G F E 9

C 7 D 8 12 11 10 9

B01809
Specifications

NOTE

Lights A, B, C, D, E, F and G are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replac

Wattage Bulb No.

1) Front turn signal light (models with halogen headlight) 12 V-28 W 7444NA

2) Front turn signal light (models with LED headlight) 12 V-28 W 7444NA High beam headlight (models with halogen headlight) 12 V-60 W HB3

3) Low beam headlight (models with halogen headlight) 12 V-55 W H11

4) Vanity mirror light 14 V-1.4 W -

5) Map lights 12 V-8 W -

6) Rear reading light (if equipped) 12 V-8 W -

7) Rear turn signal light 12 V-21 W WY21W

8) Rear side marker light 12 V-5 W W5W

9) Door step light (if equipped) 12 V-5 W -

10) Backup light 12 V-16 W W16W

11) License plate light 12 V-5 W W5W

12) Cargo area light 12 V-5 W -

A) Low and high beam headlight (models with LED headlight) - -

B) Side turn signal light (if equipped) - -

C) High-mounted stop light - -

D) Stop light/Tail light - -

E) Front side marker light - -

F) Front position light/Daytime running light - -

G) Front fog light (if equipped) - -

12-4. Vehicle identification

7 1 4 3 2 6 5 C00355

1) Emission control label
2) Tire inflation pressure label
3) Certification label
4) Vehicle identification number plate
5) Model number label
6) Fuel label
7) Air conditioner label

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Consumer information and reporting safety defec

13-1. For U.S.A. 492
13-2. Tire information 492

Tire labeling 492

Recommended tire inflation pressure.... 494

Glossary of tire terminology 495

Tire care - maintenance and safety practices..... 500

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capacities 500

Adverse safety consequences of overloading on handling and stopping and on tires....500

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 501

13-3. Vehicle load limit – how to determine ....50 Calculating total and load capacities varying seating configurations.... 502
13-4. Uniform tire quality grading standards .....504 TREADWEAR ..... 505 TRACTION AA, A, B, C ..... 505 TEMPERATURE A, B, C ..... 505
13-5. Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.).....506

13-1. For U.S.A.

The following information has been compiled according to Code of Federal Regulations "Title 49, Part 575".

13-2. Tire information

■ Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Identification Number or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire manufacturers. These markings can provide you with useful information on the tire.

▼ Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with P-Metric tire size. It is important to understand the sizing system in selecting the proper tire for your vehicles. Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its individual elements.

▽ P Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section Width is measured in millimeters. To convert millimeters into inches, divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Section Height divided by Section Width) helps provide more dimensional information about the tire size.

Example:

P(1)

205/ (2)

55/ (3)

R(4)

16/ (5)

(1) P = Certain tire type used on light duty vehicles such as passenger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height ÷ section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

▽ Load and Speed Rating Descriptions

The load and speed rating descriptions will appear following the size designation.

They provide two important facts about the tire. First, the number designation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates the tire's speed rating.

Example:

P	205 / 55	R	16	89	V
	Size designation			(6)	(7)

(6) Load Index: A numerical code which specifies the maximum load a tire can carry at the speed indicated by its speed symbol, at maximum inflation pressure.

For example, "90" means 1,323 lbs (600 kg), "89" means 1,278 lbs (580 kg).

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire's rated load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical system describing a tire's capability to travel at established and predetermined speeds. For example, "V" means 149 mph (240 km/h)

WARNING

• Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a speed rated tire any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be operated at the tire's rated speed.
• The speed rating is void if the tires are worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered from their original condition. If tires are repaired, re-treaded, or otherwise altered, they may not be suitable for original equipment tire designed loads and speeds.

▼ Tire Identification Number (TIN)

yTire Identification Number (TIN) is marked on the intended outboard sidewall. The TIN is composed of four groups. Here is a brief review the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

DOT

XX(1)

XX(2)

XXX(3)

XXXX(4)

on(1) Manufacturer's Identification Mark

(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the week, starting with "01" to represent the first full week of the calendar year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001.

▼ Other markings

The following makings are also placed on the sidewall.

▽ Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be inflated. For example, "300 kPa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS"

▽ Maximum load rating

The load rating at the maximum permissible weight load for this tire For example, "MAX. LOAD 580 kg (1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS."

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire's rated load.

▽ Construction type

Applicable construction of this tire For example, "TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RADIAL"

∇ Construction

The generic name of each cord material used in the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this tire. For example, "PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-WALL 2 POLYESTER"

e. ▽ Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)

For details, refer to "Uniform tire quality grading standards" P504.

■ Recommended tire inflation pressure
▼ Recommended cold tire inflation pressure

For recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle's tires, refer to "Tires" P480.

▼ Vehicle placard

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

The vehicle placard is attached to the driver's side door pillar.

Example:

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY: TOTAL X FRONT X REAR X NOMBRE DE PLACES: AVANT ARRIERE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XX0kg or XX0bs. Le poïde total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais dépasser XXX0kg ou XXX0b. TIRE PNEU SIZE DIMENSIONS COLD TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION DES PNEUS À FROID SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FRONT AVANT PXOOXXRXX XXOKPA, XXPSI REAR ARRIERE PXOOXXRXX XXOKPA, XXPSI SPARE DE SECOURS TXOOXXDXX XXOKPA, XXPSI VOIR LE MANUEL DE L'USAGER POUR PLUS DE RENSEIGNEMENTS X D00155

The vehicle placard shows original tire size, recommended cold tire inflation pressure on each tire at maximum loaded vehicle weight, seating capacity and loading information.

▼ Adverse safety consequences of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to flex severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause tread separation, and failure of the tire(s). Possible resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

▼ Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper inflation

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey. Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the specific values. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm time to reduce its pressure.

■ Glossary of tire terminology • Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess those standard items which may replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brak power windows, power seats, rad and heater, to the extent that the items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).

- Bead The part of the tire that is made steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped the rim.

- Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead.

- Bias ply tire - A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantial less than 90 degrees to the centre-line of the tread.

re Carcass The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load.

of Chunking be The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall.

• Cold tire pressure The pressure in a tire that has been driven less than 1 mile or has been standing for three hours or more.

- Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire.

of Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds.

- Cracking Any parting within the tread, side wall, or inner liner of the tire extending to cord material.

- Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine.

- Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at high loads and higher inflation pressure than the corresponding standard tire.

- Groove

The space between two adjacent tread ribs.

- Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

• Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass.

- Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has particular side that must always face outward when mounting or

a vehicle.

erLight truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.

- Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.

s Maximum inflation pressure

.The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be infla

• Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

• Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(c) Vehicle capacity weight

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be infla

- Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements.

• Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 that is appended to the end of this section.

• Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 that is appended to the end of this section.

- Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material.

- Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire.

- Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs.

- Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVW) of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.

• Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.

- Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies.

- Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.

• Production options weight

The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or acc sory weight, including heavy duty -brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special tri

- Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

- Recommended inflation pressure

The cold inflation pressure recommended by a vehicle manufacture

- Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at high loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire.

• Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.

- Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead sea

- Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

- Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code.

- Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges.

- Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands.

- Sidewall

eThat portion of a tire between the tread and bead.

- Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the side wall.

- Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single

- CONTINUED -

Wheel Driving Traction in a Straightcity.

Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked w an Alpine Symbol “” on at least one sidewall.

- Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted testing, and it may be any rim list as appropriate for use with that ti

- Tread

That portion of a tire that comes contact with the road.

- Tread rib

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire.

- Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass.

• Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear the tread.

• Vehicle capacity weight

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capa-

- Vehicle maximum load on the tire - Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing dry two.

ted/vehicle normal load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each made its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal oc- cupant weight (distributed in accor- dance with Table 1 that is appended to the end of this section) and dividing by 2.

• Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing.

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, number of occupants	Vehicle normal load, number of occupants	Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2	2 in front.
5 through 10 3		2 in front, 1 in second seat.
11 through 15 5		2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat.
16 through 22 7		2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat.

■ Tire care – maintenance an safety practices
- Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage nails, and stones. At the same time check the tires for abnormal wear.
- Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible. When a tire's tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at even low speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. Possible resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.
- To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every 6,000 miles (10,000 km). For information about the tire rotation order, refer to "Tire rotation" P453. Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tires at the time of

rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tightened. For information about the tightening torque and tightening sequence for the wheel nuts, refer to "Flat tires" P406.

■ Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capacities

The sum of four tires' maximum load ratings must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle weight (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the maximum load ratings of two front tires and of two rear tires must exceed each axle's maximum loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original equipment tires are designed to fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle weight is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). And each axle's maximum loaded capacity is referred to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle's GAWR are shown on the vehicle certification label located at the bottom of driver's side door pillar.

The GVWR and front and rear GAWRs are determined by not only the maximum load rating of tires but also loaded capacities of the vehicle's suspension, axles and other parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the vehicle cannot necessarily be loaded up to the tire's maximum load rating on the tire sidewall.

■ Adverse safety consequences of overloading on handling and stopping and on tires

Overloading could affect vehicle handling, stopping distance, and vehicle and tire performance in the following ways. This could lead to an accident and possibly result in severe personal injury.

- Vehicle stability will deteriorate. - Heavy and/or high-mounted

loads could increase the risk of rollover.

• Stopping distance will increase.
• Brakes could overheat and fail.
• Suspension, bearings, axles and other body parts could break or experience accelerated wear that will shorten vehicle life.
• Tires could fail.
• Tread separation could occur.
• Tire could separate from its rim.

■ Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 1 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

13-3. Vehicle load limit - how to determine

150

The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The load limit of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's side door pillar. Locate the statement of the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on your vehicle's placard.

The vehicle placard also shows seating capacity of your vehicle. The total load capacity includes the total weight of driver and all passengers and their belongings, any cargo, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bicycle carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity can be calculated by the following methods.

Cargo capacity = Load limit - (total weight of occupants + total weight

of optional equipment + tongue of a trailer (if applicable))

For information about vehicle loading, refer to Loading your vehicle" P382.

■ Calculating total and load capacities varying seating configurations

Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following examples:

Example 1A

Line drawing of a car interior view showing driver and passenger (no text or symbols)

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which i aindicated on the vehicle placard with the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 900 lbs or 408 kg".

For example, if the vehicle has one occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300 kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight

$$ \begin{array}{l} = \frac {1 5 4 \text { lbs (70 kg) }}{(\text { Occupant })} + \frac {6 6 2 \text { lbs (300 kg) }}{(\text { Cargo })} \ = 8 1 6 \text { lbs (370 kg) } \ \end{array} $$

1. Calculate the available load capacity by subtracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).

Available Load Capacity

$$ = \frac {9 0 0 \text { lbs (408 kg) }}{\text {(Vehicle capacity weight)}} - \frac {8 1 6 \text { lbs (370 kg) }}{\text {(Total weight)}} $$

$$ = 8 4 \text { lbs (38 kg) } $$

is3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can be carried.

Example 1B

Line drawing of a car interior view showing three people seated in the driver's seat (no text or symbols)

For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to two), the calculations are as follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight

$$ = \frac {1 5 4 \text { lbs (70 kg) } + 1 7 6 \text { lbs (80 kg) }}{(\text { Occupant })} $$

$$ + \frac {6 6 2 \text { lbs (300 kg) }}{(\text { Cargo })} $$

$$ = 9 9 2 \text { lbs (450 kg) } $$

1. Calculate the available load capacity.

Available Load Capacity

$$ = \frac {9 0 0 \text { lbs (408 kg) }}{\text {(Vehicle capacity weight)}} - \frac {9 9 2 \text { lbs (450 kg) }}{\text {(Total weight)}} $$

$$ = - 9 2 \text { lbs } (- 4 2 \text { kg }) $$

1. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more

Example 2A

Line drawing of a car connected to a small vehicle via a plug, no text or symbols present

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which indicated on the vehicle placard with the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 408 kg or 900 lbs".

For example, the vehicle has one occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170 kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to which is attached a trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% the trailer weight is applied to the

trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight

$$ = \frac {1 6 5 \text { lbs (75 kg) }}{(\text { Occupant })} + \frac {3 7 5 \text { lbs (170 kg) }}{(\text { Cargo })} $$

$$ + \frac {2 2 \text { lbs (10 kg) }}{(\text { Trailer hitch })} + \frac {1 7 6 \text { lbs (80 kg) }}{(\text { Tongue load })} $$

$$ = 7 3 8 \text { lbs (335 kg) } $$

1. Calculate the available load capacity.

s Available Load Capacity

$$ = \frac {9 0 0 \text { lbs (408 kg) }}{\text {(Vehicle capacity weight)}} - \frac {7 3 8 \text { lbs (335 kg) }}{\text {(Total weight)}} $$

$$ = 1 6 2 \text { lbs (73 kg) } $$

1. The result of step 2 shows that a further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can be carried.

Example 2B

Line drawing of a car with driver and crew, connected to a small vehicle (no text or symbols)

For example, if a person weighing 143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weigh 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to three), and a child restraint system weighing 11 lbs (kg) is installed in the vehicle for child to use, the calculations are follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight

$$ \begin{array}{l} = \frac {1 6 5 \text { lbs (75 kg) } + 1 4 3 \text { lbs (65 kg) }}{(\text { Occupant })} \ + \frac {4 0 \text { lbs (18 kg) }}{(\text { Occupant })} \ + \frac {1 1 \text { lbs (5 kg) }}{(\text { Child restraint })} + \frac {3 7 5 \text { lbs (170 kg) }}{(\text { Cargo })} \ + \frac {2 2 \text { lbs (10 kg) }}{\text {(Trailer hitch)}} + \frac {1 7 6 \text { lbs (80 kg) }}{\text {(Tongue load)}} \ = 9 3 2 \text { lbs (423 kg) } \ \end{array} $$

ing Calculate the available load capacity.

Available Load Capacity

$$ 5 = \frac {9 0 0 \text { lbs (408 kg) }}{\text { (Vehicle }} - \frac {9 3 2 \text { lbs (423 kg) }}{\text { (Total weight) }} $$

$$ \begin{array}{l} \text {the capacity weight)} \ \text {as} \end{array} $$

$$ = - 3 2 \text { lbs } (- 1 5 \text { kg }) $$

1. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or mo

13-4. Uniform tire quality grading standards

This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car tires in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consumer in making an informed choice in the purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A

The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. However, they do not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited production tires.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ TRACTION AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measure under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

of ⚠️ WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

■ TEMPERATURE A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the entire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

-excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards No. 109.

- Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for the tire is established for a tire is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or fin combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

13-5. Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building, Washington, DC 20590. You can

also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Index

Index

A

Abbreviation P3

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P334

Warning light P179, P334

Access key fob P118

Warning light P184, P185

Accessories P462

Accessory power outlet P290

Air cleaner element P442

Air conditioner

Automatic climate control..... P268

Manual climate control.... P270

Air filtration system P276

Air flow mode P270

Alarm system P141

All-Wheel Drive warning light..... P182

Antenna.... P280

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P334

Arming the system P142

Ashtray.... P294

Assist grip.... P296

AT OIL TEMP warning light P177

Audio set P281

Auto dimmer cancel function P172

Auto on/off headlights..... P224

Sensor P225

Auto Vehicle Hold function P345

ON indicator light P181

Operation indicator light..... P181

Auto-dimming mirror/compass P238

Automatic headlight beam leveler

Warning light P190

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR) P55

Automatic rain sensing windshield wipers..... P235

B

Battery P460

Drainage prevention function P141

Jump starting.... P410

Replacement (access key fob).... P469

Replacement (transmitter) P470

Vehicle battery P460

Booster seat P74

Brake

Assist P333

Booster P332, P446

Disc..... P481

Fluid P445, P479

Parking P343

Pedal.... P446

System P332

Brake system.... P332

Warning light P179

Braking P332

Tips P332

Breaking-in of new brake pads.... P447

BSD/RCTA P351

Approach indicator light/warning buzzer P355

OFF indicator..... P191, P194, P355, P357, P358

OFF switch P358

Warning indicator.... P191, P194, P358

Warning volume P356

Bulb

Chart..... P486

Replacement P463

C

Cargo area

Cover P297

Light P285, P468

Tie-down hooks P300

Catalytic converter P373

Center console P288

Changing

Coolant.... P442

Flat tire.... P406

Oil and oil filter P439

Charge warning light P176

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light.... P175

Checking

Coolant level P441

Fluid level (brake fluid) P445

Fluid level (washer fluid) P455

Oil level (engine oil) P438

Child restraint systems P65

Installation of a booster seat P74

Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt P70

Lower and tether anchorages.... P75

Top tether anchorages.... P79

Child safety P4

Locks..... P144

Chime

Key P165

Light P223

Seatbelt P55, P173

Cigarette lighter P291

Cleaning

Alloy wheels P426

Interior P427

Ventilation grille.... P274

Climate control system.... P265

Automatic.... P268

Manual P270

Clock P202, P203, P206, P211, P220

Coat hook P296

Combination meter display (color LCD).... P192

Compass.... P238

Console P288

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) P325

Fluid P444

Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ..... P177

Cooling system P440

Corrosion protection P426

D

Daytime running light system P229

Defogger P259

Defrosting.... P274

Deicer P259

Index

Differential gear oil

Front P445, P478

Rear P445, P478

Dimensions P474

Disarming the alarm system.... P143

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators P333

Door

Locks P138

Open warning light.... P182

Step light P467

Unlock selection function P198

Double trip meter P169

Drive belts P444

Driving

AWD vehicles P374

Drinking P6

Drugs P6

Foreign countries P374

Off road P376

Pets P7

Snowy and icy roads..... P379

Tips.... P331, P372, P374

Tired or sleepy P7

Winter P378

E

ECO gauge.... P171

Electrical system P480

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system P180, P335

Warning.... P180

Electronic parking brake P343

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal .... P345

Indicator light P180

Warning P348

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) P55

Engine

Compartment overview P437

Coolant P441, P479

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).... P6, P372

Hood P435

Low oil level warning light P176

Oil P438, P476

Overheating.... P413

Starting & stopping.... P313, P315

Event data recorder P9

Exterior care P424

F

Flat tires P406

Floor mat.... P295

Fluid level

Brake P445

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...... P444

Fog light P231

Bulb.... P486

Indicator light P191

Switch P231

Front

Differential gear oil P445, P478

Seatbelt pretensioners P62

Turn signal light P464

Fuel P307, P475

Consumption indicator..... P195, P199, P205, P211

Economy hints..... P372

Fuses and circuits.... P482

G

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).... P383

Glove box P288

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).... P383

H

Hazard warning flasher.... P168, P400

Headlight P224, P463

Beam leveler.... P231

Bulb replacing P463

Bulb wattage P486

Control switch P223

Flasher P226

Indicator light P191

Welcome lighting function P225

High beam assist function.... P227

Indicator light P190

High beam indicator light P190

High/low beam change (dimmer) P226

Hill descent control P339, P341

Indicator light..... P191

Hill start assist P350

HomeLink® P238

Hook

Cargo tie-down P300

Coat P296

Shopping bag P297

Towing and tie-down.... P414

Horn P262

Hose and connections.... P441

|

Ignition switch P164

Light P165

Illumination brightness control P171

Immobilizer P132

Indicator light (security indicator light) ...... P132, P189

Indicator light

Auto Vehicle Hold ON P181

Auto Vehicle Hold operation P181

BSD/RCTA OFF.... P191, P194, P357, P358

BSD/RCTA warning P191, P194, P358

Electronic parking brake.... P180

Front fog light P191

Headlight..... P191

High beam P190

High beam assist P190

High beam assist warning P190

Hill descent control.... P191

Immobilizer..... P132, P189

Security P132, P189

Select lever/Gear position P190

Index

Turn signal..... P190
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF.... P184
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ...... P183, P184
X-MODE..... P191
Inside mirror..... P238
Interior lights P284

J

Jack-up point..... P406

Jump starting P410

K

Key P117
Number plate P117
Reminder chime P165
Replacement.... P132

Keyless access with push-button start system..... P118

Disabling keyless access functions P128

Warning chimes and warning light P130, P184

When access key does not operate properly.... P130, P168, P318, P417

Keyless entry system P134

L

Lap belt pretensioner P62

Leather seat materials.... P427

License plate light.... P467

Light

Backup P465

Cargo area P285, P468

Control switch P223

Daytime running.... P229

Door step P467

Front fog P231

Front side marker..... P224, P486

Front turn P464

Ignition switch P165

License plate P467

Map.... P284, P467

Rear combination P465

Rear side marker light P465

Stop P465

Tail light P465

Turn signal P232, P464, P465

Vanity mirror P286, P467

Loading your vehicle.... P382

Low fuel warning light P181

Low tire pressure warning light P177

Lower and tether anchorage P75

M

Maintenance

Precautions P433

Schedule.... P433

Seatbelt P61

Tools P400

Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light) ....

Manual mode P328

Map light P284, P467

Maximum load limits P390

Meters and gauges P168

Mirror defogger.... P259

Mirrors..... P238

Moonroof P156, P420

Multi-function display (black and white) P199

Multi-function display (color LCD) P203

N

New vehicle break-in driving P372

0

Odometer P169

Off road driving.... P376

Oil filter P439

Oil level

Engine P438

Front differential gear P445

Rear differential gear.... P445

Warning light P176

Oil pressure warning light P176

On-road and off-road driving P8

One-touch lane changer P232

Outside

Mirror defogger.... P259

Mirrors.... P258, P259

Temperature indicator P202, P206

Overheating engine.... P413

P

Parking..... P343

Brake P343

Tips.... P348

Periodic inspections.... P374

Petrol fuel.... P307

PIN code Access P125

Power

Outlets..... P290

Outside mirrors P258, P259

Rear gate.... P149

Steering P331

Steering warning light P182

Windows P145

Precautions against vehicle modification ..... P64, P112

Preparing to drive.... P313

Push-button

Ignition switch.... P164, P166

Starting and stopping engine P313, P315

R

RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)

OFF indicator P191

Warning indicator P191

RCTA.... P353

Rear

Combination lights P465

Differential gear oil P445, P478

Gate P148, P419

Turn signal light P465

Rear differential

Oil temperature warning light P177

Rear window

Defogger.... P259

Wiper and washer switch P237

Index

Wiper blades.... P458

Recommended

Brake fluid P446, P479

Continuously variable transmission fluid ...... P479

Engine oil P440, P476

Front differential gear oil P478

Rear differential gear oil P478

Spark plugs..... P444, P480

Refueling P308

Remote engine start system.... P318

Remote keyless entry system.... P134

Replacement

Access key fob battery P469

Air cleaner element P443

Brake pad P447

Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) .... P136

Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ...... P470

Wiper blades.... P456

Replacing bulbs.... P463, P486

Backup light P465

Cargo area light.... P468

Door step light P467

Front position light P464

Front turn signal light P464

Halogen headlight.... P463

LED headlight P463

License plate light P467

Map light P467

Rear combination light.... P465

Rear side marker light P465

Rear turn signal light P465

Stop light..... P465

Tail light P465

Vanity mirror light P467

Reverse Automatic Braking System.... P360

Rocking the vehicle P382

Roof rails.... P384

Roof tent P385

s

Safety

Precautions when driving P4

Symbol P3

Warnings.... P2

Seat

Fabric P427

Heater P50

Seatbelt.... P4, P53

Fastening P55

Maintenance P61

Pretensioners P62

Safety tips P53

Warning light and chime.... P55, P173

Security

Alarm system.... P141

Immobilizer..... P132

Indicator light..... P132, P189

Select lever

Position indicator P190

Shift lock function P329

Shopping bag hook P297

Shoulder pretensioners P63

Smart Rearview Mirror..... P245

Snow tires.... P380, P448

Snowy and icy roads..... P379

Sounding a panic alarm.... P136

Spare tire.... P401

Spark plugs.... P444, P480

Specifications P474

Speedometer.... P168

SRS Curtain airbag P102

Frontal airbag.... P91

Side airbag P102

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag).... P4, P81

SRS airbag system Monitors P109

Servicing P111

Warning light P174

Starting & stopping engine.... P313, P315

State emission testing (U.S. only) P311

Steering Responsive Headlight..... P230

Steering wheel Heater P261

Power P331

Storage compartment P287

Sun visors..... P285

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ..... P4, P81

Synthetic leather upholstery P428

T Tachometer.... P168
Temperature gauge.... P170
Temperature warning light AT OIL TEMP .... P177 Rear differential oil .... P177
Temporary spare tire.... P405, P480
Tether (child restraint system) P75, P79
Tie-down hooks/holes P414
Tire.... P447, P480 Chains .... P38
Inspection P449
Pressures and wear P450
Replacement P453
Rotation P453
Size and pressure P480
Types P447
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).... P177, P342, P409, P448 Warning light .... P177
Tires and wheels P447
Tools.... P400
Top tether anchorages P75, P79
Towing P414
All wheels on the ground.... P416
Flat-bed truck P416
Hooks P414
Weight P390
Trailer Connecting.... P388
Hitch..... P386, P394

Index

Towing tips.... P396

Trailer towing P390

Trip meter P169

Turn signal Indicator lights P190 Lever P232

U

Under-floor storage compartment..... P300

USB power supply P292

v

Valet mode.... P144

Vanity mirror P286, P467

Light P467

Vehicle

Capacity weight P383

Identification..... P489

Symbols P4

Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light P184

OFF switch P337

Operation indicator light..... P183, P184, P337

System P336

Warning light P183, P184

Ventilator P264

W

Warning and indicator lights P172

Warning chimes

Keyless access with push-button start system..... P184

Seatbelt P55, P173

Warning light

ABS.... P179, P334

Access key fob P185

All-Wheel Drive P182

AT OIL TEMP P177

Automatic headlight beam leveler.... P190

Brake system.... P179

BSD/RCTA P191

Charge P176

CHECK ENGINE P175

Door open P182

Engine low oil level P176

Icy road surface P191

Keyless access with push-button start system ..... P184

LED headlight..... P190

Low fuel P181

Low tire pressure P177

Oil pressure.... P176

Power steering.... P182

RAB P191

Rear differential oil temperature P177

Seatbelt P55, P173

SRS airbag system P174

Steering Responsive Headlight P190

Vehicle Dynamics Control P183, P184

Windshield washer fluid P176

Warranties P1

Warranties and maintenance P390

Washing P424

Waxing and polishing.... P425

Wear indicators P452

Welcome lighting function P225

Wheel

Alloy P455

Balance P451

Nut tightening torque.... P406, P480

Replacement P454

Windows.... P145

Windshield

Washer fluid P455

Wiper and washer switches P235

Wiper blades P457

Wiper deicer.... P259

Winter

Driving.... P378

Tires.... P380, P448

Wiper and washer.... P232

Wiper deicer P259

x

X-MODE P339

Indicator P191

Indicator light P191

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI RON) or higher.

■ Fuel octane rating

▼ RON

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

▼ AKI

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the An Knock Index (AKI).

■ Fuel tank capacity

19.3 US gal (73 liters, 16.1 Imp gal)

■ Engine oil

U90 only the following oils.

• API classification SN with the words "RESOURCE CONSERVING"
• or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to "Engine oil" P476.

■ Engine oil capacity

4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil f After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked using the oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to "Engine oil" P438.

■ Cold tire pressure

Refer to "Tires" P480.